Cgna18403ens 001 PDF

EUROPEAN
COMMISSION
SCIENCE
RESEARCH
DEVELOPMENT
technical steel research
Properties and in-service performance
Simplified version of
Eurocode 4 for
usual buildings
Report
hi
EUR 18403 EN
STEEL RESEARCH
EUROPEAN COMMISSION
Edith CRESSON, Member of the Commission
responsible for research, innovation, education, training and youth
DG XII/C.2 RTD actions: Industrial and materials technologies
Materials and steel
Contact: Mr H. J.-L Martin
Address: European Commission, rue de la Loi 200 (MO 75 1/10),
B-1049 Brussels Tel. (32-2) 29-53453; fax (32-2) 29-65987
European Commission
Properties and in-service performance
Simplified version of Eurocode 4

for usual buildings
J. B. Schleich, Ph. Chantrain
ProfilARBED-Recherches
66, rue de Luxembourg
L-4221 Esch/Alzette
Contract No 7210-SA/516
1 July 1993 to 30 June 1993
Final report
Directorate-General
Science, Research and Development
1998
EUR 18403 EN
LEGAL NOTICE
Neither the European Commission nor any person acting on behalf of the Commission
is responsible for the use which might be made of the following information.
A great deal of additional information on the European Union is available on the Internet.
It can be accessed through the Europa server (http://europa.eu.int).
Cataloguing data can be found at the end of this publication.
Luxembourg: Office for Official Publications of the European Communities, 1998
ISBN 92-828-4467-6
European Communities, 1998
Reproduction is authorised provided the source is acknowledged.
Printed in
Luxembourg
PRINTED ON WHITE CHLORINE-FREE PAPER
Table of contents
page
Acknowledgements
Summary
Rsum
Zusammenfassung
References
1. Introduction
2. Working group
3. Part 1 : Worked examples
10
3.1 Exercise 1 : Verification of an existing braced composite steel-concrete structure
10
3.2 Exercise 2: Design of a new braced composite steel-concrete structure
11
4. Part 2 : Design handbook
11
Figures
13
"Design handbook according to Eurocode 4 for braced composite steel-concrete buildings".

(Short title : "EC4 for braced buildings")
23-232
Acknowledgements
This research project which has been sponsored by C.E.C., the Commission of the European Community,
has been performed from 01.07.1993 to 30.06.1995.
We want to acknowledge firstly all the financial support from the Commission of the European Community,
as well as the moral support given during this research by all the members of the C.E.C. Executive
Commitee F6 "Steel Structures".
Many thanks are also due to all, who by any means may have contributed in this research :
ProfilARBED-Recherches / RPS Department (Luxembourg) (coordinator of this project) :
MM. Chantrain Ph., Conan Y., Mauer Th. and Warszta F.
Aachen University, RWTH - LfS (Germany) :
Prof. Sedlacek G. and Dr. Grotmann D.
all the 15 engineering offices listed in chapter 2, issued from various European countries.
Summary
The aim of the following E.C.S.C. research is to elaborate a simple but complete document to design
commonly used buildings with composite steel-concrete sections. This document is based completely on
Eurocode 4 and each paragraph is totally conform to Eurocode 4. Only the design formulas necessary to
design braced building have been taken into account in this document. The size of the buildings is limited to
20 storeys, halls are not treated. The designers and steel constructors will be able to calculate and erect a
commonly used composite steel-concrete building with this document. Therefore also the important load
cases from Eurocode 1 have been included in this document.
The working group of this research project was constituted with 15 European engineering offices.
The link of the working group to the drafting panel of Eurocode 4 was guaranteed by Professor Sedlacek of
Aachen University.
The first part of the research consisted in two different examples of calculation carried out by engineering
offices:
check of an existing braced composite steel-concrete structure with Eurocodes 1 and 4 and,
design of a braced composite steel-concrete building with Eurocodes 1 and 4.
In the second part of this research a practical handbook of Eurocode 4 has been written on the basis of the
design procedures and the needed formulas used in the examples of calculation.
Rsum
Le but de cette recherche CECA est d'laborer un document simple mais complet pour calculer des
btiments courants comprenant des sections mixtes acier-bton. Ce document est entirement bas sur
VEurocode 4 et chaque paragraphe est totalement conforme l'Eurocode 4. Il n'a t pris en compte que les
formules ncessaires au calcul de btiments contrevents. La hauteur des btiments a t limite 20 tages
et les halles n'y sont pas traites. Les bureaux d'tudes et constructeurs mtalliques devront tre capables de
calculer et d'riger un btiment courant mixte acier-bton avec ce manuel de dimensionnement. Les cas de
charges les plus importants issus de l'Eurocode 1 sont galement inclus dans ce document.
Le groupe de travail du projet de recherche tait constitu de 15 bureaux d'tudes europens.
La jonction entre le groupe de travail et le groupe de rdaction de l'Eurocode 4 a t faite par le professeur
Sedlacek de l'Universit d'Aix-La-Chapelle.
En premire partie, ce groupe de travail a effectu deux exemples diffrents de calculs :
vrification selon les Eurocodes 1 et 4 d'une structure mixte acier-bton contrevente,
dimensionnement selon les Eurocodes 1 et 4 d'un btiment mixte acier-bton contrevent.
Grce ces exemples concrets de calcul, les formules de l'Eurocode 4 utiles au dimensionnement ont t
mises en vidence et une procdure gnrale de dimensionnement a t dtermine. Le manuel de
dimensionnement "EC 4 pour btiments contreventes" se base sur cette exprience.
Zusammenfassung
Dieses EGKS Forschungsprojekt hat zum Ziel, ein einfaches aber vollstndiges Dokument fr allgemeine
(bliche) Verbundbaubemessung auszuarbeiten. Dieses Dokument ist vllig auf Eurocode 4 basiert und
jeder Paragraph pat genau zu Eurocode 4. Nur die ausgesteifter Tragwerke notwendigen Formeln,
werden bercksichtigt. Hochhuser mit mehr als 20 Etagen oder Hallen werden nicht behandelt. Die
Ingenieurbros und Stahlkonstrukteure haben die Mglichkeit mit diesem Design-Handbuch ein bliches
Bauwerk in Verbundbauweise zu berechnen und zu bauen. Dafr sind die wichtigsten Lastflle von
Eurocode 1 in diesem Dokument beinhaltet.
Die Arbeitsgruppe des Forschungssprojekt bestand aus 15 europischen Ingenieurbros.
Die Verbindung zwischen der Arbeitsgruppe und dem technischen Komitee von Eurocode 4 wurde von
Professor Sedlacek der Aachener Universitt hergestellt.
Die Arbeitsgruppe hat, im ersten Teil dieses Forschungsvorhabens, verschiedene Berechnungsbeispiele
durchgefhrt :
Nachweis einer ausgesteiften Verbundstruktur nach Eurocode 1 und 4,
Berechnung eine ausgesteiften Verbundbauwerkes nach Eurocode 1 und 4.
Anschlieend an diese konkreten Beispiele, wurden die bensutzten Bemessungsformeln nach Eurocode 4
hervorgehoben und ein allgemeines Bemessungsverfahren wurde festgelegt. Das Design-Handbuch "EC 4
fr seitensteife Hochbauten" basiert auf dieser Erfahrung.
References
Ref.l :
Eurocode 4: Design of Composite Steel and Concrete Structures. Part 1.1: General rules and rules
for buildings (prENV 1994-1-1, April 1992).
Ref. 2 :
Eurocode 1 : Basis of Design and Actions on Structures.
Ref. 3 :
"Simplified version of Eurocode 4 for usual buildings", C.E.C. Agreement 7210-SA/516,

Technical Report n 3, ProfilARBED, Luxembourg, March 95
SIMPLIFIED VERSION OF EUROCODE 4

FOR USUAL BUILDINGS
C.E.C. AGREEMENT N7210-SA/516
Introduction
The research has been divided into two different parts:
in the first part worked examples of braced or non-sway composite steel-concrete structures have
been carried out by European engineering offices according to Eurocode 4 (Ref 1) and Eurocode 1
(Ref 2).
Contacts have been taken with different engineering offices in Europe and professional organisations
(E.C.C.S. and C.T.I.CM.). The working group of this research project has been constituted with 15
engineering offices.
in the second part the needed formulae for simple design of braced structures have been selected
thanks to the exercises about check and design of composite steel-concrete buildings. The design
handbook has been elaborated on the basis of that experience.
The present draft final report of this research project presents the design handbook called "Design handbook
according to Eurocode 4 for braced composite steel-concrete buildings" (short title : "EC4 for braced
buildings").
2.
Working group
The research project was fully managed and carried out by ProfilARBED - Research (RPS Department),
with the active support of the following working group which is particularly thanked for the fruitful
collaboration :
The following 9 engineering offices were involved to perform the 2 worked examples:
Engineering office
City
Country
Bureau Delta
Lige
Belgium
Varendonck Groep / Steeltrack
Gent
Belgium
VM Associate Partner
Bruxelles
Belgium
11
CPU Ingenieurbro
Ganderkesee
Germany
12
IGB-Ingenieurgruppe Bauen
Karlsruhe
Germany
14
Schroeder & Associs
Luxembourg
Luxemburg
16
D3BN
Nieuwegein
The Netherlands
18
Ove Arup & Partners
London
UK
19
Prof. Falke J.
Kiel
Germany
Reference
Number
Professor Sedlacek and assistant from Aachen University (Germany) which guaranteed the link of
this working group to the drafting panel of Eurocode 4 and Eurocode 1,
other following engineering offices participated to the meetings of the full working group:
Engineering office
Reference
Number
2
Adem
Rambll, Hannemann & Hjlund
7
9
10
Bureau Veritas
Socotec
Sofresid
Danieli Ingegneria
13
3.
City
Country
Mons
Copenhagen
Belgium
Courbevoie
Saint-Quentin-Yvelines
Montreu
Livorno
Denmark
France
France
France
Italy
Part 1 : Worked examples
In order to find the needed formulae for the design of composite steel-concrete buildings the engineering
offices performed 2 different exercises :
exercise 1: verification of an existing braced composite steel-concrete structure,
exercise 2: design of a new braced composite steel-concrete structure.
Different drawings issued from the exercises of engineering offices are enclosed in the Technical report nr. 3
(Ref. 3) showing the type of the calculated buildings and some details :
3.1
carpark,
(engineering office nr. 3),
(Annex 2 of Ref. 3),
2 offices buildings,
office building,
office building,
office buding,
office building,
Exercise 1: Verification of an existing braced composite steel-concrete structure
The flow chart of Figure 1 shows the procedure followed for the verification of an existing building with
Eurocodes 1 and 4. This first exercise aimed to find the needed formulae given by Eurocodes in order to
check the safety of the different limit states (Ultimate Limit State and Serviceability Limit State).
This exercise was not an iterative process, it was only a verification procedure of an existing braced
composite steel-concrete building.
The flow chart of figure 1 is divided into 3 subjects:
a.
The "Keywords" representing the different steps of a check procedure.

1.
conceptional type of structure.
2.
Occupancies.
3.
Shape.
10
b.
4.
structural concept.
5.
action effects.
6.
design and vrification.

The "Requirements and References" of each step of the verification.
The references are Eurocode 1, Eurocode 4 and the product standards EN 10025 and EN 10113.
c.
3.2
The "Object" describing each step of the verification.
Exercise 2: Design of a new braced composite steel-concrete structure
After the first exercise, the engineering offices have been familiarized with Eurocodes 1 and 4. They
performed a complete design of a new structure by using an iterative procedure. The aim of this exercise was
to analyse the way to find a good solution.
This exercise allowed us to follow step by step the calculation of a structure in practice. The practical design
handbook about the simplified version of Eurocode 4 follows an improved way in comparison to the initial
design procedure. Figure 2 shows the different data for the design and the type of chosen optimization.
Figure 3 gives the type of building to be designed.
4.
Part 2 : Design handbook
A list of the needed formulae taken from Eurocode 4 has been established following the initial procedure
defined for the exercises (see figures 4 to 8).
This initial design procedure nearly corresponds to the sequence of the chapters of Eurocode 4. It had to be
adapted to common practice.
The solved exercises (design of a building) and the experience of each engineering office allowed to
determine a more suitable design procedure which constitutes the frame of the design handbook.
About that practical design procedure reference may be made to the enclosed design handbook which is
called "Design handbook according to Eurocode 4 for braced composite steel-concrete buildings" (short
title : "EC4for braced buildings"):
table of contents,
general design procedure about elastic global analysis of braced composite frames according to
Eurocode 4 (see chapter I (Figure 1.5) of the design handbook),
general procedures to study structures submitted to actions (see chapter III of the design
handbook), with load cases which are respectively defined :
by relevant combinations of characteristic values of load arrangements, (g, q, s, w, ...), in
general cases (see Figure III.l),
or, by relevant combinations of characteristic values for the effects of actions (N, V, M; d, f,...),
in case of first order elastic global analysis (see Figure III.2).
11
In general, for the design of budings we need to :

define the analysis model of frames (assumptions of plane frames, bracing systems,connections,
members,...)
characterise the load arrangements and load cases,
carry out the elastic global analysis of frames in order to determine the effects of actions :
deformations (), vibrations (f) for Serviceability Limit States (SLS) and,
internal forces and bending moments (N, V, M) for Ultimate Limit States (ULS).
check the members at SLS (vertical and horizontal displacements, eigenfrequencies) and at ULS
(resistance of cross-sections, stability of members and stability of webs) for :
members in compression (columns,...)
members in bending (beams,...)
members with combined axial load force and bending moment (columns,...)
check the connections at SLS and at ULS.
Especially for members to be checked at ULS specific tables are given in the concerned chapters of the
handbook, with fist of checks according to different types of loading (separate or combined internal forces
and moments : N, V, M).
The design handbook which is enclosed to this draft final report of the research project, intends to be a
design aid in supplement to the complete document Eurocode 4 - Part 1.1 in order to facilitate the use of
Eurocode 4 for the design of such composite structures which are usual in common practice : braced
composite structures.
Although the present design handbook has been carefully established and intends to be self-standing it does
not substitute in any case for the complete document Eurocode 4 - Part 1.1, which should be consulted in
conjunction with the National Application Document (NAD), in case of doubt or need for clarification.
All references to Eurocode 4 - Part 1.1 which appear systematically, are made in [...].
Any other text, tables or figures not quoted from Eurocode 4 are considered to satisfy the rules specified in
Eurocode 4 - Part 1.1.
12
FIGURES
(Figures Ito 9)
lvConcpohaLIro^fstr^^
s VfV.. ,'^~,.H---t^.-'-i; .-f --..""';.'-,-F-.--'-'."' i ^ :-trusti-f >;!.. ->. ;'"-, ^*
different braced non-sway structures < 20
t
2.-occupancies:
types of occupancy
- ware house
- office building
- industrial hall
l o c i c&xvxri o e i i m R I m n f t c p / i 8SS ;; S '
'~ -loads on floor and roofs
;3shape^
shape of the building
'>;-W&y
/ E G 1 :^d;ads; : ;Snow loads ; v p ? |
4. structural concept f
structural model
Geometric dimensions
Non-structural elements
Load bearing structure
Joints
Profiles
Floor structure
Material properties
Effective section and width
Composite sections
i8Sl
^llililll
piliL
/tProc.tstahdaras
Tse
r':^"'^''';.^^>^^,v?t^"S^ci^^'
5. action-effects".
determination of the action effects
(global and local)
E 1 Clioai cases*
EG"4Load;Cmbinatins
elastic or plastic model

SLS
; EG;4:ar|âectiojti
ULS
t6.::dênsinmg:-Jand.;êrificatLon:
SLS limits
ULS limits
deformations
Frame stability
vibrations
Static equilibrium
cracks
Resistance of cross section
- tension
- compression
- bending moment
- shear
Mlssifatojri^
~"EG 4:-McleIJrng"depndmg^n^^
? : ?;:::;;. by t:lassification
' 1 s t order analysis -
Legend
- bending moment and shear

- bending moment and axial force
- bending moment, shear and axial force
- transverse forces an webs
- shear buckling
Resistance of members (stability)

- compression members : buckling
- lateral torsional buckling of beams
bending and axial tension
- bending and axial compression
Keywords
Requirement & References
<
' ';*%&1
Object
Connection
-joints
- base of columns
Shear connection
- longitudinal shear force
- design resistance of shear connectors
Exercise 1.Verification of an existing braced structure

Figure 1
15
llllgT^xonceptiorMt)^
Braced non-sway structure (defined)
2 occupancies
types of occupancy (defined)
- office building
|g3j .shape
shape of the building (defined)
4.vstracturaL'conqept
structural model
Geometric dimensions (defined)
Non-structural elements (not defined)
Load bearing structure (not defined)
Type of joints (defined)
Profiles ( not defined)
Floor structure (not defined)
Material properties (not defined)
Effective section and width (not defined)
Composite section (defined type)
5. action effects
determination of the action effects
(global and local)
elastic or plastic model
SLS
ULS
7, optimisation of the weight

Profiles:
- max 3 different profiles
for the columns
Type of joints:
- hinged or rigid
connections
Steel: FeE 235
or FeE 355
or FeE 460 grades
^6^|nra|i^gâdâ3^^tin
SLS limits
ULS limits
deformations
Frame stability
vibrations
Static equilibrium
cracks
Resistance of cross section
- tension
- compression
- bending moment
- jbear
bending moment and shear

- bending moment and axial force
- bendmg moment, shear and axial force
- transverse forces on web
shear buckling
Resistance of members (stability)

- compression members : buckling
- lateral torsional buckling of beams
bending and axial tension
- bending and axial compression
Connection
-joints
-base of columns
Shear connection
- long iradinal shear force
- designresistanceof shear connectors
Exercise 2.Design of a braced structure

Figure 2
16
plane view
lift
>-
front view
Y
[ml
10
10
10
storeys
10
11
12
[ml
30
30
30
5
15
5
rigid
hinged
hinged
solid
composite
composite encased
composite encased
CPU Ingenieurbro
IngenieurGruppe Bauen
13
14
30
50
10
14
15
5
rigid
rigid
composite composite
solid
composite
14
Schroeder & Associs
15
50
14
15
hinged
16
D3BN
16
50
14
hinged
composite composite
18
19
Ove Arup & Partners
17
50
18
15
hinged
composite composite
Prof. Falke
18
50
18
rigid
Reference
number
3
4
5
Engineering office
Bureau Delta
Steeltrack
V &M, Associate Partner
11
12
nr
Joints
Exercise 3 : Type of building to be designed

Figure 3
17
Slab
Beams
solid
solid
encased
encased
Eurocode 4 Formulae References
.... ! 2 E
1. Conceptional type of structure.

1.1. non-sway
1.2. braced '
1.3
storeys
-> Chapter 4.9.4.2 => Chapter 5.2.5.2 of EC 3

-> Chapter 4.9.4.3 => Chapter 5.2.5.3 of EC 3
2. Occupancies.
2.1. Type of building, (category,...)
2.2. Imposed loads on floors and roof (p and P) -> Chapter EC 1, part 2.4: Imposed load
3. Shape.
3.1. Wind loads (w)
-> Chapter EC1 Part 2.7: Wind loads.
3.2. Snow loads (s)
-> Chapter EC1 Part 2.5: Snow loads.
4. Structural concept.
4.1. Structural model.
4.2. Geometric dimensions.
4.3. Non structural elements.
4.4. Load bearing structure.
4.5. Joints.
4.6. Profiles.
4.7. Floor structure.
4.8. Material properties.
4.9. Effective section and effective width of beams.
-> Chapter 4.2.1 and 4.2.2
4.10. Composite sections.
5. Action effects.
5.1. Load cases. -> EC 1.
- permanent loads: g and G
- variable loads: q and Q:
- imposed loads: and (present paragraph 2.2.)
- wind loads: w (present paragraph 3.1.)
- snow loads: s (present paragraph 3.2.)
5.2. Load combinations. -> EC 4.
SLS: -> Chapter 2.3.4 clause (5), formulae (2.17) and (2.18)
ULS: -> Chapter 2.3.3.1 clause (6), formulae (2.11) and (2.12)
5.3. Imperfections. -> EC 4: -> Chapter 4.9.3 => -> Chapter 5.2 of EC 3
EC 3: Frame : -> Chapter 5.2.4.3 clause (1) formula (5.2)
Bracing system: -> Chapter 5.2.4.4 clause (1) formulae (5.3) and (5.4)
[Members : -> Chapter 5.2.4.2. clause (4) formula (5.1)]
5.4. Elastic or plastic model -> EC4:
-> Chapter 4.3: classification of cross-sections (b/t ratios).
Flange: -> table 4.1
Web:
-> table 4.2
-> Chapter 4.4.2.2
clause (3) shear buckling
=> (presentparagraph 7.2.9 )
Section: => (presentparagraph 7.1 )
Figure 4
18

6. Verification SLS. -> Chapter 5
6.1. Global analysis.
> beams, portal frames.structural frames

> bracing system
Calculation for
vertical
0
6.2. Deformations.
6.3. Vibrations.
an
"
horizontal
-> Chapter 5.1 clause (2)

clause (3)
-> Chapter 5.2.1 => -> Chapter4.2.2ofEC3
EC 3:
-> Chapter 4.2.2.clause (1) vertical table 4.1, figure 4.1
clause (4) horizontal
-> Chapter 5.2.2 clauses (3) to (9)
EC 4:
-> Chapter 4.3. (ECCS publication n 65: table 4.4;... )
6.4. Cracking of concrete in beams.

-> Chapter 5.3.1 clause (5)
-> Chapter 5.3.3
7. Verification ULS. -> Chapter 4
7.1. Global analysis.
=> internal forces: , and V

- Construction stage
- Operational stage
- Properties of cross-section for global analysis -> Chapter 4.2
- Elastic global analysis:
- in continuous beams -> Chapter 4.5.3
- in frames:
-> Chapter 4.9.6
- Plastic global analysis:
- in continuous beams -> Chapter 4.5.2
- in frames:
-> Chapter 4.9.7
st
n
- 1 or 2 d order analysis (present paragraph 1.1 )
( remark: EC 4 does not cover sway frames)
-> Chapter 1.1.2. (6)
7.2. Resistance of cross-sections. -> Chapter 4.4

7.2.1. tension.
=> EC 3, Chapter 5.4.3 clause (1) formula (5.13)
7.2.2. compression.-> Chapter 4.8.3.3 clause (1)

7.2.3. bending moment.-> Chapter 4.4.1
-> Chapter 4.4.1.2 figure 4.5)
-> Chapter 4.4.1.3(figure 4.5)
-> Chapter 4.4.1.4
EC 3: -> Chapter 5.4.5.3 clause (1) formula (5.19)
-> Chapter 4.4.2.2
7.2.4. shear.
=>Chapter5.4.6ofEC3
EC 3:-> Chapter 5.4.6
clause (1) formula (5.20)
clause (2): AVz
[Avy: ECCS publication n 65: table 5.14 ]
clause (9)
7.2.5. bending and shear.
-> Chapter 4.4.3
clause (1)
clause (2)
Figure 5
19
figure 4.6

7.2.6. bending and axial force.
-> Chapter 4.8.3.11
clause (1)
clause (2)
clause (3)
clause (4)
clause (5)
7.2.7. bending, shear and axial force.

-> Chapter 4.8.3.11
-> Chapter 4.8.3.12
figure 4.12
figure 4.13
Annex C
7.2.8. transverse forces on webs.

web crippling -> Chapter 4.7 of EC 4 => Chapter 5.7 of EC 3
EC 3:
-> Chapter 5.7.1
clause (3) figure 5.7.1 (a)
clause (4) figure 5.7.1 (b)
clause (5)
-> Chapter 5.7.2
clause (3) figure 5.7.2
-> Chapter 5.7.3 Crushing
clause (1) formula (5-72)
/clause (4) formula (5.74)7
-> Chapter 5.7.4 Cripplingclaase (1) formula (5.77)
-> Chapter 5.7.5 Buckling clause (1) formula (5.79)
EC 3:
->
or
->
7.2.9. shear buckling.
-> Chapter 4.4.4 clause (3) limit condition ( present paragraph 5.4 )
7.2.10 flange-induced buckling. => present paragraph 7.2.8 => EC 3
EC 3:
-> Chapter 5.7.7
ECCS publication n 65: table 5.20
7.3. Resistance of members. (-> for 1 s t order analysis)
7.3.1. compression members: buckling.
- for 1 s t order elastic analysis:
-> Chapter 4.8.3.1 clause (3) a), b) and c) => Annex D
-> Chapter 4.8.3.4
-> Chapter 4.8.3.5
clause ( 1 )
clause (2)
-> Chapter 4.8.3.6
clause (1)
clause (2) => Annex E of EC 3
clause (3)
-> Chapter 4.8.3.7
clause (1)
clause (2)
-> Chapter 4.8.3.8 clause (1) => Chapter 5.5.1 of EC 3
clause (2)
- for 2 n d order elastic analysis:
-> Chapter 4.8.3.10
clauses (2) to (4)
7.3.2. lateral-torsional buckling of beams.
-> Chapter 4.6.2 clauses (a) to (m)
clause (4) Annex
clause (5) limit condition
7.3.3. bending and axial tension.
Figure 6
20

7.3.4. bending and axial compression.
-> Chapter 4.8.3.13
clause (1)
clause (2)
clause (3)
clause (4)
clause (5)
clause (6)
clause (7)
clause (8)
figure 4.14
figure 4.15
figure 4.12
figure 4.13
7.3.5. biaxial bending and axial compression.

-> Chapter 4.8.3.14
clauses (1) to (5)
figure 4.16
7.4. Resistance of connections. -> Chapter 4.10 with special remarks for EC 4
=> Chapter 6 of EC 3
EC 3: 7.4.1. bolted joints. -> Chapter 6.5

7.4.1.1. Positioning of holes.
-> Chapter 6.5.1 figures 6.5.1 to 6.5.4
( ECCS publication n65: table 6.2 )
7.4.1.2. Design shear rupture resistance.
-> Chapter 6.5.2.2
7.4.1.3. Angles.

-> Chapter 6.5.2.3
clause (2) formulae (6.2) to (6.4)

7.4.1.4. Categories of bolted connections.

-> Chapter 6.5.3 and table 6.5.2
7.4.1.5. Distribution of forces between fasteners.
-> Chapter 6.5.4 figure 6.5.7
7.4.1.6. Design resistance of bolts.
-> Chapter 6.5.5
clause (2) table 6.5.3

clause (3)
clause (9)
clause (10)
(ECCS publication n65: tables 6.6, 6.7 and 6.8)
7.4.1.7. High strength bolts in slip-resistant connections

-> Chapter 6.5.8
-> Chapter 6.5.9 Annex J
-> Chapter 6.5.10 clause (1) formula (6.11) and figure 6.5.10
[-> Chapter 6.5.11
clause (2) formula (6.12)]
[-> Chapter 6.5.12
clause (1) formula (6.13)]
-> Chapter 6.5.13.
tables 6.5.6 and 6.5.7, figure 6.5.12
EC 3: [7.4.2 Joints with rivets. -> Chapter 6.5.6]
EC 3: 7.4.3 Welded connections. -> Chapter 6.6
[-> Chapter 6.6.3 clause (3)]
clause (4)
clause (7)
-> Chapter 6.6.5.1 clause (2)
Figure 7
21

EC 3:
-> Chapter 6.6.5.3
clause (1) Annex M

clause (5)
-> Chapter 6.6.8 clause (2) formula (6.16)
clause (3)
[-> Chapter 6.6.9 clause (1)7
[
clause (3) formula (6.18)7
clause (3)
EC 3: 7.4.4 Beam-to-column connections. -> Chapter 6.9 and Annex J

EC 3: 7.4.5. Column bases. -> Chapter 6.11 and Annex L
7.5. Frame stability.
7.6. Static equilibrium.

8. Shear connection.
EC 3:-> Chapter 5.2.6.1 clause (1)

clause (3)
clause (4)
EC 3:-> Chapter 2.3.2.4 clauses (1) to (12)
clause (3)
clause (5)
clause (4)
-> Chapter 6.1.3
8.1. Longitudinal shear force.

formula (6.6)
clause (2)
formula (6.7)
-> Chapter 6.2.1.2 clauses (1) to (3)
8.2. Design resistance of shear connection. -> Chapter 6.3
-> Chapter 6.3.2.1 formulae (6.13) and (6.14)
-> Chapter 6.3.3.1 formula (6.15)
8.3. Friction grip bolts. -> Chapter 6.5
8.4. Transverse reinforcement. -> Chapter 6.6
-> Chapter 6.6.2 clause (2) formulae (6.25) and (6.26)
9. Composite slabs with profiled steel sheetings. -> Chapter 7
Figure 8
22
iisl.
Recherches
Design handbook
according to Eurocode 4
for braced composite
steel-concrete buildings
EC4for braced buildings
Page
TABLE OF CONTENTS
0
29
PRELIMINARIES
0.1
0.2
Foreword
Generalities
0.1.1
Objective of this design handbook
0.1.2
Warning
0.1.3
How to read this design handbook
0.1.4
Acknowledgements
0.1.5
Units
0.2.1
0.2.2
0.2.3
and notations
Units
Convention for member axes
Notations in
0.3
Terminology
0.4
References
0.5
flow-charts
31
31
31
31
32
32
33
33
33
33
34
36
List of Symbols
0.5.1
Latin symbols
0.5.2
Greek symbols
37
3
49
0.6
List of Tables
44
0.7
List of Figures
47
INTRODUCTION
51
1.1
1.2
Benefits of composite structures

Basis of design
1.2.1
Fundamental requirements
1.2.2
Definitions
1.2.2.1
Limit states
1.2.2.2
Actions
1.2.2.3
Material properties
1.2.3
Design requirements
1.2.3.1
General
1.2.3.2
Serviceability Limit States
1.2.3.3
Ultimate Limit States
53
57
57
57
57
58
59
59
59
60
60
1.3
Design of composite braced frame

1.3.1
Generalities
1.3.1.1
Analysis models for frames
1.3.1.2
Design procedure for composite braced frame
1.3.2
Static equilibrium
1.3.3
Load arrangements and load cases
1.3.3.1
Generalities
1.3.3.2
Frame imperfections
1.3.4
First order elastic global analysis
1.3.4.1
Methods of analysis
1.3.4.2
Effects of deformations
1.3.4.3
Elastic global analysis
"^
62
62
64
66
66
66
67
68
68
69
69
25
1.3.5
1.4
Verifications at SLS
70
1.3.5.1
Deflections of frames
1.3.6
Verifications at ULS
1.3.6.1
Definiton of braced frames and non-sway frames
1.3.6.2
ULS checks
70
70
70
72
Content of the design handbook

1.4.1
Scope of the handbook
1.4.2
Summary of the table of contents
1.4.3
Checks at Serviceability Limit States
1.4.4
Checks of members at Ultimate Limit States
72
72
74
74
74
STRUCTURAL CONCEPT OF THE BUILDING
II. 1 Structural model

11.2 Non structural elements
77
79
79
70
11.3 Load bearing structure

11.3.1 Types of columns
11.3.2 Types of beams
11.3.3 Types of slabs
11.3.4 Types of shear connector
11.3.5 Types of joints
11.4 Recommendations for composite design
11.5 Material properties
11.5.1 Concrete
11.5.2 Structural steel
11.5.3 Reinforcing steel
11.5.4 Profiled steel decking for composite slabs
11.5.5 Connecting devices
'y
79
80
81
82
82
84
88
88
90
92
92
93
11.6 Partial safety factors for resistances and material properties at ULS
93
D
LOA ARRANGEMENTS AND LOAD CASES
95
111.1 Generalities
111.2 Load arrangements
111.2.1 Permanent loads (g and G)
111.2.2 Variable loads (q, Q, w and s)
111.2.2.1 Imposed loads on floors and roof (q and Q)
111.2.2.2 Wind loads (we,i, F w )
111.2.2.2.1 Wind pressure (we,i)
111.2.2.2.2 Wind force (Fw)
111.2.2.3 Snow loads (s)
97
100
101
101
102
104
105
109
109
111.3 Load cases

111.3.1 Load cases for serviceability limit states
111.3.2 Load cases for ultimate limit states
110
111
26
Page
IV
MEMBERS IN COMPRESSION (N)
113
IV. 1 Generalities
IV. 1.1 Limits of applicability of the simplified design method
IV. 1.2 Local buckling of steel members
IV. 1.3 Influence of longitudinal shear
IV.1.4 Regions of load introduction
IV.2 Resistance of cross-section to axial compressive force N x .sd
II5
117
118
119
120
^
IV.3 Stability of member to axial compressive force N x .sd
1 nc
MEMBERS IN BENDING (V ; M ; (V , M) )
V.l Generalities
V.2 Checks at Ultimate Limit States
V.2.1 Properties of cross-sections of composite beams
V.2.2 Classification of cross-sections of composite cross-sections
V.2.2.1 Generalities
V.2.2.2 Definition of cross-sections classification
V.2.2.3 Classification of steel flanges in compression
V.2.2.4 Classification of steel webs
V.2.2.4.1 Classification of steel webs where the compression flange is
in Class lor 2
V.2.2.4.2 Classification of steel webs where the compression flange is
in Class 3 or 4
V.2.3 Distribution of internal forces and moments in continuous beams
V.2.4 Verification at ULS to vertical shear VZ-sd
V.2.4.1 Resistance of cross-section to vertical shear Vz.sd
V.2.4.2 Stability of web to vertical shear Vz.sd for composite beams
V.2.4.3 Stability of steel web to crippling
V.2.5
Verifications at ULS to bending moment My.sd
V.2.5.1 Resistance of cross-section to MySd
V.2.5.2 Stability of member to My.Sd
V.2.5.2.1 Generalities
V.2.5.2.2 Check of lateral-torsional buckling without direct
calculation
V.2.5.2.3 Buckling resistance moment
V.2.6 Verification at ULS to combined (Vz.Sd. My.Sd)
V.2.6.1 Resistance of cross-section to (Vz.sd. My.Sd)
V.2.6.2 Stability of web to (Vz.Sd, My.Sd)
V.2.7 Verification of shear connectors at ULS to longitudinal shear
V.2.7.1 Generalities
V.2.7.2 Design longitudinal shear force
V.2.7.2.1 Full shear connection
V.2.7.2.2 Partial shear connection with ductile connectors
V.2.7.3 Design shear resistance of headed studs
V.2.7.3.1 Headed studs in solid slabs
V.2.7.3.2 Headed studs in composite slabs with profiled steel sheeting
27
133
135
139
139
142
142
I43
146
148
148
149
158
159
159
161
163
164
164
168
168
168
170
172
172
173
175
175
175
176
179
182
182
183
Page
V.2.7.4 Spacing and detailing of headed studs
V.2.7.5 Design shear resistance of concrete slab
V.2.7.5.1 Longitudinal shear in the slab vsd
V.2.7.5.2 Design resistance to longitudinal shear VR<J
V.2.7.5.3 Contribution of profiled steel sheeting as transverse
reinforcement, vpcj
V.2.7.5.4 Minimum transverse reinforcement
V.3 Verifications at Serviceability Limit States SLS
V.3.1 Generalities about SLS
V.3.2 Deflections
V.3.3 Cracking of concrete
V.3.4 Vibrations
VI
MEMBERS WITH COMBINED AXIAL COMPRESSIVE FORCE

AND BENDING MOMENT ( (N , M) ; (N , V , M) )
185
188
189
190
191
192
192
192
193
197
200
201
VI. 1 Generalities
VI. 1.1 Second order effects on bending moments
VI. 1.2 Specific remarks for N-M calculations
VI.2 Resistance of cross-sections to combined compression and uniaxial bending
(Nx.Sd ; My.Sd) or (Nx.sd ; Mz.Sd)
VI.3 Stability of members to combined compression and uniaxial bending
(Nx.Sd;My.Sd) or (Nx.sd;Mz.sd)
VI.4 Resistance of cross-sections to combined compression and biaxial bending
(Nx.Sd. My.Sd and Mz.sd)
VI.5 Stability of members to combined compression and biaxial bending (Nx.sd>
My.Sd and M z .sd)
220
VI.6 Influence of transverse shear forces
222
VU
COMPOSITE SLABS OR CONCRETE SLABS
203
206
207
210
218
220
225
VILI Generalities
VII.2 Initial slab design
VII.2.1 Proportions of composite slab
VII.2.2 Construction condition
VII.2.3 Composite action
VII.2.4 Deflections
VII.3 Influence of decking on the design of composite beams
VII.3.1 Ribs transverse to the beam
VII.3.2 Ribs parallel to the beam
227
229
229
229
229
230
230
231
231
VII.4 Minimum transverse reinforcement
232
28
PRELIMINARIES
PRELIMINARIES
0.1
Foreword
0.1.1
Generalities
(1) The Eurocodes are being prepared to harmonize design procedures between countries
which are members of CEN (European Committee for Standardization).
(2) Eurocode 4 - Part 1.1 "Design of Composite Steel and Concrete Structures :General
Rules and Rules for Buildings" has been published initially as an ENV document
(European pre-standard - a prospective European Standard for provisional application) :
ENV 1994-1-1:1992.
(3) The national authorities of the members states have issued National Application
Documents (NAD) to make Eurocode 4 - Part 1.1 operative whilst it has ENV-status.
0.1.2
Objective of this design handbook
(1) The present publication is intended to be a design aid in supplement to the complete
document Eurocode 4 - Part 1.1 (always with references to it) in order to provide
simplified guidance and to facilitate the use of Eurocode 4 for the design of such
composite steel-concrete structures which are usual in common practice : braced
composite steel-concrete structures. As this hanbook is less formal and more userfriendly than Eurocode 4 additional information have been introduced to offer
explanations on design principles or application rules and, about usual design results.
(2) Therefore, the "Design handbook according to Eurocode 4 for braced composite steelconcrete buildings" presents the main design formulas and rules extracted from
Eurocode 4 - Part 1.1, which are needed to deal with :
- elastic global analysis of buildings and similar structures,
- checks of structural members at limit states,
- in case of braced structures,
- according to the European standard Eurocode 4 - Part 1.1 (ENV 1994-1-1:1992).
0.1.3
Warning
(1) Although the present design handbook has been carefully established and intends to be
self-standing it does not substitute in any case for the complete document Eurocode 4 Part 1.1, which should be consulted, in case of doubt or need for clarification, in
conjunction with the National Application Document (NAD) specific to the country
where the building project is situated.
(2) All references to Eurocode 4 - Part 1.1 are made in [...] and given in appropriate left
column called "Ref.".
References to Eurocodes 1, 2, 3 and 4 are called respectively either Ref. 1, Ref. 2, Ref. 3
and Ref. 4 or EC 1, EC2, EC3 and EC4 (see the list of references in chapter 0.4).
(3) Any other text, tables or figures not quoted from Eurocode 4 are considered to satisfy
the rules specified in Eurocode 4 - Part 1.1.
31
0.1.4
How to read this design handbook
(1) Example of numbering of chapters and paragraphs : V.2.1.2.2

(2) Layout of pages :
Ref.
Chapter V - Members in bending
left column
for references
*
References
Main text with a following example about layout of chapters:

(...)
V
(...)
V.2
(...)
V.2.7
(...)
V.2.7.2
(...)
V.2.7.2.2
(...)
MEMBER IN BENDING (V; M; (V, M))

Checks at Ultimate Limit States
Verifications of shear connectors at ULS to longitudinal shear
Design longitudinal shear force
Partial shear connection with ductile connectors
(3) In the left column of each page

- references to Eurocode 4 are also given in the text between brackets [...]
- other references are designated by (Ref. i) and are listed in chapter 0.4.
0.1.5
Acknowledgements
(1) Particular thanks for fruitful collaboration are addressed to members of the project
working group:
- 15 engineering offices : Adem (Belgium), Bureau Delta (Belgium), Varendonck
Groep/Steeltrak (Belgium), VM Associate Partner (Belgium),
Rambll,
Hannemann & Hjlund (Denmark), Bureau Veritas (F rance), Socotec (F rance),
Sofresid (F rance), CPU Ingenieurbro (Germany), IGB-Ingenieurgruppe Bauen
(Germany), Danieli Ingegneria (Italy), Schroeder & Associs (Luxemburg), D3BN
(the Netherlands), Ove Amp & Partners (United Kingdom), ECCS / TC 11
(Germany),
- RWTH : Steel Construction Department from Aachen University with Professor
SEDLACEK G. and GROTMANN D.,
- SIDERCAD (Italy) with MM. ANDINI M. and CATTANEO F.,
- CTICM (France) with MM. CHABROLIN B., GALEA Y. and BUREAU .
(2) Grateful thanks are also expressed to :
- the ECSC which supported this work in the scope of the european research n
P2724 (contract n 7210 - SA/516),
- the F6 executive committee which has followed and advised the working group of
the research,
- anyone who has contributed to the work: MM. CHANTRAIN Ph., CONAN Yves,
MAUER Thierry, GERARD Y J.C and WARSZTA F..
32
EC4
[1.5 (2)]
0.2
Units and notations
0.2.1
Units
For calculations the following units are recommended in accordance with ISO 1000:
0.2.2
EC4
[1.6.7]
Forces and loads
kN, kN/ m , kN/m2
Unit mass
Unit weight
kg/m3
kN/m3
Stresses and strengths
N/ mm 2 ( = MN/m2 or MPa)
Moments
kN.m
Convention for member axes
(1) For steel members, the conventions used for cross-section axes are:
xx :
along the member
generally:
yy :
cross-section axis parallel to the flanges
zz :
cross-section axis perpendicular to the flanges or parallel to the web
(2) The convention used for subscripts which indicate axes for moments is :
"Use the axis about which the moment acts."
For example, for an I-section a moment acting in the plane of the web is denoted My
because it acts about the cross-section axis parallel to the flanges.
0.2.3
Notations in flow-charts
All the flow-charts appearing in the present design handbook should be read according
to the following rules :
reading from the top to the bottom, in general,
the references to Eurocode 4 are given in [...],
"n.f" means that the checks are not fulfilled and that stronger sections or joints have
to be selected.
convention for flow-charts :
Title
_______
r
Assumption J
"T"
Action: determination, calculation,..

Criterion to check,
condition, comparison
yes
C
(
Results - )
33
the dotted line (

) means that path
has to be followed through the box
0.3
Terminology
EC4
[1.4.2(1)] (1) The following terms are used in Part 1.1 of Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4) with the following
meanings:
- Frame : A structure or portion of a structure, comprising an assembly of directly
connected structural elements, designed to act together to resist load. It covers both
plane frames and three-dimensional frames.
- Sub-frame : A frame which forms part of a larger frame, but is treated as an
isolated frame in a structural analysis.
- Type of framing : Terms used to distinguish between frames which are either:
Continuous, in which only both equilibrium and the structural properties of
the members need explicit consideration in the global analysis.
Semi-continuous, in which also the structural properties of the connections
need explicit consideration in the global analysis,
. Simple, in which only equilibrium need to be considered in the global
analysis.
- Global analysis : The determination of a consistent set of internal forces and
moments (N, V, M) in a structure, which are in equilibrium with a particular set of
actions on the structure, and are based on the properties of the materials.
- First order global analysis : Global analysis using the initial geometry of the
structure and neglecting the deformation of the structure which influences the
effects of actions (no - effects).
- Second order global analysis : Global analysis taking into account the
deformation of the structure which influences the effects of actions (- effects).
- Elastic global analysis : First-order or second-order global analysis based on the
assumption that the stress-strain behaviour of the material is linear, whatever the
stress level; this assumption may be maintained even where the resistance of a
cross-section is based on its plastic resistance.
- Composite frame : A composite frame is a framed structure for a building or
similar construction works, in which some or all of the beams and columns are
composite members and most of the remaining members are structural steel
members. The use of reinforced or prestressed concrete or massonry members in
bracing systems is not excluded.
- Composite member : A structural member with components of concrete and of
structural or cold-formed steel, interconnected by shear connection so as to limit
the longitudinal slip between concrete and steel and the separation of one
component from the other.
- Propped structure or member : A structure or member the steel elements of which
are supported until the concrete elements are able to resist stresses.
- Unpropped structure or member : A structure or member in which the weight of
concrete elements is applied to steel elements.
- Shear connection : An interconnection between the concrete and steel components
of a composite member that has sufficient strength and stiffness to enable the two
components to be designed as parts of a single structural member. For composite
beams shear connection means generally mechanical shear connection that does
not rely on bond or adhesion at interfaces between steel and concrete.
34
Full and partial shear connection are defined in chapter V.2.7.

Headed stud connector : A particular form of shear connector comprising a steel
bar and flat head that is welded automatically to the beam.
Composite connection : A connection between a composite member and any other
member in which reinforcement is intended to contribute to the resistance of the
connection.
Rigid composite connection : A composite connection such that its deformation
has no significant influence on the distribution of internal forces and moments in
the structure, nor on its overall deformation.
Composite column : A composite member subjected mainly to compression and
bending. Only columns with cross-sections of the types defined in chapter IV are
treated in this handbook.
Composite beam : A composite member subjected mainly to bending. Only those
in which the structural steel section is symm etrical about its minor axis are treated
(see chapter V).
Continuous composite beam : A beam with three or more supports, in which the
steel section is either continuous over internal supports or is jointed by fullstrength and rigid connections, with connections between the beam and each
support such that it can be assumed that the support does not transfer significant
bending moment to the beam. At the internal supports the beam may have either
effective reinforcement or only nominal reinforcement.
Hogging moment : Negative moment causing compression in the bottom flange of
the beam.
Sagging moment : Positive moment causing tension in the bottom flange of the
beam.
Composite slab : A bi-dimensional horizontal composite member subjected mainly
to bending, in which profiled steel sheets (see chapter VII) :
are used as permanent shuttering capable of supporting wet concrete,
reinforcement and site loads, and
.
subsequently combine structurally with the hardened concrete and act as part
or all of the tensile reinforcement in the finished slab.
Decking : Profiled steel sheeting which may be embossed for composite action
with the concrete slab.
Transverse reinforcement : Reinforcement placed in the slab transversely (across)
the steel beam.
System length : Distance between two adjacent points at which a member is braced
against lateral displacement in a given plane, or between one such point and the
end of the member.
Buckling length : System length of an otherwise similar member with pinned ends,
which has the same buckling resistance as a given member.
Designer : Appropriately qualified and experienced person responsible for the
structural design.
35
0.4
References
Ref. 1
(= ECl) ENV 1991-1-1, Eurocode 1 (draft version) : Basis of Design and

Actions on Structures (Parts 1, 2.2, 2.4, 2.5, 2.7, 10).
Ref. 2
(= EC2) ENV 1992-1-1, Eurocode 2 : Design of concrete structures, Part 1.1

: General mies and rules for Buildings.
Ref. 3
(= EC3) ENV 1993-1-1, Eurocode 3 : Design of steel structures, Part 1.1 :

General rules and rules for Buildings.
Ref. 4
(= EC4) ENV 1994-1-1, Eurocode 4 : Design of composite steel and

concrete structures, Part 1.1 : General mies and rules for Buildings.
Ref. 5
(= EC8) Eurocode 8, draft version, Design of structures for

resistance.
Ref. 6
ECCS technical publication n65, "Essentials of Eurocode 3 - Design

Manual for Steel Structures in Building", 1991, First Edition.
Ref. 7
ECCS technical publication n72, "Composite Beams and Columns to

Eurocode 4", 1993, First Edition.
Ref. 8
SCI publication 121, "Composite Beam Design to Eurocode 4", 1994.
Ref. 9
SCI publication 142, "Composite Column Design to Eurocode 4", 1994.
Ref. 10
R.P.Johnson and D. Anderson, "Designers' Handbook to Eurocode 4, Part

1.1 : Design of composite steel and concrete structures", 1993, Thomas
Telford.
Ref. 11
Albitar A. - "Application de l'Eurocode 4. Classification des sections

transversales de poutres mixtes", pages 71 to 90. Revue Construction
Mtallique, n 4-1994.
Ref. 12
Bergmann R., "Composite columns", pages 39 to 68, IABSE Short Course

about Composite steel-concrete Construction and Eurocode 4, Brussels
1990.
Ref. 13
Bode H. and Sauerbom N., "Composites Beams", pages 89 to 115, IABSE

Short Course about composite steel-concrete construction and Eurocode 4,
Brussels 1990.
Ref. 14
ARBED S.A., "Composite construction system AF with integrated fire

resistance - Code of good practice".
36
earthquake
0.5
List of Symbols
0.5.1
Latin symbols
a
aj
ak
a up
A
Aa
Ac
Aeff
Aref
Ap
Ar
e
As
Av
Ay.net
Av.y
Avz
b
beff
bem
bm
bp
bo
c
CALT
Cd
CDIR
ce
Cf
Cpe
cr
ct
CTEM
Cd
Cy, c z
d
d
dp
do
ep
designation of a buckling curve; throat thickness of filllet weld; position of

reinforcing bars measured from the bottom of concrete flange in composite
beam,
geometrical data of the effects of actions
geometrical data for the resistance
design throat thickness for submerged arc welding
accidental action; area of building loaded by external pressure of wind;
area of gross cross-section
cross-sectional area of the structural steel
concrete area
effective area of class 4 cross-section
reference area for Cf (wind force)
effective area of the steel sheet in tension
Effective section of rib of composite slab
Effective section of rib of composite slab
cross-sectional area of the steel reinforcement
shear area of the structural steel member
effective shear area for resistance to block shear
shear area of structural steel cross-section according to yy axis
shear area of structural steel cross-section according to zz axis
designation of a buckling curve; flange width; building width
effective width
effective width of the slab for concentrated load
effective width of the concentrated load, perpendicular to the span of the
slab
width of the concentrated load, perpendicular to the span of the slab
width of the haunch for headed studs
designation of a buckling curve; outstand distance; effective perimeter
altitude factor for reference wind velocity
dynamic factor for wind force
direction factor for reference wind velocity
exposure coefficient for wind pressure and wind force
wind force coefficient
external pressure coefficient for wind pressure
roughness coefficient for determination of c e
topography coefficient for determination of c e
temporary (seasonal) factor for reference wind velocity
nominal value related to the design effect of actions
thickness of concrete cover in concrete encased section
designation of a buckling curve; web depth
bolt diameter, headed stud diameter
distance from the top of the slab to the centroid of the effective area of the
sheet
hole diameter
distance of the plastic neutral axis of the effective area of the sheeting to its
37
en
en,d
E
Ea
ECCS
ECSC
EC 1
EC 2
EC 3
EC 4
EC 8
Ecm
E'c
Ed
Ek
Es
fck
fct
fete
fd
fe
fmin
fsk
fu
fy
fyb = fyp
fyw
Ea- Fal Fa2
Fc
Fcf
Fd
Fk
F
Fs
Fsk
Ft
Ften
Fw
g
G
Ga
Gd
Gk
h
ha
hc
n
t' hslab
underside
equivalent initial bow imperfection
design value of equivalent initial bow imperfection
effect of actions at SLS
modulus of elasticity or Young Modulus of structural steel
European Convention for Constructional Steelwork
European Community of Steel and Coal
Eurocode 1 (Ref. 1)
Eurocode 2 (Ref. 2)
Eurocode 3 (Ref. 3)
Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4)
Eurocode 8 (Ref. 8)
secant modulus of elasticity of the concrete
"effective" modulus of concrete
design value of the effect of action
characteristic value of effects of actions at SLS
modulus of longitudinal deformation of reinforcing steel
characteristic cylinder compressive strength
characteristic cylinder tensile strength
effective tensile strength of concrete
design natural frequency
natural frequency
recommended limit of natural frequency
characteristic yield strength of reinforcing steel
ultimate tensile strength
yield strength
nominal value of yield strength for profiled steel sheeting (EC4)
yield strength of the web
forces in structural steel section to resist to plastic bending moment
compressive force in the concrete flange necessary to resist the design
sagging bending moment
longitudinal shear force
design value of action
characteristic value of action
design longitudinal force caused by composite action in the slab
force in the reinforcing bars to resist to plastic bending moment
characteristic value of transverse force
design transverse force caused by composite action in the slab
design tensile force per stud
resultant wind force, force in the web of structural steel section to resist to
plastic bending moment
distributed permanent action; dead load
permanent action
shear modulus
design permanent action
characteristic value of permanent action
overall depth of cross-section; storey height; building height
depth of structural steel section
thickness of the slab above the ribs of the profiled sheeting
total depth of the slab
38
ho
H
i
I
It
Iw
Iy, Iz
k
kc
k
k^
kLT
kt
k
kT
Kr
I
LT
(Q
L
Lb
LTB
m
max
min
M
Mb.Rd
M cr
Mc.Rd
Mei
Mei.Rd
Mf.Rd
MapLRd
Mpi
Mpi.Rd
Mpi.w.Rd
Mpi.y.Rd
Mpi.z.Rd
Mp.Rd
MRd
Msd
My.Rd
Mw.sd
My
My.sd
overall height of stmcture

total horizontal load
radius of gyration about relevant axis using the properties of gross steel
cross-section
moment of inertia
torsional constant
warping constant
moment of inertia about yy and zz axes
subscript meaning characteristic (unfactored) value
coefficient for the minimum reinforcement
effective length factor
reduction factor for the shear resistance of headed studs in composite slab
with ribs parallel to the beam
factor for lateral-torsional buckling with N-M interaction
reduction factor for the shear resistance of headed studs in composite slab
with ribs perpendicular to the beam
buckling factor for outstand flanges
buckling factor for shear
roughness factor of the terrain
portion of a member
effective length for out-of-plane bending
equivalent length
system length; span length; weld length
buckling length of member
lateral-torsional buckling
mass per unit length
maximum
minimum
bending moment
design resistance moment for lateral-torsional buckling
elastic critical moment for lateral-torsional buckling
design resistance moment of the cross-section
elastic moment capacity
design elastic resistance to bending of beam
design plastic resistance moment of the cross-section consisting of the
flanges only, with effective section
design plastic resistance moment of the structural steel alone
plastic moment capacity
design plastic resistance moment of the structural cross-section
design plastic resistance moment of the web
design plastic resistance moment of the structural cross-section about yy
axis
design plastic resistance moment of the structural cross-section about zz axis
sagging bending resistance of a composite slab
design bending moment resistance of the member
design bending moment applied to the member
design plastic resistance moment reduced by shear force
design value of moment applied to the web
bending moment about yy axis
design bending moment about yy axis applied to the member
39
Mz
Mz.Sd
n
nc
nr
ns
N
NAD
Nb.Rd
Nb.y.Rd
Nb.z.Rd
N compression
Ner
Nc.Rd
NG.Sd
Npl.Rd
NRd
Nsd
Nx.sd
p.n.a.
PRd
PRk
q
Qk
qref
Q
Qd
Qk
Qk.max
r
R
Ra,Rd
Rd
Rk
Sd
Sk
Ss
sd
sk
SLS
t
tf
l
P
tw
ULS
Vref
Vref,0
V
bending moment about zz axis

design bending moment about zz axis applied to the member
nominal modular ratio
number of columns in plane
number of members to be restrained by the bracing system
number of storeys
normal force; axial load
National Application Document
design buckling resistance of the member
design buckling resistance of the member according to yy axis
design buckling resistance of the member according to zz axis
compressive normal force
elastic critical axial force
design compression resistance of the cross-section
part of the design axial load that is permanent
design plastic resistance of the gross cross-section
design resistance for member in compression
design value of compressive force
design internal axial force applied to member according to xx axis
plastic neutral axis
point load
design resistance of shear connector
characterictic resistance of shear connector
imposed variable distributed load
characteristic value of imposed variable distributed load
reference mean wind pressure
imposed variable point load
design variable action
characteristic value of imposed variable point load
variable action which causes the largest effect
radius of root fillet
rolled sections
design crippling resistance of the web
design resistance of the member subject to internal forces or moment
characteristic value of Rd
snow load
design snow load
characteristic value of the snow load on the ground
length of stiff bearing
effects of actions at ULS
design value of an internal force or moment applied to the member
characteristic value of effects of actions at ULS
Serviceability Limit states
design thickness, nominal thickness of element, material thickness
flange thickness
thickness of a plate welded to an unstiffened flange
web thickness
reference wind velocity
basic value of the reference wind velocity
shear force: total vertical load
40
Vba.Rd
Vcr
V
Vpl.Rd
Vpi.y.Rd
Vpi.z.Rd
VRd
Vsd
Vy
Vy.sd
Vz
Vz.sd
w
Wd
we
wk
W
Weff
Wei
Wei.y
W e i. z
Wpi
Wpi.y
Wpi.z
x, xx
Xk
y, yy
z, zz
zc
zcw
ze
zQ
design shear buckling resistance

elastic critical value of the total vertical load
total design longitudinal shear
design shear plastic resistance of cross-section
design shear plastic resistance of cross-section according to yy axis (I to
web)
design shear plastic resistance of cross-section according to zz axis (L to
flange)
design shear resistance of the member
design shear force applied to the member; design value of the total vertical
load
shear forces applied parallel to yy axis
design shear force applied to the member parallel to yy axis
shear force parallel to zz axis
design internal shear forces applied to the member parallel to zz axis
wind pressure on a surface
design wind load
wind pressure on external surface
design crack width
welded sections
elastic section modulus of effective class 4 cross-section
elastic section modulus of class 3 cross-section
elastic section modulus of class 3 cross-section according to yy axis
elastic section modulus of class 3 cross-section according to zz axis
plastic section modulus of class 1 or 2 cross-section
plastic section modulus of class 1 or 2 cross-section according to yy axis
plastic section modulus of class 1 or 2 cross-section according to zz axis
axis along the member
characteristic value of the material properties
principal axis of cross section (parallel to flanges, in general)
principal axis of cross section (parallel to the web, in general)
position of plastic neutral axis measured from the top of concrete flange in
composite beam
position of plastic neutral axis measured from the bottom of concrete flange
in composite beam
reference height for evaluation of c e
vertical distance
41
0.5.2
otcr
PA
M.LT
pMy
%d
XLT
Xmin
Xy
ob
5d
5dv
Hd
Siimax
u
vd
vmax
02
Greek symbols
coefficient of linear thermal expansion
factor to determine the position of the neutral axis
coefficient of critical amplification or coefficient of remoteness of critical
state of the frame
coefficient of nominal linear thermal expansion
non-dimensional coefficient for buckling
equivalent uniform moment factor for flexural buckling
equivalent uniform moment factor for lateral-torsional buckling
equivalent uniform moment factor for flexural buckling about yy axis
equivalent uniform moment factor for flexural buckling about zz axis
non-dimensional coefficient for lateral-torsional buckling
reduction factor for the relevant buckling mode
ratio of compression for the resistance of members
reduction factor for lateral-torsional buckling
minimum of %y and
ratio of compression for the resistance of members
reduction factor for the relevant buckling mode about yy axis
reduction factor for the relevant buckling mode about zz axis
relative horizontal displacement of top and bottom of a storey
horizontal displacement of the braced frame
design deflection
design vertical deflection of floors, beams,...
design horizontal deflection of frames
recommended limit of horizontal deflection
in plane deflection of the bracing system due to q plus any external loads
deflection due to variable load (q)
horizontal displacement of the unbraced frame
design vertical deflection of floors, beams,...
recommended limit of vertical deflection
pre-camber (hogging) of the beam in the unloaded state (state 0)
variation of the deflection of the beam due to permanent loads (G)
immediatly after loading (state 1)
variation of the deflection of the beam due to the variable loading (Q) (state
2)
displacement
235
(with fy in N/mmz)
coefficient =
ea
ees
es
Ya
Yap
YF
YG
YM
YMb
YMs.ser
YMW
Y fy
ultimate strain of structural steel
total long-term free shrinkage strain
ultimate strain of reinforcing steel
partial safety factor for structural steel
partial safety factor for profiled steel decking
partial safety factor for force o r for action
partial safety factor for permanent action
partial safety factor for the resistance at ULS
partial safety factor for the resistance of bolted connections
partial safety factor for the slip resistance of preloaded bolts
partial safety factor for the resistance of welded connections
42
YMO
YMI
YQ
Ys
Yv
\
,
Pd
Pi
Pk
Py
va
Pa
Py
pz
Xba
Ter
partial safety factor for resistance at ULS of class 1,2 or 3 cross-sections

(plasticity or yielding)
partial safety factor for resistance of class 4 cross-sections (local buckling
resistance); partial safety factor for the resistance of member to buckling
partial safety factor for variable action
partial safety factor for reinforcing steel
partial safety factor for shear connector
factor for lightweight concrete
slendemess of the member for the relevant buckling mode
Euler slendemess for buckling
non-dimensional slendemess ratio of the member for buckling
non-dimensional slendemess ratio of the member for lateral-torsional
buckling
web slendemess
non dimensional slendemess ratio of the member for buckling about zz and
yy axes
factor for Fs.Rk depending on surface class; ratio of moment for the
resistance of members
factor for N-M interaction
snow load shape coefficient
Poisson's ratio for structural steel
rotation
unit mass for structural steel
reduction factor due to shear force Vsd
reduction factor due to shear force V y .sd
reduction factor due to shear force V z .sd
normal stress
maximum stress in the reinforcement
shear stress
simple post-critical shear strength
elastic critical shear strength
initial sway imperfection of the frame
43
List of Tables
0.6
Page
29
INTRODUCTION
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
Table 1.11
Summary of design requirements

Modelling of frame for analysis
Modelling of connections
Global imperfections of the frame
Values for the initial sway imperfections
Recommended limits for horizontal deflections
Definition of framing for horizontal loads
Member submitted to internal forces and bending moments
Planes within internal forces and bending moments (Nsd. Vsd,
Msd) are acting
Internal forces and bending moments to be checked at ULS for
different types of loading
39
41
40
45
46
48
49
52
53
53
54
55
66
Table II.2
Concrete classes and characteristic values for compression and

tension
Nominal values of shrinkage strain eCs
Table II.3
Values of nominal modular ratios
67
Table II. 1
67
'cy
Table II.4
Table II.5
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
II.6
II.7
II.8
II.9
11.10
Design values of material coefficient for concrete

Nominal values of yield strength fy and ultimate tensile strength
f u for structural steels according to EN 10025 and EN 10113
Comparison table of different steel grades designation
Design values of material coefficients for steel
Yield strength fsk for reinforcing steel
Yield strength of basic material fyb for steel sheeting
Partial safety factors YM for resistances and material properties
at Ultimate Limit State
LOAD ARRANGEMENTS AND LOAD CASES
Table III. 1
Table III.2
Table III.3
Table III.4
Table III.5
Table III.6
Table III.7
Load arrangements Fk. for composite building design according

to Eurocodes 1 & 4
Categories of building areas, traffic areas in buildings and roofs
Imposed load (qk, Qk) on floors in buildings depending on
categories of loaded areas
Exposure coefficient c e as a function of height above ground
External pressure Cpe for verticals walls of rectangular plan
buildings
Combinations of actions for serviceability limit states
Combinations of actions for ultimate limit state
44
68
69
69
69
70
70
72
73
78
81
82
85
86
89
89
Page
Table III.8
IV
Examples for the application of the combinations rules in Table

III.7. All actions (g, q, P, s, w) are considered to originate from
different sources
Table IV. 1
List of checks to be performed at ULS for the composite

member in compression
Limiting width-to-thickness ratios to avoid local buckling
Design shear resistance stresses (due to bond and friction) at the
interface between steel and concrete
Table IV.2
Table IV.3
Table IV.4
Table IV.5
Table IV.6
Table IV.7
Table IV.8
Table IV.8
Table IV.8
Values of io and T|20 function of

Design plastic resistance to compression Npi.Rd
Cross-sectional areas of the structural steel (Aa), the
reinforcement (As) and the concrete (A c )
Imperfection factors
a) Moments of inertia of totally and partially concrete-encased
steel profile
b)Moments of inertia of concrete-filled rectangular hollow section
c) Moments of inertia of concrete-filled circular hollow section
90
91
94
97
98
101
101
102
103
105
106
107
Table IV.9 Limiting values of for long-term loading

Table IV. 10 Buckling length of column, Lh
108
109
Table IV. 11 Buckling reduction factors = f ( ) for composite crosssections
110
Table V.l
Table V.2
Table V.3
Table V.4
Table V.5
Table V.6
Table V.7 a)
Table V.7 b)
Table V.7 c)
Table V.7 d)
Table V.7 e)
Critical sections for the design calculation and related action

effects to be checked
List of checks to be performed at ULS for the member in
bending according to the applied internal forces and/or
moments (V ; M ; (V , M))
Definition of the classification of cross-section
Classification of composite cross-sections : limiting width-overthickness ratio (c / tf) for steel outstand flanges in compression
Classification of composite cross-section : limiting width-tothickness ratios for steel internal flange elements in compression
Classification of composite cross-sections : limiting width-overthickness ratios (d / t w ) for steel webs
Classification of flange and web subjected to particular loading
for standard hot-rolled IPE, fPE A and IPE O steel profiles
for standard hot-rolled HE AA and HE A steel profiles
for standard hot-rolled HE and HE M steel profiles
for standard hot-rolled UB steel profiles
Qassification of flange and web subjected to particular loading
for standard hot-rolled UC steel profiles
45
111
114
115
122
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
Page
Table V.8
Table
Limits to redistribution of hogging moments at supports (in

terms of the maximum percentage of the initial bending
moment to be reduced)
V.9
Shear area Av for cross-sections
V.10 Limiting width-to-thickness ratio related to the shear buckling in
web
V.l 1 Simple post-critical shear strength Tha
V. 12 B uckling factor for shear k t
V.l3a) Plastic stress distributions, positions of plastic neutral axis and
plastic bending moment resistance Mpi.y.Rd for sagging bending
moment
V.l3b)Plastic stress distributions, positions of plastic neutral axis and
plastic bending moment resistance Mpi.y.Rd for hogging
bending moment
V.14 Maximum depth h a in [mm] of the steel member to avoid
lateral-torsional buckling in the hogging moment region
V.l5 Interaction of shear buckling resistance and moment resistance
with the simple post-critical method
V.l6 Design resistance P R [kN] of headed studs with h / d > 4
Table
Table
Table
Table
V.l7
V.l8
V.l9
V.20
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
144
145
148
151
161
178

AND BEND ING MOMENT ( (N , M) ; (N ,V , M) )
179
Table VI. 1
Table VI.2
Table VI.3
Table VI.3
Table VI.3
Table VI.4
Table VI.5
vn
139
1140
140
Basic shear strength XR<J [N/mm2]

Recommended limiting values for vertical deflections
Vertical deflections to be considered
Minimum percentage of reinforcement bars for propped and
unpropped constructions
Maximum bar diameters for high bond bars for different
maximum reinforcement stresses and crack widths at SLS
Table V.21
VI
136
138
List of checks to be performed at ULS for the composite

member submitted to combined axial compressive force and
bending moment (N,M)
Factors for the determination of moments according to
second-order theory
a) Neutral axes and plastic section moduli for totally and partially
concrete-encased steel profile bent about major axis (yy)
b)Neutral axes and plastic section moduli for totally and partially
concrete-encased steel profile bent about minor axis (zz)
c) Neutral axes and plastic section moduli for concrete-filled
circular and rectangular hollow sections
Typical values of
Reduced steel thickness tred allowing for transverse shear force
Table VILI
Maximum span to depth ratios of composite slabs (L / h s i a h)
46
168
172
172
176
183
185
193
194
195
196
201
203
208
0.7
List of Figures
Page
I
INTRODUCTION
Figure 1.1
Figure 1.2
Figure 1.3
Figure 1.4
Figure 1.5
29
Advantage of composite column

Advantage of composite beam
Ratio of moment resistances for composite section to steel
section
Ratio of moments of inertia for composite section to steel
section
34
42
31
32
33
55
Figure II. 1
Types of composite columns
57
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Types of composite beams

Types of composite slabs and concrete slabs
Minimum dimensions of headed stud shear connector
Examples of joints in composite frames
Modelling of joints
Effects of propped and unpropped construction
Framing plans for medium and long span beams
58
59
60
61
62
63
65
II.2
II.3
II.4
II.5
II.6
II.7
II.8
LOAD ARRANGEMENTS AND LOAD CASES
Figure III. 1
Figure III.2
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
TV
III.3
III.4
III.5
HI.6
III.7
Flow-chart for load arrangements and load cases for general

global analysis of the structure
Flow-chart for load arrangements and load cases for first
order elastic global analysis of the structure
Construction loads on profiled steel decking
Values of dynamic factor Cd for composite buildings
Pressures on surfaces
Reference height ze depending on h and b
Internal pressure coefficient Cpi for buildings with openings
in the wall
73
76
77
80
83
83
85
86
91
Figure IV. 1
Type of cross-sections of composite columns
93
Figure IV.2
Introduction length l\ for the shear force
98
Figure I V.3
Figure IV.4
Mechanical shear connection

Shear resistance of headed stud connectors used to create
direct load transfer into the concrete
99
47
100
Page
V
Figure V.l
Figure V.2
Effective width beff and equivalent spans of concrete

flange
111
118
Elastic analysis of composite beam under sagging and

hogging moment
Flow-chart for classification of a composite beam crosssection (with references to fEC4] and to (design handbook})
Spacing requirements of shear connectors for the Class 1
steel flange in compression
125
Figure V.5
Requirements for encased web
126
Figure V.6
Figure V.8
Improved classification of steel webs with compression flange

in class 1 or 2 and with specific conditions
Definition of "uncracked" and "cracked" sections for
elastic global analysis
Load introduction and length of stiff bearing, s s
1 37
141
Figure V.9
Inverted U-frame action
147
Figure V.10
Nomial stress distribution for M-V interaction with hogging

bending moment
Resistance in bending and vertical shear in absence of shear
buckling
Calculation of the longitudinal shear force Vf in simply
supported beams
155
Calculation of the longitudinal shear force Vf in continuous

beams
156
Minimum degree of shear connection allowing ductile

behaviour of headed studs
Relation between F c and Msd for partial shear connection
1 58
159
MRd, reduced bending moment resistance of composite

cross-section because of partial shear connection
1 60
Figure V.l7
Composite beam with solid slab
160
Figure V.l8
Beams with steel decking ribs parallel to the beam
1 61
Figure V.19
Beams with steel decking ribs transverse to the beam
1 62
Figure V.20
Detailing of shear connectors in solid slab
1 63
Figure V.21
Types of composite beams with composite slabs
1 64
Figure V.22
Detailing of shear connectors in composite slabs with steel
Figure V.3
Figure V.4
Figure V.7
Figure V.ll
Figure V.l2
Figure V.l3
Figure V.14
Figure V.15
Figure V.l6
1 19
124
127
150
151
decks including central stiffener
166
Figure V.23
Typical potential surfaces of shear failure in slabs
1 67
Figure V.24
Reinforcement length at supports for a composite beam
176
48
Page
VI

AND BENDING MOMENT ( (N , M) ; (N ,V , M) )
Figure VI. 1
179
Internal forces and bending moments applied to composite

member
181
Figure VI.2
Type of cross-sections of composite columns
181
Figure VI.3
Cross-section interaction curve for compression and uniaxial

bending
Cross-section
interaction
curve
(with
polygonal
approximation) for compression and uniaxial bending
Stresses distributions corresponding to the interaction curve
(Figure VI.4)
Design procedure for compression and uniaxial bending
interaction
197
Figure VI.7
Verification for combined compression and biaxial bending
199
Figure VI. 8
Reduction of normal stresses of steel profile within shear area

in the presence of transverse shear stress
200
Figure VI.4
Figure VI.5
Figure VI.6
VH
Figure VILI
Figure VII.2
Typical composite slabs

Orientation of profiled steel decking
49
188
189
190
203
206
209
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
LI
Benefits of composite structures

Following figures illustrate the main advantages of composite structures that may be
reached in comparison with other forms of construction:
Ref. 14
- for columns: the load carrying capacity of the composite profile may reach twice
that of the steel profile acting alone. For an applied axial load N x sd> a composite
column may allow to reduce the section size and always delivers better fire
resistance than for steel section alone; this fire resistance increases with the amount
of reinforcing bars protected by concrete (see Figure 1.1).
Comparison of different columns, with a buckling length of 4 meters and
bearing the same service load : N x .sd = 3.200 kN
500 mm
20
*
. 240 nun
280 mm
HE 240
COMPOSITE
COLUMN
Figure 1.1
HE 280
PURE STEEL
COLUMN
REINFORCED CONCRETE
COLUMN
Advantage of composite column
- for beams:
the bearing capacity of composite beams relative to steel sections alone may
be increased in the range of 1,5 to 2,2 for typical slab depth and for all IPE
and HE steel section (up to 600 mm deep) as shown in Figure 1.3. This figure
provides the ratio of moment resistances for composite sections to steel
(MpiRdjcomposite
sections,
;
, for certain assumptions regarding the slab depth
(Mapl.Rd)steel
(h c + hp = 130 mm; h p = 50 mm), the slab width (beff = 5 (h c + h p + ha)), the
concrete strength (C25/30), both steel grades S 235 & S 355 and and HE
sections (see Table V.13 for notations and formulas). For an applied bending
moment (My.Sd), composite beams with naked steel section and with partiallyencased steel section (calculated with Annex G of Eurocode 4), may allow to
reduce the section size, as shown in Figure 1.2; composite beams with
partially-encased section also provide better fire resistance in comparison with
naked steel section.
53
Comparison of different beams carrying

the same service bending moment : My.sd - 910 kN.m
1,50 m
*K
1,50 m
1,50 m
] C
|S|
J 0-301
HE 320 A
HE 400 A
CONCRETE
BEAM
(concrete strength :
C35/45
Figure 1.2
STEEL PROFILE
AND
CONCRETE SLAB
(without collaboration)
,50 m
0,30
HE 300 A
COMPOSITE B EAMS
(with collaboration between
steel profile and concrete slab)
Advantage of composite beam
the most important benefit of composite action may be the reduction of beam
deflections because of increased stiffness of composite section compared with
steel section alone. Figure 1.4 presents the ratio of moments of inertia for
(I c Composite
I,
composite sections steel section,
for IPE and HE steel
(L)steel
'a J
sections (up to 600 mm deep) and for several typical assumptions regarding
the slab depth (h c + h p = 130 mm; h p = 50 mm), the slab width (b e ff = 5 ( h c +
hp + h a )) and for modular ratio of concrete (n = 10) (see clause V.2.1 (5), for
notations and formulas). Typically the ratios I c / I a (= \\ I I a ) vary in the range
of 2,5 to 4,0 indicating the great potential benefit with composite beams.
54
0^
O
O
un
o
o
t
S
O
o
O
o
o
CM
o
o
<
IT) /-) ir)

^
t^
^
CM
(S m t/) w w
? *? < < co <

l
I I
I I
in
en
CN
pHidEI\[ / p H | d l\[ : 3 D U B ; S I S 9 H J U 9 U I O J \ [ J O O I J B H
Figure 1.3
Ratio of moment resistances for composite section to steel section
55
ON
Figure 1.4
Ratio of moments of inertia for composite section to steel section
56
1.2
Basis of design
The table 1.1 summarizes this chapter 1.2 providing the practical principles of design
requirements. Details and explanations are given in the following sub-chapters 1.2.1 to
1.2.3.
1.2.1
EC4
[2.1 (l)]
Fundamental requirements
(1) A structure shall be designed and constructed in such a way that:

- with acceptable probability, it will remain fit for the use for which it is required,
having due to regard to its intended live and its cost, and
- with appropriate degrees of reliability, it will sustain all actions and other influences
likely to occur during execution (i.e. the construction stage) and use (i.e. the
composite stage) and have adequate durability in relation to maintenance costs.
[2.1 (2)]
(2) A structure shall also be designed in such a way that it will not be damaged by events like
explosions, impact or consequences of human errors, to an extent disproportionate to the
original cause.
[2.1 (4)]
(3) The above requirements shall be met by the choice of suitable materials, by appropriate
design and detailing and by specifying control procedures for production, construction
and use as relevant for the particular project.
1.2.2
Definitions
1.2.2.1
Limit states
EC4
[2.2.1.1 (l)] (1) Eurocode 4 is a limit state design code in which principles and mies are given for the
verification of :
- Serviceability Limit States (SLS) and,
- Ultimate Limit States (ULS).
(2) The limit states are states beyond which the structure no longer satisfies the design
performance requirements.
(3) These limit states are referred to physical phenomena as for instance:
EC4
[2.2.1.1 (6)]
a) for SLS, problems which may limit the serviceability because of:
- deformations or deflections which adversely affect the appearance or effective
use of the structure (including the proper functioning of machines or services)
or cause damage to finishes or non-structural elements,
-
vibration which causes discomfort to people, damage to the building or its

contents, or which limits its functional effectiveness,
cracking of the concrete which is likely to affect appeareance, durability or

water-tightness adversely,
damage to concrete because of excessive compression, which is likely to lead to

loss of durability,
- slip at the steel-concrete interface when it becomes large enough to invalidate

design checks for other serviceability limit states in which the effects of slip are
neglected.
57
EC4
[2.2.1.1 (4)]
b) for ULS, problems which may endanger the safety of people and thus be regarded
as ultimate limit because of:
- loss of equilibrium of structure or any part of it, considered as a rigid body,
- failure by excessive defomiation, rupture, or loss of stability of the structure or
any part of it, including shear connection, supports and foundations.
1.2.2.2
Actions
(1) Details about actions are provided in Eurocode 1 (Ref. 1).

EC4
[2.2.2.1 (1)]
(2) An action (F) is:

- a force (load) applied to the structure (direct action), or
- an imposed deformation (indirect action); e.g. temperatures effects, settlement
or shrinkage.
EC4
[2.2.2.1 (2)]
(3) Actions (F) are classified as:

a) by their variation in time :
- permanent actions (G), e.g. self-weight of structures, fittings, ancillaries and
fixed equipment,
- variable actions (Q), e.g. imposed loads (q), wind loads (w) or snow loads (s),
- accidental actions (A), e.g. explosions or impact from vehicles.
b) by their spatial variation :
- fixed actions, e.g. self-weight,
- free actions, which result in different arrangements of actions, e.g. movable
imposed loads, wind loads, snow loads.
EC4
[2.2.2.2 (1)]
(4) Characteristic values F^ of actions are specified :

- in Eurocode 1 or other relevant loading codes, or
- by client, or the designer in consultation with the client, provided that the minimum
provisions specified in the relevant loading codes or by the competent authority
are observed.
EC4
[2.2.2.4 (1)]
[form. (2.1)]
(5) The design (factored) values F of an action (for instance Gd, Qd> wd, Sd) is expressed in
general terms as:
Fd=?F
where Fk
TF
k
is the characteristic (unfactored) value of action.
is the partial safety factor for the action considered - taking into account
of, for example, the possibility of unfavourable deviations of the actions,
the possibility of inaccurate modelling of the actions,
uncertainties in the assessment of effects of actions and
uncertainties in the assessment of the limit state considered (the
values of are given in Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4: 2.3.3.1) and
present chapter III.3: yG (permanent actions), JQ (variable
actions),...).
58
EC4
[2.2.2.5]
(6) The combinations of actions respectively for ULS and for SLS are given in chapter III.
(7) Design values of the effects of actions :
The effects of actions (E) are responses (for example, internal forces and moments (Ns d ,
Vsd. Msd). stresses, strains, deflections, rotations) of the structure to the actions. Design
values of the effects of actions (Ed) are determined from the design values of the actions,
geometrical data (ad) and material properties when relevant:
Ed=E(Fdad,...)
[form. (2.2)]
1.2.2.3
Material properties
EC4
[2.2.3.1 (l)] (1) Characteristic values of material properties:
- A material property is represented by a characteristic value X^ which in general
corresponds to a fractile in the assumed statistical distribution of the particular
property of the material specified in relevant standard or according to tests results
(e.g. concrete, steel reinforcing bars). Certain properties of some components (e.g.
resistance of a shear connector PRJJ are treated as material properties,
EC4
[2.2.3.1 (2)]
- Structural steel parts (e.g. steel beam, profiled steel decking) of composite
structures are generally represented by nominal values used as characteristic values
(unfactored) (Xk),
EC4
[2.2.3.1 (3)]
- For other materials properties the characteristics values are for some verifications
substituted or supplemented by mean or nominal values which correspond to the
most likely values throughout the structure for which a minimum characteristic
value has been specified (case for concrete properties and for physical
coefficients).
EC4
[2.2.3.2 (2)] (2) Design values of material properties:
For composite structures, the design values of the material strengths (Xd) and geometrical
data (a d ), when relevant, shall be used to determined the design resistances of members or
cross-sections, according to the individual chapters, as :
[form. (2.3bis)]
EC4
[2.3.4 (6)]
Rd=R(Xk,ak,...)/yM
in most cases where is the partial safety factor for the resistance. The different 7 M
factors are explicitly given in the design formulas and their values are provided in table
11.10 for ULS checks. YM factors shall be taken as 1,0 for SLS checks, except where
stated otherwise in particular clauses. Where the resistance is influenced by the buckling
of the structural steel, other formulations are used, including a specific safety factor 7Rd
(see chapter II.6).
1.2.3
Design requirements
1.2.3.1
General
EC4
[2.3.1 (l)]
(1) It shall be verified that no relevant limit state is exceeded.
[2.3.1 (2)]
(2) All relevant design situations and load cases shall be considered.
[2.3.1 (3)]
(3) Possible deviations from the assumed directions or positions of actions shall be
considered.
59
[2.3.1 (4)]
(4) Calculations shall be performed using appropriate design models (supplemented, if

necessary, by tests) involving all relevant variables. The models shall be sufficiently
precise to predict the structural behaviour, commensurate with the standard of
workmanship likely to be achieved, and with the reliability of the information on which
the design is based.
1.2.3.2
EC4
[2.3.4 (l)]
Serviceability Limit States
( 1 ) It shall be verified that:
[form. (2.13)]
Ed^Cd
or E d ^ R d
where Ed
is the design effect of actions, determined on the basis of one of

the combinations defined in chapter III,
Cd
is a nominal value or a function of certain design properties of

materials related to the design effect of actions considered.
(2) Practical checks of SLS in floors and frames for instance (see chapter 1.4)
( v d , H d ) < ( V max'S H m a x )
f >f
where yd
1.2.3.3
d L mm
is the design vertical deflection of floors

(recommended limits vmax = L/250,...),
Hd
is the design horizontal deflection of frames (limits nmax = h/300,

...X
fd
is the design natural frequency of floors (recommended limits fmin

= 3 Hz,...),
EC4
[2.3.2.1 (2)] (1) When considering a limit state of rupture or excessive deformation of a section, member
or connection (fatigue excluded) it shall be verified that:
[form. (2.7)]
S, <Rr
where Sd
is the design value of an internal force or moment (or of a

respective vector of several internal forces or moments),
Rd
is the corresponding design resistance, associating all structural

properties with the respective design values.
(2) Practical checks of ULS in members for instance (see chapter 1.4):
(NSd,VSd,MSd)<(NRd,VRd,MRd)
condition concerning separate internal forces or moments or, interaction between
them ((V,M), (, M),...)
where (Nsd, Vsd, MSd) are design internal forces and moments applied to the
members,
(NRd, VRd, MRd) are design resistance of the members.
60
Table LI
Summary of design requirements
1) frame submitted to SLS and ULS combinations of design actions F (Gd,Qdwd,Sd,.)

EC4
[2.2.2.4 (1)]
YFFI
where
Fk
is the characteristic value of actions,
7F
is the partial safety factor for the considered action (see chapter III.3)
2) after global analysis of the frame :

design effects of actions (e.g. deflections, frequencies) (for SLS):
Ed ( = (od, fd) )
design values of internal forces and moments (for ULS):
S d ( = (Nsd, Vsd, MSd) )
3) verification conditions at limit states :
for SLS checks
EC4
[2.3.4 (1)]
in general:
EH<C,
where
for instance:
is the nominal value related to the design effect of

considered actions (design capacity).
Cd
(VdHd)<(vmax'SHmax)
fn>fn
where
vd
is the design vertical deflection of floors,
ond
is the design horizontal deflection of frames,
fd
is the design natural frequency of floors,
Svmax'OHmax'fmin are recommended limits (for instance:

L/250' h/300, 3 Hz).
for ULS checks
in general:
sd<Rd
where
Rd
R
EC4
[2.3.2.1 (2)]
where
EC4
[form. (2.3)]
for instance:
is the design resistance (= (NRd, VRd, MRd)):
d =Rk/YM
Rk
is the characteristic value of the used material,
YM
is the partial safety factor for the resistance(see

table 11.10)
(N S d , V s d . M S d ) < ( N R d , v R d ' M R d )
condition concerning separate internal forces or moments or,
interaction between them ((V,M), (N,M),...)
61
EC4 [4.9]
1.3
Design of composite braced frame
1.3.1
Generalities
( 1 ) Frames shall be checked :

- at Serviceability Limit States :
EC4 [5.2.1 (3)]
- for horizontal deflections (see chapter 1.4.3) ,

- at Ultimate Limit States :
EC4 [4.1.1 (3)]

EC3
[5.1.2 (2)]
- for static equilibrium (see chapter 1.3.2),

- for resistance of cross-sections, members and connections (see chapter 1.4.4).
(2) When checking the resistance of composite cross-sections and members of a frame, each
member may be treated as isolated from the frame, with forces and moments applied to
each end as determined from the frame analysis. The conditions of restraint at each end
should be determined by considering the member as part of the frame and should be
consistent with the type of analysis and mode of failure.
1.3.1.1
Analysis models for frames
(1) In general spatial frame structures may be separated into several plane frames that may
be considered as laterally supported at the spacial nodes (see Table 1.2, part 1).
In the first step for the inplane loading of these plane frames out-of-planc deflections
between the lateral supports are neglected and only the inplane monoaxial action effects
are determined.
In the second step the individual members of the plane frame between the lateral
supports, i.e. the beams and the columns, are separated from the plane frame, to consider
lateral buckling and lateral-torsional buckling, under monoaxial bending and
compression. Members which are common to two different frames, e.g. columns, may be
verified for biaxial bending and compression (see Table 1.2, part 2).
(2) Table 1.3 shows the modelling of connections in the global analysis depending on their
rotational stiffness.
Table 13
Ref. 6
[Table 5.2]
Modelling of connections
Type of connection Symbols in the analysis
Designed for
Design or detail criteria
Pinned connection
tension,
compression
or shear only
Small restraint to
sufficient rotations :
example in Figure II.5 a)
vj
moment, shear, Small rotations,

sufficient elastic moment
tension or
Rigid connection
and shear strength :
compression
f
from an elastic example in Figure II.5 a)
or plastic global
analysis
For semi-rigid connections no application rules are given in Eurocode 4
62
Table 1.2
Modelling of frame for analysis
1. Separation of plane frames from the spatial frame

FRAME2I
rl
FRAME 1
il
<%-
2. Separation of individual members from plane frame
FRAME 1
Ml
iHnW
Isolated beam
Isolated column
N2
63
1.3.1.2
EC4
[4.9.1 (7)]
(1) The Figure 1.5 presents a sequence given by Eurocode 4 to follow in order to verify the
design of a composite braced frame.
steps :
1)
Define the imperfections of the frame (EC4 : 4.9.3) and represent them by
equivalent horizontal forces at nodes (see chapter 1.3.3.2)
2)
Ensure that no steel connection is "semi-rigid", using 4.10.5 of EC4 and
clause 6.9.6 of EC3.
3)
For members of reinforced or prestressed concrete, ensure the ductility

requirements of clause 2.5.3 of EC2 are met.
4)
Check that the frame is braced (EC4 : 4.9.4.3) (see clause 1.3.1.2 (2)).
5)
Check that the bracing substructure is non-sway (EC4 : 4.9.4) (sec clause
1.3.1.2 (3)).
6)
Decide whether the requirements for rigid-plastic global analysis (EC4 : 4.9.7)
are satisfied if relevant.
7)
Carry out global analyses (EC4 : 4.9.5 to 4.9.7) for relevant load
combinations and arrangements and hence find design internal forces and
moments at each end of each member (see chapter 111,1).
8)
Verify the composite beams (EC4 : 4.2 to 4.4) (see chapter V), columns (EC4
: 4.8) (see chapters IV and VI), and connections (EC4 : 4.10).
9)
Verify beams, columns, and connections of structural steel (to EC3) and of
concrete (to EC2).
10)
Reference is made to the effective length (buckling length) of reinforced

concrete and steel columns in EC4, 4.8.3.6(4).
11)
For reinforced concrete columns, clause 4.3.5.5.3

("isolated columns") are applicable.
Figure 1.5
and 4.3.5.6 of EC2
EC3
[5.2.5.3 (2)] (2) Classification of braced or unbraced frame :

braced frame
The frame is braced if:

where 0
unbraced frame
b<0,2u
is the horizontal displacement of the frame with the bracing
system
\
is the horizontal displacement of the unbraced frame,
according to first order elastic global analysis of the frame submitted to hypothetic
horizontal loads .
64
Note: In the case of simple frames with all beam-column nodes nominally pinned, the
frame without bracing would be hypostatic, hence 5U is infinite and thus the
condition 5b ^ 0,2 5U is always fulfilled.
EC3[5.2.5.2](3) Classification of sway or non-sway frame :
A frame may be classified as non-sway if according to first order elastic global analysis
of the frame for each ULS load case, one of the following criteria is satisfied :
EC3
[5.2.5.2 (3)]
a) //; general :
Vsd
v.
1
ar
< 0,1
where Vsd
Ver
Oer
EC3
[5.2.5.2 (4)]
, condition which is equivalent to
a c r > 10
is the design value of the total vertical load,

is the elastic critical value of the total vertical load for failure in
a sway mode ( = 2 I / L 2 with L, buckling length for a
column in a sway mode; Vcr of a column does not
correspond necessarily to Vcr of the frame including that
column),
is the coefficient of critical amplification or coefficient of
remoteness of critical state of the frame.
b) in case of building structures with beams connecting each columns at each storey
level :
where H, V
( 1 + 2 )
h(H1+H2)
< 0,1
are the total horizontal and vertical reactions at the bottom of

the storey,
is the relative horizontal displacement of top and bottom of the

storey,
is the height of the storey,
H V,
are deduced from a first order analysis of the frame submitted

to both horizontal and vertical design loads and to the global
imperfections of the frame applied in the form of equivalent
horizontal forces (see Table 1.4).
Notes:
A same frame could be classified as sway according to a load case (Vsdi for
instance) and as non-sway according to another load case ( Vsd2 for instance).
The simplified method b) may provide non conservative results if the geometry of
the structure and/or the applied loading are non symmetrical.
65
VcH
For multi-storeys buildings the relevant condition is
Sdi
^- = maximum V
Vcr
V vcn J
(
condition which is equivalent to <XT = minimum (a cr i), where 'Sdi or a cr j are
V v cri )
related to the storey I.
1.3.2
EC3
[2.3.2.4]
Static equilibrium
(1) For the verification of static equilibrium, destabilizing (unfavourable) actions shall be
represented by upper design values and stabilizing (favourable) actions by lower design
values.
(2) For stabilizing effects, only those actions which can reliably be assumed to be present in
the situation considered shall be included in the relevant combination.
(3) Variable actions should be applied where they increase the destabilizing effects but
omitted where they would increase the stabilizing effects (YQ = 0, in Table III.7).
(4) Account should be taken of the possibility that non-structural elements might be omitted
or removed.
(5) For building structures, the normal partial safety factor given in Table III.7 apply to
permanent actions ( = 1,0 if favourable actions).
(6) Where uncertainty of the value of a geometrical dimension significantly affects the
verification of static equilibrium, this dimension shall be represented in this verification
by the most unfavourable value that it is reasonably possible for it to reach.
1.3.3
Load arrangements and load cases
1.3.3.1
Generalities
(1) Load arrangements which may be applied to buildings are provided in chapter III.2.
(2) Load cases (see chapter III.3) may be established according to two procedures to study
structures submitted to actions :
-
a general procedure presented in Figure III. 1 or,
a particular procedure presented in Figure HI.2 which is applicable for braced

buildings because such structure may be studied by first order elastic global
analysis.
(3) Two types of load cases shall be considered :

- load cases for Serviceability Limit States and,
- load cases for Ultimate Limit States,
where differences are related to combination mies:
-
see Table III.6 for SLS combinations of actions
- see Table III.7 for ULS combinations of actions
66
1.3.3.2
EC4
[4.9.3 (3)]
EC3
[5.2.4.1 (1)]
EC3
[5.2.4.3 (1)]
Frame imperfections
(1) In case of braced frame the effects of global frame imperfections shall be taken into
account in the global analysis of the bracing system.
(2) Appropriate allowances shall be incorporated to cover the effects of practical
imperfections, including residual stresses and geometrical imperfections such as lack of
vertically, lack of straightness due to welding or lack of fit and the unavoidable minor
eccentricities present in practical connections.
(3) The effects of imperfections shall be allowed for frame analysis by means of :
- an equivalent geometric imperfection in the form of an initial sway imperfection
or,
- equivalent horizontal forces according to Table 1.4, either method is permissible.
(4) As shown in Table 1.4 the initial sway imperfections of a frame are directly proportionate
to the relevant applied vertical loads of each load case.
Therefore global imperfections of a frame should be calculated for each load case.
Table 1.4
Global imperfections of the frame
Initial sway imperfections of the frame
equivalent horizontal forces
Ref. 6
(table 5.5)
F2
2
- I I I I ,
'
Fi
Fl
fcj
(Fi + F2)
'
(Fi + F2)
EC3
[5.2.4.3 (4)] (5) The initial sway imperfections apply in all horizontal directions, but only need to be
considered in one direction at a time. The Table 1.5 gives the numerical values for :
[form. (5.2)]
= k c ks 0
1
where 0 = 200'
k c = . J 0,5 + < 1,0,
ks=
where
0,2+ < 1,0,

n,,
is the number of columns per plane,
67
ns
is the number of storeys.
EC3
[5.2.4.3 (2)] (6) Only those columns which carry a vertical load Nsd of at least 50% of mean value of the
vertical load per column in the considered plane, shall be included in n c .
EC3
[5.2.4.3 (3)] (7) Only those columns which extend through all the storeys included in n s shall be included
in . Only those floor or roof levels which are connected to all the columns included in
n c shall be included when determining ns.
Table L5
number
of storeys
Values for the initial sway imperfections
number
of
columns
in plane
nc= 2
nc= 3
nc = 4
nc= 5
n c oo
1
1
1
_ _L _
ns= 1
1/200
1 /220
1 /230
1/240
1 /280
1 /240
1 /260
1 /275
1 /285
1 /335
1/275
1 /300
1 / 315
1 /325
1 / 385
1/300
1 /325
1 /345
1 /355
1 /420
1 /445
1 /490
1 /515
1 / 535
1 /63)
ns=2
ns= 3
_
ns = 4
_
n s = oo
1
I
EC4
[4.9.5 (l)]
1.3.4
First order elastic global analysis
1.3.4.1
Methods of analysis
(1) The internal forces and moments in a statically determinate structure shall be obtained
using statics.
EC4
[4.5.9 (2)] (2) The internal forces and moments in a statically indeterminate structure may generally be
determined using either :
- elastic global analysis
- plastic global analysis
(3) Elastic global analysis may be used in all cases.
68
1.3.4.2
Effects of deformations
EC4 [4.9.2.5]
(1) The internal forces and bending moments may generally be determined using either :
- first order theory, using initial geometry of the structure, or,
- second order theory, taking into account the influence of the deformation of the
structure.
(2) First order theory may be used for the global analysis of braced frames, in general.
Alternatively second order theory may be used for the global analysis.
1.3.4.3
Elastic global analysis
EC4 [4.9.6]
EC4
[4.9.6.1 (l)] (1) Elastic global analysis shall be based on the assumption that the stress-strain behaviour of
the material is linear, whatever the stress level. Concrete in tension shall be included or
neglected. When it is included, reinforcement in tension may be neglected,
Reinforcement in compression may normally be neglected. This assumption may be
maintained even where the resistance of a cross-section is based on its plastic resistance.
Concrete in tension may be included or neglected. When it is included, reinforcement in
tension may be neglected. Reinforcement in compression may normally be neglected.
EC4
[4.9.6.1 (4)] (2) In order to determine the internal forces and moments (N, V, M) in braced composite
frames, first order elastic global analysis may be used only where all connections are
either rigid or nominally pinned (see chapter 1.3.1.1 (2)).
EC4
[4.9.6.1 (2)] (3) The effects of slip and uplift may be neglected at interfaces between steel and concrete at
which shear connection is provided in accordance with chapter V.2.7.
EC4
[4.9.6.1 (3)] (4) The principles about sequence of construction (Ref. 4 : 4.5.3.2) and shrinkage of
concrete (Ref. 4 : 4.5.3.3) are applicable.
EC4
[4.9.6.2]
(5) Flexural stiffness :
EC4
[4.9.6.2 (2)]
For composite beams in braced frames both methods of elastic global analysis are
allowed (see chapter V.2.3) :
- with uncracked section (E a li),
- or, with cracked section (E a li and E a I2), where flexural stiffnesses E a I1 and E a I2
are evaluated according to clause V.2.1 (5).
EC4
[4.9.6.2 (4)]
EC4
[4.9.6.2 (l)]
In first order analysis of braced frames the elastic flexural stiffness of composite columns
should be taken as E a li , where li is the "uncracked" second moment of area, as
defined in Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4 : 4.2.3) and with the help of Table IV.8.
Creep effects shall be considered if they are likely to reduce the structural stability
significantly. But creel effects in composite columns may be ignored if conditions of
Eurocode 4 are satisfied (Ref. 4 : 4.9.6.2 (3)).
(6) Redistribution of bending moments are allowed in Eurocode 4 within certain conditions
(Ref. 4 : 4.9.6.3).
(7) In case of first order elastic global analysis the principle of superposition is applicable
because the effects of actions (E, S) are linear functions of the applied actions (F = G, Q,
...) (no - effects and used material with an elastic linear behaviour).
69
The principle of superposition allows to consider a particular procedure to study

structure submitted to actions. This procedure illustrated in Figure III.2 could be more
practical because it should simplify the decision of which load case gives the worst effect.
Table 1.6
Ref. 6
[Table 4.3]
Recommended limits for horizontal deflections

Multi -storey frame
Single storey frame
< hi/ 300 hl

2 < h 2 / 300
< ho / 500
1.3.5
Portal frame without

gantry cranes
< h / 150
Other buildings
< h / 300
Verifications at SLS
The limiting values for vertical deflections of beams, cracking of concrete and vibrations
of floors are given respectively in chapters V3.2, V.3.3 and V.3.4.
1.3.5.1
EC4 [5.2.1 (3)]

EC3
[4.2.2 (4)]
Deflections of frames
The limiting values for horizontal deflections of frames given in Table 1.6 are illustrated
by reference to the multi-storey and single-storey frame.
1.3.6
Verifications at ULS
1.3.6.1
Definiton of braced frames and non-sway frames
EC3
[5.2.5.1 (l)] (1) All structures shall have sufficient stiffness to resist to the horizontal forces and to limit
lateral sway. This may be supplied by:
a) the sway stiffness of the bracing systems, which may be :
-
triangulated frames,
- rigid-jointed frames,
-
shear walls, cores and the like.
b) the sway stiffness of the frames, which may be supplied by one or more of the
following :
-
triangulation,
stiffness of the connections,
cantilever columns.
70
(2) Framing for resistance to the horizontal loads and to sway. Two examples are given in
Table 1.7 :
EC3
[5.2.5.3 (1)]
a) typical example of a frame with "bracing system", which could be sufficiently

stiff:
- for the frame to be classified as a "braced frame",
- and, to assume that all in-plane horizontal loads are resisted by the bracing
system.
EC3
[5.2.5.3 (2)]
The criterion of classification as braced or unbraced frames is explained in chapter

1.3.1.2.
EC3 [5.2.5.2 (l)]
b) example of a bracing system which could be sufficiently stiff :

- to be classified as a "non-sway frame",
- and, to neglect any additional internal forces or moments arising from inplane horizontal displacements of its nodes.
EC3
[5.2.5.2 (3), (4)]
The criteria of classification as sway or non-sway frames are detailed in chapter

1.3.1.2.
Table 1.7
Definition of framing for horizontal loads
1) With bracing system

T T T T T T T T T T T T '
,, ,, ,r ,,
iL
iL
<3
iL
fnr
FRAME WITH B RACING
iL
JTI
BRACED FRAME
+ B RACING SYSTEM
2) Non-swav frames :
(3) According to Eurocode 4 application mies, composite frames should be braced and the
bracing system (composite or not) should be checked to be according to Eurocode 3
mies (Ref. 3 : 5.2.5) (see chapter 1.3.1.2), sway or non-sway for each load case.
EC3
[5.2.5.3 (3)] (4) A braced composite frame may be treated as a non-sway frame fully supported laterally.
71
(5) As the criterion of braced or unbraced frame classification is related to the stiffness of
the frame and on hypothetic horizontal loads, the frame should be classified as braced or
not independently of load cases.
1.3.6.2
EC4
ULS checks
The frames shall be checked at ultimate limit states for the reistances of cross-sections,
members and connections. For those ULS checks reference may be made to the
following chapters :
- Members in compression :
chapter IV
- Members in bending :
chapter V
- Members with combined axial force and bending moments :
chapter VI
Connections :
see Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4) [4.10]
1.4
Content of the design handbook
1.4.1
Scope of the handbook
(1) In summary, the document covers the following aspects in detail:

-
Composite beams with composite or solid slabs,
- Braced frames,
- Continuous beams (or with connections equivalent to the moment resistance of the
beam),
- Welded headed stud shear connectors,
- Full or partial shear connection,
- Class 1 or 2 sections (class 3 webs are permitted for continuous beams),
- Composite columns (encased I sections or concrete filled sections) under axial
load,
- Composite columns with moments using simplified interaction method,
- Partially encased sections,
- Elastic global analysis of composite frames.
(2) The document makes only general reference (and does not include detailed information)
on:
- Simply supported (simple connections),
- Design of connections,
- Behaviour of composite slabs,
- Cracking in concrete,
- Other forms of shear connector,
- Use of precast concrete slabs,
- Lightweight concrete,
- Lateral-torsional buckling,
- Fire resistance aspects.
72
General analysis of composite columns,

Class 3 or 4 sections for composite beams.
(3) Following topics are excluded:
- Non-uniform cross-sections,
- Sway frames,
- Partial strength connections.
EC4
[1.1.2 (6)]
(4) Eurocode 4 Part 1.1 (Ref. 4) does not cover:

- resistance to fire (see Eurocode 4, Part 1.2: Fire resistance) nor, more generally,
resistance at non-climatic temperatures;
- resistance to highly repeated actions liable to result in fatigue;
- resistance to dynamic actions that are not quasi-static;
- particular aspects of special types of civil engineering works (such as bridges, crane
girders, masts, towers, offshore platforms, nuclear containment vessels); for bridges,
see Eurocode 4, Part 2;
- particular aspects of special types of buildings (such as industrial buildings as far
as fatigue would need to be considered);
- prestressed structures;
- members the structural steel component of which has cross-sections with no axis of
symmetry parallel to the plane of its web;
- members the structural concrete or of concrete including heavy aggregate, or has
less reinforcement than the minimum values given in clause [5.4] of Eurocode
(Ref. 2), or contains expanding or non-shrinkage admixtures;
- composite plates consisting of a flat steel plate connected with a concrete slab;
- sway frames;
- some types of shear connectors (see chapter II.3.4);
- semi-continuous frames such that rigid-plastic global analysis cannot be used (see
[1.4.2(1)] in Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4), and in Eurocode 3 (Ref. 3) clause [5.2.2.4] and
[Table 5.2.1]);
- base plates beneath composite columns;
- particular aspects of composite piles for foundations;
- particular aspects of members with haunched or tapered steel components (non
uniform cross-section);
- particular aspects of box girders;
- particular aspects of totally or partially encased beams (see however [4.3.3.1],
Annex and Annex G);
- and more generally particular aspects mentioned as not covered in the following
chapters (relating for example to the form of cross-sections);
- thermal or sound insulation (see [1.1.1(2)] of Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4));
- partial strength connections;
- beams with fully-encased steel sections (see [4.1.1(1)] of Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4)).
73
1.4.2
Summary of the table of contents

- chapter I:
benefits of composite structures;

limit states (SLS, ULS), design requirements;
design procedure for global analysis of braced composite
according to EC4;
frames
scope, definitions;
- chapter II: Complete set of data of the structure (types of elements, material
properties);
recommendations for composite design;
- chapter III: determination of load arrangements and load cases for Ultimate Limit
States and, Serviceability Limit States;
- chapter IV to VI:
SLS checks for beams (see chapter 1.4.3);
ULS checks of members (beams and columns,...) submitted to internal
forces and bending moments (N, V, M) considering the resistance of
cross-sections, the overall buckling of members (buckling, lateraltorsional buckling) and local effects (shear buckling of webs (V)): see
chapter 1.4.4;
- chapter VII: generalities about design of composite slabs
1.4.3
(1) The Table 1.8 presents the different checks which shall be fulfilled by beams and frames
at Serviceability Limit States with references to the design handbook :
Table 1.8
Type of checks
Vertical
deflections of
beams
Horizontal
deflections of
beams
Cracking of
concrete
Vibration of
floors
Beams
Chapter V.3.2
Chapter V.3.3
Chapter V.3.4
Frames
Chapter V.3.2
Chapter 1.3
Chapter V.3.3
Chapter V.3.4
1.4.4
EC4
[4.1.1 (3)]
Checks of members at Ultimate Limit States
(1) For building structures, the requirements of clause 2.3.4 of EC3 concerning static
equilibrium shall be satisfied.
[4.1.1 (6)]
(2) No consideration of temperature effects in verifications for ultimate limit states is

normally necessary for composite structures for buildings.
[4.1.1 (7)]
(3) The effects of shrinkage of concrete may be neglected in verifications for ULS for
composite structures for buildings, except in global analyses with members having crosssections in Qass 4 (4.3 and 4.5.3.3).
[4.1.1 (8)]
(4) The effects of creep of concrete on both global and local analyses may be allowed for in
composite members and frames in building structures by the use of modular ratios. For
slender columns, 4.8.3.6(2) is relevant.
74
[4.1.1 (9)]
(5) For composite members in building structures, a fatigue check is not normally required,
except for:
- members supporting lifting appliances or rolling loads
- members supporting vibrating machinery
- members subject to wind-induced oscillations
- members subject to crowd-induced oscillations.
(6) The following tables define the different checks which shall be fulfilled at Ultimate Limit
States by all the members of frames submitted to internal forces and moments (N, V, M).
Table 1.9
Member submitted to internal forces and bending moments

V
N,compression
M
N,compression
bendiri\V
U ^"bending
- Table 1.10: Definition of the planes of cross-sections within internal forces and
bending moments (Nsd, Vsd, Msd) are acting.
- Table 1.11: For different types of loading on the members (tension, compression,
bending, combined (N,M)) the table 1.11 provides the internal forces,
bending moments ((NCOmPressionX V (Vy, V z ), M (M y , Mz)), and
interactions between them ((V, M), (N, M), (N, V), (N, V, M),...) to be
checked at Ultimate Limit States.
(7) In respective following chapters tables present lists of the checks to be performed at
Ultimate Limit States for members or webs submitted to different loading:
- in chapter IV, Table IV. 1 for member in compression,
- in chapter V, Table V.2 for members in bending,
- in chapter VI, Table VI. 1 for members with combined axial force and bending
moment.
Table 1.10
Planes within internal forces and bending moments (Nsd, Vsd. Msd) are
acting
di
"
y'
Vy.sd | M *-Sd
Nx.Sd
.-f1
V z.Sd
My.Sd
Nx.Sd
Vy.Sd
Vz.Sd
My.Sd
Mz.Sd
axis
xy
xz
xz
xy
75
Table 1.11
Internal forces and bending moments to be checked at ULS for different

types of loading
Internal forces and bending moment
and, interactions between them
Type of loading on
the members
Nx.Sd
Members in
compression
(columns, ...) :
chapter IV
N.compression
sagging
My.Sd
Vz.Sd
Members in bending
(beams, ...) :
chapter V
hogging
My.sd
(VZ , My)
Mv
y-Sd;Mz.sd
Nx.Sd
y '
Members with
combined (N , M)
(beams-columns,...) :
chapter VI
! My.sd
Vz.Sd
(N,M)
(N,My,Mz)
76
(N,V,M)
( , V , M y , M z )
STRUCTURAL CONCEPT OF THE

BUILDING

This chapter intends to list the characteristics of composite buildings concerning the
types of structure, members and joints, the geometry and the material properties.
Recommendations for composite design are also provided. The load arrangements
applied to the building are defined in chapter III.
.1
Structural model
(1) The type of structure, the type of the bracing system and all the different prescriptions of
the project (office building, housing, sport or exhibition hall, parking areas,....) should be
defined.
(2) The geometry of the building should be defined : the height, width and length of the
structure, the number of storeys, the dimensions of architectural elements,...
.2
Non structural elements

All the elements of the building which do not bear any loads have to be considered in the
evaluation of the dead weight loads: walls, claddings, ceilings, coverings,...
.3
Load bearing structure

All the elements which bear the loads should be defined : frames, beams, columns,
bracing system, concrete core, slabs, shear connectors, joints, props, ...
.3.1
Types of columns
There are two main type of composite columns ;

- concrete-encased columns : totally (Figure II. 1 a)) or partially (Figure II. 1 b) and
c)),
- and, concrete-filled columns (Figure II. 1 d) to f)).
This design handbook only deals with the types a), b), d) and e) of composite columns
from Figure ILL
Figure .1 Types of composite columns
79
II.3.2
Ref. 7 [4.1.2]
Types of beams
Composite beams may be of form shown in Figure II.2. Beams are usually of hot-rolled
sections (IPE, HE, UB or UC section). Partial encasement of the steel section provides
increased fire resistance and resistance to buckling.
Shear connectors (see chapter II.3.4) between the slab and beam provide the necessary
longitudinal shear transfer for composite action. The shear connection of the steel beam
to a concrete slab can either be by full or partial shear connection. These different types
of shear connection are considered in chapter V.2.7.
Solid slab
Composite slab
Partially encased steel section
headed studs
transverse reinforcement
J = L ^
4=gZ
profiled steel
sheeting
/solid
slab
j \
I rolled steel section
/welded steel section
Figure .2 Types of composite beams
80
rolled steel section
.3.3
Ref. 7 [4.1.3]
Types of slabs
Slabs are either ( see Figure II. 3) :

- concrete slabs : prefabricated, or cast in situ, or
- composite slabs : profiled steel decking and concrete (see chapter VII).
Slabs are generally continuous but are often designed as a serie of simply supported
elements spanning between the beams.
precast concrete floor
Figure 3
prefabricated slab
Types of composite slabs and concrete slabs
81
II.3.4
Ref.7 [4.1.4]
Types of shear connector
In principal, any type of shear connector is permitted provided it has sufficient resistance
and ductility and prevents uplift. Headed stud shear connectors (see Figure II.4) are in
common use and are the only ones considered in this hanbook; for some other types of
connectors in solid slabs, refer to Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4 : chapter 6) : friction grip bolts,
block connectors (bar connector, T-connector, [-connector. Horseshoe), anchors and
hoops, block connectors with anchors or hoops, angle connectors. Shear connectors
comprising steel angles fixed by shot-fired pins are also in common use, but no
application mies are given in Eurocode 4.
EC4
>l,5d
[3.5.2 (7)]
ead
>0,4d
[6.4.2 (1)]
[6.1.2(1)]
shank
[6.3.2.1]
h > 3 d, generally
h > 4 d for ductile behaviour
[6.4.2 (4)]
-/-
weld collar
mean w > 0,2 d
min w >0,15 d
t > 0,4 d
if studs not directly
located over the web.
ZZZ
Figure H.4
II.3.5
zzzzz
-*
> 1,25 d
Minimum dimensions of headed stud shear connector
Types of joints
Ref.7 [4.1.6] (1) There are many types of joints. Some examples are given in Figure II.5 for beam-tocolumn and beam-to-beam connections. In design to Eurocode 4, the two forms of joints
generally envisaged are nominally pinned or rigid and full strength (see Figure II.5 a
and b). No application mies are given for partial strength connections, in Eurocode 4.
EC4 [4.10.5]
(2)
In Figures II.5 b and c, the joints may be considered to be rigid, but may or may not
develop the full strength of the composite section. In the case of Figure 4.6 c the joint is
pinned in the construction stage, but is made moment resisting by the slab reinforcement
and fitting pieces which transfer the necessary tension and compression forces.
(3) This design handbook only assumes the use of pinned or rigid joints. Semi-rigid joints
are not considered. In the case of semi-rigid joints whose behaviour is between pinned
and rigid joints, the designer should take into account the moment-rotation
characteristics of the joints (moment resistance, rotational stiffness and rotation capacity)
at each step of the design (predesign, global analysis, SLS and ULS checks) when
Eurocode 4 will provide application mies.
(4) The Figure II.6 presents the modelling of joints. The joints may be modelled by nodes
offset from the member centrelines to reflect the actual locations of the connections.
82
-anti-crack reinforcement
^=t
sks

angle-bolt -
L
secondary beam
reinforcement
Nirvi
angle
HL* t
LnU
NlnJri 3
hIr\L!
bolt
secondary beam
partially encased sections
a) Examples of "nominally pinned" joints both in the construction and composite stages
tensile reinforcement
\L0J*:*_
extended end plate
b) Examples of "rigid" and full strength joint
tensile reinforcement '
"I ' "
\/
' 1'
r\J
end plate
stiffener.
fitting pieces
bracket
secondary beam
c) Examples of joint that are "pinned" in the construction stage and "semi-rigid" ("partial strength")
in the composite stage
Figure .5
Examples of joints in composite frames
83
Type of joint
Modelling
Behaviour
M
Mu
RIGID joint
(see Figure II.5 : example b)
SEMI-RIGID joint
(see Figure II.5 : example c)
iL
PINNED joint
(see Figure II.5 : example a)
O
SS555S3
Figure .6
Ref. 7 [2]
II.4
Modelling of joints
Recommendations for composite design
(1) Composite beams comprise I or H section steel beams attached to a "solid" or

"composite" floor slab by use of shear connectors (see Figure II.2). Composite slabs
comprise profiled steel decking which supports the self weight of the wet concrete during
construction and acts as "reinforcement" to the slab during in-service conditions (see
Figure II.3).
(2) Simply-supported composite beams behave as a series of beams in which the concrete
is in compression when subjected to sagging moment and the steel is mainly in tension.
The beams may be designed as simply-supported, or as continuous over a number of
supports. The relative economy of "simple or "continuous" construction depends on
the benefits of reduced section size and depth in relation to the increased complexity of
the design and the connections in continuous construction.
84
(3) Construction methods :

Ref. 7 [4.1.5]
Steel beams and/or profiled steel deckings may be either propped or unpropped during
concreting of the slab in the construction stage of composite building. The most
economic method of construction (speed of construction, ...) is generally to avoid the
use of temporary propping (unpropped construction method). But propping may be
needed where the steel beam and/or the profiled steel decking are not able to support the
weight of a thick concrete slab during construction, or where deflections of those steel
elements would otherwise be unacceptable. The number of temporary supports need not
be high. These props are usually left in place until the concrete slab has developed an
adequate strength.
Ref. 13
Figure II.7 shows the effects of the different construction methods - propped or
unpropped - in principle, and this in comparison with a bare steel beam without any
composite action. The drawing represents bending moments at midspan (M) over
midspan deflections (). MG denotes the bending due to the dead weigth of the structure.
Under service conditions, the different construction methods lead to different deflections,
force distributions and stress states. But when the composite beams of same cross section
are loaded up to failure, they fail at the same bending moment (Mpi.Rd). Their strength is
independent of the method of construction, and this bending strength can be calculated
easily on the basis of on rectangular stress block, as demonstrated in chapter V.2.5.1.
There is another reason for different strain and stress distributions and deflections under
service conditions : the longterm behaviour of concrete. Both, creep and shrinkage of the
concrete part yields larger strains and stresses in the steel section under service
conditions. At the ultimate limit state, however, strains due to loadings are much larger
than the strains due to creep and shrinkage, and the latter can be neglected.
Figure .7
Ref. 7 [2]
Effects of propped and unpropped construction
(4) The following recommendations are made for initial sizing of composite beams. It is
important to recognize the difference between secondary beams which directly support
the decking and composite slab and primary beams which support the secondary beams
as point loads. Primary beams usually receive greater loads than secondary beams and
therefore are usually designed to span a shorter distance for the same beam size.
Alternatively, long span primary beams, such as composite trusses, can be designed
efficiently with short span secondary beams. These cases are illustrated in Figure II.8.
85
(5) General features for composite slab :

Slab depth :
typically 120 mm to 180 mm depending

resistance, structural and other requirements.
Slab span :
2,5 m to 3,5 m, if unpropped steel decking,
on
fire
3,5 m to 5,5 m, if propped steel decking,

with maximum slab span : slab depth ratio (L / (h p + h c )
of 32 for a simply-supported slab (see chapter VII for
further guidance).
(6) General features for composite beams :
Grid sizes :
primary and secondary beams can be designed for

approximately the same depth when grid dimensions are
in proportion of 1 : 1,5 respectively.
Beam design :
The following beam proportions should give acceptable deflections when the
section size is determined for moment resistance. The ratios (span : depth ratio)
can be expressed as (L / (h a + hp + h c )) where L is the distance between adjacent
supports and (h a + h p + he) is the total beam and slab depth.
a) Simply supported beam :
. Secondary beam : span : depth ratio of 18 to 20,
. Primary beam :
span : depth ratio of 15 to 18.
b) Continuous beam :
. Secondary beam
span : depth ratio of 22 to 25 (end bays),
. Primary beam :
span : depth ratio of 18 to 22.
Steel grade :
higher grade steel (S 355) usually leads to smaller beam

sizes than lower grade steel (S 235 or S 275).
Concrete grade:
C 25/30 for composite beams.
Shear connectors :
. 19 mm diameter welded stud connectors are placed

typically at 150 mm spacing. These headed studs can be
welded through the profiled steel decking up to 1,25 mm
thick;
. 22 mm diameter welded stud connectors with throughdeck welding are not used.
86
^k
Secondary beam
Column
Span of slab
5-8m
Primary beam
A
^k
6- 12m-
7C
^c
Secondary beam
J
Span of slab
Primary beam
7,5- 12 m
f
-V
2,5 - 4 m
1~^
8-12m-
?'-
V-
Primary beam
JL.
VH
Column
^H
Spanof
slab
6-8m
Secondary
beam
i-H-
12- 18m-
7^
Figure .8
Framing plans for medium and long span beams
87
II.5
Material properties
EC4 [3]
The material properties given in this chapter II.5 are those required for design purposes.
Partial safety factors for resistance and material properties are also provided.
II.5.1
Concrete
EC4
[3.1.2(2)] (1) Normal-weight and lightweight concretes may be used. Table II. 1 gives properties of
normal-weight concrete. The classification of concrete, e.g. C20/25, refers to cylinder
strength (20) and cube strength (25) of concrete.
EC4
[3.1.2 (3)] (2) For lightweight concretes, tensile strengths (fctm; fctk 0,05^ fctk 0,95) c a n
multiplying the values provided in Table II. 1 by the factor :
= 0,30+ 0,70 (
U400
EC4
[3.1.4.1 (3)]
De
obtained by
, where is the oven-dry unit mass in kg/ni3.
In the same way, the secant moduli ^m for light-weight concretes can be obtained by
multiplying the values given in Table II. 1 by the factor :
EC4
[3.1.1 (2)] (3) Concrete classes higher than C50/60 should not be used unless their use is appropriately
justified. No Application Rules are given in Eurocode 4 for this case.
Table .1
Concrete classes and characteristic values for compression and tension
Strength class
of concrete
fck
N/mm2
fctm
N/mm2
fctk 0,05
N/mm2
fctk 0,95
N/mm2
Ecm
kN/mm2
C20/25
20
2,2
1,5
2,9
29,0
C25/30
25
2,6
1,8
3,3
30,5
C30/37
30
2,9
2,0
3,8
32,0
C35/45
35
3,2
2,2
4,2
33,5
C40/50
40
3,5
2,5
4,6
35,0
C45/55
45
3,8
2,7
4,9
36,0
C50/60
50
4,1
2,9
5,3
37,0
Notations : fck
is the characteristic compressive cylinder strength measured

at age 28 days,
fctm
is the mean tensile strength,
fctk 0,05
is the lower value of the characteristic tensili strength

(fractile 5%),
fctk 0,95
is the upper value of the characteristic tensil ; strength

(fractile 95%),
is the mean secant modulus of elasticity for s hort term

loading.
88
EC4 [3.1.3] (4) For shrinkage of concrete, the total long-term free shrinkage strain from setting of the
concrete e c s may be taken as nominal values of Table II.2.
Table .2
Nominal values of shrinkage strain eCs

cs
for normal-weight
concrete
Conditions
Dry environments
(filled members excluded)
Other environments and
filled members
EC4
[3.1.4.2]
for lightweight
concrete
325 10"6
500 IO"6
200 10"6
300 IO"6
(5) Modular ratios :

For the design of braced composite buildings, it is accurate enough to take account of
creep by replacing in analyses concrete areas A c by effective equivalent steel areas equal
to /, where is the nominal modular ratio (see Table II.3) defined by :
-Ea,
where E a
E'
EC4
[3.1.4.2 (4)]
is the elastic modulus of structural steel (see Table II.7),

is an "effective" modulus of concrete defined as follows :
a)
in most structures for composite buildings, for both

short-term and long-term effects : L c L c m
in buildings mainly intended for storage
b)
for short-term effects: F = F

for long-term effects: E = E
/3
where E c m is the mean secant modulus for short-term

loading, depending on the strength class of
concrete (see Table II. 1).
Table .3
E
Values of nominal modular ratios - a ,
'cj
Strength Class C
~"~~~-\^^
of concrete
Type
^ \ _ ^
C20/25 C25/30 C30/37 C35/45 C40/50 C45/55 C50/60
of buildings
^~-~^^
Composite buildings in general :
for short-term
14,5
13,1
12,5
12,0
11,7
13,8
11,4
and long-term effects
Composite buildings for storage :
7,2
6,0
6,9
6,6
6,3
5,8
5,7
for short-term effects
for long-term effects
21,7
20,7
89
19,7
18,8
18,0
17,5
17,0
(6) The material coefficient (p c , Ofr. v c ) to be adopted in calculations for concrete shall be
taken as given in Table II.4.
Table .4
EC4
[3.1.6]
Design values of material coefficient for concrete
density for normal-weight concrete

:
coefficient of linear thermal expansion
for normal-weight concrete :
= 10 10"6 1/C
- for lightweight concrete

:
Poisson's ratio :
- in general, for elastic strains :
- for concrete in tension
assumed to be cracked
:
= 7 10"6 1/C
EC4
[3.1.4.3]
EC4 [3.3]
II.5.2
pc = 2400 kg/m3
VC = 0,2
vc = 0
Structural steel
(1) The nominal values of the yield strength fy and the ultimate strength fu for hot-rolled
steel are given in Table II.5 for steel grades S 235, S 275 and S 355 in accordance with
EN 10025 and for steel grades S 275 and S 355 in accordance with EN 10113. Those
nominal values may be adopted as characteristic (unfactored) values in design
calculations.
(2) The european standard EN 10025 specifies the requirements for long and flat products
of hot rolled weldable non-alloy structural steels (steel grades: S 235, S 275, S 355).
The european standard EN 10113 specifies the requirements for long and flat products
of hot-rolled weldable fine grain structural steels (steel grades: S 275, S 355, S 420, S
460).
(3) Similar values as defined in Table II.5 may be adopted for hot finished structural hollow
sections.
(4) For a larger range of thicknesses the values specified in EN 10025 and EN 10113 may
be used.
(5) For high strength steels (S 420 and S 460) specific application rules are not available yet
but will be given in the further normative Annex H (in preparation) of Eurocode 4. At
present clause 3.2.1 (2) of Eurocode 3 (Ref. 3) is applicable for those high strength
steels.
90
Table .5
Nominal values of yield strength fy and ultimate tensile strength for

structural steels according to EN 10025 and EN 10113
Nominal steel grade

t < 40 mm
Thickness t (mm)*)
40 mm < t < 100 mm**)
EN 10027-1
Designation
EN 10025
Standard
fy (N/mm2)
fu (N/mm2)
fy (N/mm 2 )
fu (N/mm 2 )
S 235
S 275
S 355
Fe 360
Fe 430
Fe 510
235
275
355
360
430
510
215
255
335
340
410
490
275
355
390
490
255
335
370
470
EN 10113
Standard
FeE 275
FeE 355
S 275
S 355
Notes:
*)
t is the nominal thickness of the element :

- of the flange of rolled sections (t = tf)
- of the particular elements of the welded sections
**) the condition 40 mm < t < 63 mm should be taken for
plates and other flat products in steels of delivery
condition TM to EN 10113-3.
(6) The Table II.6 compares the symbolic designations of steel grades according to various
standards. The design handbook always uses the single designation of structural steels
defined by the european standard EN 10027-1: "S" followed by the value of yield
strength expressed in N/mm2 (= MPa).
Table .6
EC4
[3.3.3]
Comparison table of different steel grades designation
EN
EN
EN
10027-1
10113
10025
S 235
S 275
S 355
FeE 275
FeE 355
Fe 360
Fe 430
Fe 510
NF A 35-504/
NF A 36-201
E 355
NF A
DIN
DIN
BS
35-501
17102
17100
4360
E 24
E 28
E 36
St E 285
St E 355
St 37-3
St44-3
St 52-3
40 D
43 D
5 OD
ASTM
gr. 50
(7) The material coefficients (Ea, Ga, Ctr, p a . va) to be adopted in calculations for the
structural steels covered by Eurocode 4 shall be taken as given in Table II.7.
Table H.7
Design values of material coefficients for steel
. modulus of elasticity
(E = Ea = Es)
shear modulus G = (G = Ga = Gs)

2(1 + v%
. coefficient of linear thermal expansion
. density
(p = p a = ps)
. Poisson's ratio
(v = v a = vs)
91
E=
210 000
N/mm 2
G=
80700
N/mm 2
OCT =
10 IO' 6
ire
P=
v=
7850
kg/m 3
0,3
EC4 [3.2]
II.5.3
Reinforcing stee!
(1) In reference to EN 10 080 specification, different types of reinforcing steels are covered
by Eurocode 4, with differences :
high ductility (class H) or normal
class (class N),
plain smooth bars or ribbed bars or
wires (including welded mesh).
according to ductility characteristics

according to surface characteristics
[Ref. 12]
(2) Eurocode 2 (Ref. 2) gives 3 different classes for reinforcing steel (see Table II.8).
Table .8
Yiedl strength fsk for reinforcing steel
Reinforcing steel grades

fsk
[N/mm2]
S 220
S 420
S 500
220
420
500
(3) The material coefficients (Es, Gs, , ps, vs) to be adopted in calculations for reinforcing
steels are presented in Table II.7.
EC4 [3.4]
II.5.4
Profiled steel decking for composite slabs
Ref. 7 [4.2.4]( 1 ) Composite slabs are dealt in this handbook only as far as they affect the design of
composite beams. Reference should be made to Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4 : chapter 3.4 and 7)
for further information on the design of composite slabs, with EN 10 147 as the product
standard for steel sheeting.
EC4
[3.4.2 (2)] (2) The nominal values of fyb provided in Table II.9 may be adopted as characteristic values
fyp in calculations.
Table .9
Yield strength of basic material fyb for steel sheeting

Standard
EC4
[Table 3.4]
Grade
fyb (= fyp)
[N/mm2]
220
FeE 220 G
250
FeE 250 G
280
FeE 280 G
FeE 320 G
320
350
FeE 350 G
r
Other standards and related fyb values are gi\ en in Eurocode 4
EN 10 147
92
EC4 [3.5]
EC4
[3.5.1 (2)]
EC4
[3.5.2]
.5.5
Connecting devices
(1) For connecting devices (bolts, rivets, pins, welds) other than shear connectors chapter 3.3
of Eurocode 3 (Ref. 3) is applicable.
(2) Shear connectors :
As explained in chapter II.3.4 this design handbook only provides application rules for
headed studs with minimum dimensions detailed in Figure II.4.
The specified ultimate tensile strength of headed studs is commonly
fu =450 N/mm2
.6
Partial safety factors for resistances and material properties at ULS
(1) In general resistance is determined by using design values of strength of the different
materials and components, Xd, that takes into account uncertainties at ULS with partial
safety factors JM- The different JM factors are explicitly introduced in design formulas
of this handbook.
EC4
[4.8.3.2]
(2) The design of composite columns according to the simplified method is presented in
chapter IV (Members in compression) and in chapter VI (Members with combined axial
force and bending moment). In that case, the partial safety factor for structural steel is
written as jMa and, in general, may have one of the 2 following values :
a) for column length with relative slendemess < 0 , 2 or
YMa =Ya
where Nx.sd
x.Sd
Nr
<0,1
is m e applied design axial load,
and N c r
are defined in clause IV. 3 (4) and, if relevant, by additional

comments in clauses VI. 1.2 (1) and (2),
b) otherwise, columns are influenced by buckling :
YMa -YRd
(3) Recommended values of partial safety factors for fundamental load combinations are
given in Table 11.10. Improved values of YM factors may be obtained in case of
accidental load combinations : refer to Eurocode 4 (Ref.4 : 2.3.3.2).
93
(4) The YM factors shown in Table 11.10 are provided according to the present official
version of Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4). Those "boxed" values are only indicative. The values of
YM factors to be used in practice are fixed by national authorities in each country and are
published in the relevant National Application Document (NAD) to Eurocode 4.
(5) Values of YM factors for bolts, rivets, pins, welds and slip resistance of bolted connections
are given in Eurocode 3 (Ref. 3 : 6.1.1 (2)).
Table .10 Partial safety factors YM for resistances and material properties at Ultimate
Limit State
- Resistance of structural steel :
. Ya is equivalent to YMO of Eurocode 3
YRd is equivalent to YMI of Eurocode 3

(if buckling of structural steel)
YMa = Ya or YRd (see clause II.6 (2))
- Resistance of concrete
Ya = U 0
yRd=U0
Yc = l , 5 0
- Resistance of reinforcement steel
Ys = l , 1 5
- Resistance of profiled steel decking
Yap = 1 , 1 0
- Resistance of shear connectors and longitudinal shear in slabs :
Yv = l , 2 5
94
III LOAD ARRANGEMENTS

LOAD CASES
AND
EC4
[2.2.5 (l)]
[2.2.5 (2)]
D
LOA
ARRANGEMENTS AND LOAD CASES
.1
Generalities
(1) A load arrangement identifies the position, magnitude and direction of a free action (see
chapter III.2).
(2) A load case identifies compatible load arrangements, set of deformations
imperfections considered for a particular verification (see chapter III.3).
and
(3) For the definitions of actions (load arrangements: F= G, Q, ...) and effects of actions (E,
S) and for the design requirements it should be referred to chapter 1.2 (B asis of design).
(4) Figure III. 1 presents the general procedure to study structures submitted to actions :
- all load cases are defined by relevant combinations (with partial safety factors, )
of characteristic (unfactored) values of load arrangements (Fk),
- for each load case the global analysis of the structure determines the design values
for the effects of actions (Ed = o v , oh, f, ,... ; Sd = , V, M,...) which shall be
checked at Serviceability Limit States (Cd limits) and at Ultimate Limit States (Rd
resistances).
This general procedure is used in the procedure for elastic global analysis of composite
braced frame presented in chapter 1.3.
(5) For braced buildings it is explained in chapter 1.3 that the elastic global analysis of the
structure could be based on first order theory. In that case of first order elastic global
analysis the principle of superposition is applicable because the effects of actions (E, S)
are linear functions of the applied actions (F = G, Q, ...) (no - effects and used
material with an elastic linear behaviour).
The principle of superposition allows to consider a particular procedure to study
structures submitted to actions. This procedure illustrated in Figure III.2 could be more
practical because it should simplify the decision of which load case gives the worst effect.
For each single characteristic (unfactored) value of load arrangement (Fk) the global
analysis of the structure determines characteristic (unfactored) values for the effects of
actions :
- Ek = ( , h, f, G,...)k
- S k = (, V, M,...)k.
All load cases are defined by relevant combinations (with partial safety factors, Jp) of the
characteristic (unfactored) values for the effects of actions (EK;Sk). All these load cases
directly furnish the design values for the effects of actions (E - b\, oh, f, ... ; S = ,
V, M,...) which shall be checked at Serviceability Limit States (C limits) and at Ultimate
Limit States (Rd resistances).
EC4
[2.2.1.2(2)] (6) For composite structures attention is drawn to the necessity of identifying and
considering, when relevant, several transient design situations corresponding to the
successive phases of the building process. The sequence of construction has to be
considered especially for composite beams where steel profiles have first to support the
selfweight of fresh concrete slab and other construction loads before the concrete has
gained adequate strength for composite action.
97
Two main stages may be considered with different load arrangements :

a) the construction stage and,
b) the composite stage .
But more specific transient design situations may be taken into acount : for example, at
construction stage, it may be necessary not only to consider the situation of the steel
beam supporting the fresh concrete, but even to distinguish several situations
corresponding to successive phases of pouring the concrete.
rows:
rows:
1
Determine all load arrangements with characteristic (unfactored) values of actions Fk (Gk, Qk,...)
Determine all ULS load cases with relevant

ULS combinations of load arrangements (Fk)
(with partial safety factors 7F = , ,...)
Determine all SLS load cases with relevant

SLS combinations of load arrangements (Fk)
All ULS load cases

analysed ?
All SLS load cases

analysed ?
ULS checks
SLS checks
yes
ji
yes
Classification of the frame

braced frame
Global analysis of the structure submitted

to the considered load case in order to
determine the design values for the ULS effects of
actions: Sd = N, V, M,...
Global analysis of the structure submitted

to the considered load case in order to determine
the design values for the SLS
effects of actions:
Ed = oh, , f, ,...
V
,
y
Determine SLS limits (Cd)
Select stronger section(s) or joint(s)

10
J, Adopt the structure if both ULS and SLS checks are fulfilled
>
10
Note: for the definition of Fk (Gk, Qk), (, YQ), Sd. Rd, Ed, Cd : see chapter 1.2 (Basis of design).
Figure ULI Flow-chart for load arrangements and load cases for general global analysis of the
structure
98
Determine all load arrangements with characteristic (unfactored) values of actions Fk (Gk, Qk,...) j
yes
( All load arrangements

analysed ?
Global analysis of the structure submitted to the considered single

load arrangement (Fk) in order to determine characteristic
(unfactored) values for the effects of actions :
- for ULS checks: Sk = (N, V, M ...)k
- for SLS checks: Ek = (oh, , f, , ...)k
ULS checks
SLS checks
Determine all ULS load cases with relevant

ULS combinations of effects of actions (Sk)
(with partial safety factors = >,...)
Determine all SLS load cases with relevant

SLS combinations of effects of actions (Ek)
Design values for the effects of actions:
zxz
Sd = N, V, M,...
Design values for the effects of actions:

Ed = oh, , f, ,...
J
yes/'
AU ULS load cases V "

analysed?
All SLS load casesN

analysed?
no
Classification of frame:
braced frame
Determine SLS limits (Cd)
Determine ULS resistances (Rd)
10
11
12
yes
Adopt the structure if both

ULS and SLS checks are fulfilled
Select stronger section(s) or joint(s) j Note: for the definition of Fk (Gk, Qk), yF (ya, _), Sd, Rd, Ed, Cd : see chapter 1.2 (Basis of design)
Figure m.2 Flow-chart for load arrangements and load cases for first order elastic global analysis of
the structure
99
mj
Load arrangements
(1) The following load arrangements are characteristic (unfactored) values of actions (Fk) to
be applied to the structure. The characteristic values of load arrangements given hereafter
are issued from Eurocode 1 (Ref. 1).
(2) The table ULI provides a list of
- all the load arrangements (Fk) to be taken into account in composite building
design, either at construction stage, or at composite stage, and,
- the references to the chapters of the handbook where details are given about those
load arrangements.
Table ULI
Load arrangements Fk for composite building design according to

Eurocodes 1 & 4
Load arrangements (Fk) at construction stage or at composite stage

1) Permanent loads:
distributed, g
concentrated, G
Reference to the
handbook
III.2.1
2) Variable loads:
EC4
[2.2.5(5)]
- Imposed loads on floors and roof: distributed, q

concentrated, Q
- Wind loads:
wind pressure, we,i
wind force, F w
III.2.2.1
III ? ? 1
III.2.2.2
III.2.2.2
- Snow loads:
III.2.2.3
distributed, s
(3) For continuous beams and slabs in buildings without cantilevers subjected to dominantly
uniformly loads, it will generally be sufficient to consider only the following load
arrangements:
a) altemate spans carrying the design variable and permanent loads (YQ qk + YG gk)>
other spans carrying only the design permanent load gk :
A
B
C
D
E
-> This load arrangement produces higher sagging bending moments and deflections
in spans AB and CD.
100
b) any two adjacent spans carrying the design variable and permanent loads (YQ qk +
YG gk). all other spans carrying only the design permanent load YG gk
' ' ' *
'rv/
TTT7
trn/
-> This load arrangement furnishes higher hogging bending moment at support B.
.2.1
ECl-l
[1.5.3.3]
Permanent loads (g and G)
(1) In general permanent loads are actions which are likely to act throughout a given design
situation and for which the variation in magnitude with time is negligible in relation to
the mean value (e.g. dead weight), or for which the variation is always in the same
direction until the action attains a certain limit value.
(2) At construction stage, permanent loads should be limited to dead weight of steel profiles,
whereas at composite stage, they could include dead weight of steel profiles, concrete and
steel decking, additional dead weight due to "ponding" of the concrete and service
permanent loads.
.2.2
ECl-l
[1.5.3.4]
Variable loads (q, Q, w and s)
(1) Variable loads are actions which are unlikely to act throughout a given design situation
or for which the variation in magnitude with time is not negligible in relation to the mean
value nor monotonie.
101
ni.2.2.1 Imposed loads on floors and roof (q and Q)

EC4
[7.3.2.1(1)] (1) At construction stage, variable imposed loads could be taken as :
- dead weight of concrete and steel decking,
- additional dead weight due to the "ponding" effect (increased depth of concrete
due to deflection of the beam or sheet decking),
- construction loads including local heaping of concrete during construction,
- storage (if any).
About construction loads, Eurocode 4 gives no specific guidance regarding their
magnitude for the design of steel beams, but provides values for the design of profiled
steel decking. Then to remain consistent it should be convenient to consider an imposed
characteristic construction load of 0,75 kN/m2 for the design of a steel beam. For the
design of profiled steel decking Eurocode 4 proposes the following mies :
EC4
[7.3.2.1(2)]
The construction loads represent the weight of operatives and concreting plant and take
into account any impact or vibration which may occur during construction. In any area
of 3m by 3m (or the span length, is less), in addition to the weight of the concrete, the
characteristic construction load and weight of surplus concrete (due to "ponding"
effect) should together be taken as 1,5 kN/m2. Over the remaining area a characteristic
loading of 0,75 kN/m2 should be added to the weight of the concrete. These loads should
be placed to cause the maximum bending moment and/or shear (see Figure HI.3).
H 1
I \ .<b>, 1 1 I 1 1 i(b)i ,
- - 1 1 1 1(c)! , .
tr
L 3m
"
I , Z}
for greater moment in midspan

11
.. -.
1 1 IH 1
. . M i l l i , <b)l
\ 1 \
" * * .'
3m
for greater moment over support

Loading :
(a) concentration of construction load : 1,5 kN/m2
(b) distributed construction load : 0,75 kN/m2
(c) dead weight
Figure .3 Constmction loads on profiled steel decking
102
<H>
ECl-2-1
[6.3.1.1]
(2) At composite stage, areas in residential, social, commercial and administration buildings
are divided into five categories according to their specific use (see Table III.2).
[Table 6.1]
Table .2
Categories of building areas, traffic areas in buildings and roofs

Example
Categories
Specific use
Areas for domestic and residential

activities.
Office areas
Rooms in residential buildings and houses;

rooms and wards in hospitals; bedrooms in
hotels and hostels; kitchens and toilets
Areas where people may congrete CI: Areas with tables, etc.
e.g. areas in schools, cafs, restaurants,
(with the exception of areas
dinning halls, reading rooms, receptions
defined under category A, B, D
etc.
and E)
C2: Areas with fixed seats,
e.g. areas in churches, theatres or
cinemas, conferences rooms, lecture
halls, assembly halls, waiting rooms, etc.
C3: Areas without obstacles for moving
people,
e.g. areas in museums, exhibition
rooms, etc and access areas in public
and administration buildings, hotels, etc.
C4: Areas with possible physical activities
e.g. danse halls, gymnastic rooms,
stages, etc.
C5: Areas susceptible to overcrowding,
e.g. in building for public events like
concert halls, sport halls including
stands, terraces and access areas, etc.
Dl: Areas in general retail shops,

e.g. areas in warehouses, stationery and
office stores, etc.
Shopping areas
Areas for storage use including librairies.

Areas susceptible to accumulation The loads defined in Table III.3 shall be
of goods, including access areas
taken as minimum loads unless more
appropriate loads are defined for the specific
case.
Traffic and parking areas for light e.g. garages; parking areas, parking halls
vehicles. (< 30kN total weight and
< 8 seats not including driver)
Traffic and parking areas for e.g. access routes; delivery zones; zones
medium vehicles. (> 30 kN, < 160 accessible to fire engines (< 160 kN total
kN total weight, on 2 axles)
weight)
Roofs not accessible except for

normal
maintenance,
repair,
painting and minor repairs.
Roofs accessible with occupancy

according to categories A-G
Roofs accessible for

special
services, such
as helicopter
landings
103
[Table 6.2]
(3) At composite stage, the values of characteristic imposed loads on floors and roof are
given in Table III.3 according to the category of areas and the loaded areas (see Table
III.2).
Table .3
Imposed load (qk, Qk) on floors in buildings depending on categories of

loaded areas
q k (kN/m2)
Qk (kN)
2,0
2,0
- stairs
3,0
2,0
- balconies
4,0
2,0
3,0
2,0
- CI
3,0
4,0
-C2
4,0
4,0
-C3
5,0
4,0
-C4
5,0
7,0
-C5
5,0
4,0
Category D: - Dl
5.0
4,0
- D2
5,0
7,0
Category E:
6,0
7,0
Category F:
2,0
10
Category G:
5,0
45
Category H: roof slope < 20
0,75*
1,5
>40
0,00*
1,5
Category I:
A-G
A-G
Category J:
Specific use
Specific use
Loaded areas
Category A: - general
Category B:
Category C:
For slopes between 20 and 40 the value of qk may be determined by linear

interpolation
III.2.2.2
EC 1-2-4
[6.1 (l)]
Wind loads (w e ,i, F w )
(1) The wind forces acting on a structure or a structural component may be determined in
two ways:
-
as a summation of pressures acting on surfaces provided that the structure or the

structural component is not sensitive to dynamic response (cd < 1,2),
- or, by means of global forces.
104
EC 1-2-4
[9.2 (1)]
(2) It is proposed in this handbook to present the simple procedure which may be used for
buildings less than 200 m tall provided that the value of Cd is less than 1,2. For values of
dynamic factor Cd : see figure III.4. In all other cases the detailed method of Eurocode 1,
(Ref. 1: Part 2-4 Annex B) may be used.
200
150
not of
practical
interest
100
41
50 -
Heigth
h [m]
1
%/
5y
30 -
20 -
10
Breadth b [m]
10
20
50
100
Values of parameters used :

(Vref = 28 m/s; terrain roughness category I)
Figure .4 Values of dynamic factor Cd for composite buildings
m.2.2.2.1
ECl-2-4
[5.4 (1)]
Wind pressure (we,)
(1) The net wind pressure across a wall or an element is the difference of the pressures on
each surface taking due account of their signs (Pressure, directed towards the surface is
taken as positive, and suction, directed away from the surface as negative): see Figure
III.5.
mu .
-*-*-
Internal pressure
:
GC
i.
Internal pressure "*"
Figure .5 Pressures on surfaces

(2) The wind pressure acting on:
EC 1-2-4
[5.2 (l)]
a) the external surfaces of a structure, we, shall be obtained from:

w
fform. 5.11
e =Qref C e ( z e ) C pe
105
GC
EC 1-2-4
[5.3]
[form. 5.2]
[7.1 (1)]
b) the internal surfaces of a structure, w, shall be obtained from:

wi
= c
Iref
e(zi)cpi
where %
is the reference mean wind pressure detemiined from:

2
qref=-V r e f
[form. (7.1)]
where
vref
is the air density (generally = 1,25 kg/m3)

is the reference wind velocity taken as follows :
v
[form. (7.2)]
ref = C D I R
TEM
ALT
ref,0
where vrefo
is the basic value of the reference wind velocity at

sea level given by the wind maps of the countries
(Annex 6.A of Eurocode 1).
COIR
is the direction factor to be taken as 1,0 unless

otherwise specified in the wind maps.
CTEM is the temporary (seasonal) factor to be taken as

1,0 unless otherwise specified in the wind maps.
CALT is the altitude factor to be taken as 1,0 unless
otherwise specified in the wind maps.
where
c e (z e )
is the exposure coefficient for = z e is defined by:

7k
T
c e ( z e ) = c2(z)c l : (z) 1 + c r (z)c t (z)
[form. (8.6)]
where kr, Cj (z), ct (z) are given for more details in Eurocode 1
(Ref. 1 : Part 2-4, section 8)
For flat terrain (i.e. upwind slope < 5% in the wind direction) ,
ct =1,0. For such conditions the exposure coefficient c e is given
in the Table III.4.
[10.2]
where
cpe
is the external pressure coefficient which depends on the size of

the effected area A and the shape of the building (see Table
III.5).
where
ze
is the reference height appropriate to the relevant pressure

coefficient (see Figure HI. 6).
Buildings whose height h is greater than 2b shall be considered
to be in multiple parts, comprising: a lower part extending
upwards from the ground by a height equal to b for which z e =
b; and a middle region, between the upper and lower parts,
divided into as many horizontal strips as desired and for which
z e is the height of the top of each strip.
[10.2.2 (1) (c)]
[10.2.9]
and where c Pi
is the internal pressure coefficient. For a homogeneous

distribution of openings the value cp = - 0,25 shall be used.
Else the coefficient is given in Figure HI.7 and is a function of
the opening ratio , which is defined as :
=
X area of opening at the leeward and wind parallel sides

X area of opening at the windward, leeward and wind parallel sides
106
Table .4
EC 1-2-4
[Table 8.1]
Exposure coefficient c e as a function of height above ground
Terrain Category:
I
Rough open sea, lake shores with at least 5 km fetch upwind and smooth flat
country without obstacles.
II
Farmland with boundary hedges, occasional small farm structures, houses or trees.
III Suburban or industrial areas and permanent forests.

IV Urban areas in which at least 15% of the surface is covered with buildings and their
average height exceeds 15 m.
EC 1-2-4
[Fig. 8.3]
z [m]
1000
HI
200
100 4-
10-
Ce (z)
+
ECl-2-4, [Fig. 10.2.2]
rimiro TTT fy TipfpTpncp hpjpht 7 d e n e n d i n g on h and b
107
Table .5
External pressure Cpe for verticals walls of rectangular plan buildings
EC 1-2-4
[Fig. 10.2.3]
.e/5.
Wind
Wind
Case : d > e = min (b ; 2 h)
- D
e/5
Case : d < e = min (b ; 2 h)
EC 1-2-4
[Table 10.2.1]
[Fig. 10.2.1]
Zone
A, A*
, *
1,3
1,0
Effected area [m T
< 1 m 2
1 2<<10 m 2 : d/h < 1
d/h<4
0,5
-1,3+ 0,3 login -1,0+ 0,2 login

-0,8
1,0
> 10 m 2
+ 1,0
1,0-0,2 login
0,5
1,0-0,4 login-3
+ 0,8/+0,6
0,5
0,3
0,3
0,3
Note: For different shapes of the buildings, the values of c p e are given in the section 10
of Eurocode 1 (Ref. 1: Part 2-4).
ECl-2-4 [Fig. 10.2.11]
C;
0,8
0,5
0
-0,25
-0,5
() 0,1
0,5
0,75 0,9 ]
Figure m.7 Internal pressure coefficient cm for buildings with openings in the wall
108
III.2.2.2.2
EC 1-2-4
[6.1(6)]
Wind force (F w )
(1) The global force, F w , shall be obtained form the following expression:
[form.(6.1)]
w =Qref C e ( z e ) C d
where
.2.2.3
ref
q re f
is the reference mean wind pressure (see III.2.2.2.1),
c e (z e )
is the exposure coefficient for = z e (see III.2.2.2.1),
ze
is the reference height appropriate to the relevant pressure

coefficient (see III.2.2.2.1),
Cfj
is the dynamic factor (see III.2.2.2.1),
Cf
is the force coefficient derived from Eurocode 1 (Ref. 1 : Part

2-4 section 10) if available,
A re f
is the reference area for cf derived from Eurocode 1 (Ref. 1 :

Part 2-4 section 10).
Snow loads (s)
(1) The snow loads on a roof are given by:

EC 1-2-3
[Form. (5.1)]
s = Pj C e c t s kl
where
is the snow load shape coefficient
Sk
is the characteristic value of the snow load on the ground

(kN/mm 2 )
is the exposure coefficient, which usually has the value 1,0
Ct
is the thermal coefficient, which usually has the value 1,0
109
III.3
Load cases
(1) The following load cases are related to the general procedure to study structures
submitted to actions (see Figure III. 1 and clause III. 1 (4)): all load cases are defined by
relevant combinations (with partial safety factor, ) of characteristic (unfactored) values
of load arrangements (Fk).
EC4
[2.3.2.2 (l)]
For each load case, design values for the effects of actions (Ed, Sd) shall be determined
from global analysis of the structure submitted to the design values of actions (Fd = 7F
Fk) involved by combination mies as given :
- in Table III.6, for Serviceability Limit States,
- in Table III.7 and Table III.8, for Ultimate Limit States.
(2) In the case of the particular procedure defined in Figure III.2 (see also clause III. 1 (5)),
the characteristic (unfactored) values for the effects of actions (Ek, Sk) are obtained
from global analysis of the structure submitted to each single characteristic (unfactored)
value of load arrangement (Fk).
For each load case, design values for the effects of actions (Ed, Sd) shall be detemiined
from combination rules (with partial safety factor, ) defined in Tables III.6 to III.8
where values of load arrangements (Fk = Gk, Qk, g, q, s, w, P) are replaced by the
characteristic values for the effects of actions (Ek = (V, , f, a,...)k ; Sk = (N, V,
M,...)k).
For instance, in the case of the third example in Table III.8, the general load case 1. (1,35
gk + 1,50 wk) should be replaced by the following particular load case 1. considering the
elements or the cross-sections with :
their worst effects of actions (for columns: axial force (N)k; for beams: shear force
(V)k and bending moment (M)k) and,
their worst combined effects of actions (for beam-columns: (N)k + (M)k ; ...):
- max = 1,35 (N)k(due to gk) + 1,50 (N)k.max(due to wk),
- max V = 1,35 (V)k(due to gk) + 1,50 (V)k.max(due to W k ),
- max M = 1,35 (M)k(due to gk) + 1,50 (M)k.max(due to wk),
- max + associated M,
- max M + associated N, ...
(3) In the following chapters III.3.1 and III.3.2, the proposed combinations of actions are
simplifications adapted to building structures : for SLS, see Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4: 2.3.4
(5)) and for ULS, see Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4: 2.3.3.1 (6)).
(4) If the limitations imposed at SLS and at ULS meet difficulties to be respected, more
favourable combinations of actions could be used instead of the respective simplified
proposals of Table III.6 (then refer to [2.3.4 (2)] of Eurocode 4) or Tables III.7 and
III.8 (then refer to [2.3.2.2(2)] of Eurocode 4).
110
.3.1
Load cases for serviceability limit states
Table .6
Ref. 6
Table 2.3
EC4
[2.3.4 (5)]
Combinations of actions for serviceability limit states

Gk -
Load combinations to be considered:

with only the most unfavourable
(Qk.max) '
1.
variable
actions
Qk -
EGk+Qk.max
Qk.max -
with all unfavourable variable actions (Qk):

2.
IGk+0,9IQk
permanent actions,
e.g. self weight
variable
actions,
e.g. imposed loads
on floors, snow
loads, wind loads
the variable action
which causes the
largest effect
The load combination which gives the largest effect (i.e. deformations, deflections) is decisive
Load cases for ultimate limit states
.3.2
Table .7
Ref. 6
Table 2.1
EC4
[2.3.3.1(6)]
Combinations of actions for ultimate limit state
Load combinations to be considered:

with only
(Qk.max) :
the
most
unfavourable
variable
Gk -
permanent
actions
e.g. self weight.
Qk -
variable
actions,
e.g. imposed loads
on floors, snow
load, wind loads.
actions
I G k + T Q Qk.max
1.
1,35* I G k +1,50** Q k . m a x
with all unfavourable variable actions (Qk):
Qk.max - the variable action

which causes the
largest effect.
Yc-IGk+0,9YQ XQk
2.
1,35 G k + l , 3 5
Qk
If the dead load G counteracts the variable action Q

(meaning a favourable effect of G) : J Q =1,00
wind load Q
dead load G
* * If the variable load Q counteracts the dominant loading
(meaning a favourable effect of Q) :
YG -
partial safety factor

for
permanent
actions.
YQ -
partial safety factor

for variable actions
YQ = 0
The load combination which gives the largest effect (i.e.internal forces or moment ) is decisive
111
Examples for the application of the combinations mies in Table III.7. All
actions (g, q, P , s, w) are considered to originate from different sources
Table .8
,.
,,
,,
,,
load cases
1'
combinations of actions
l,35g + l,50q
l,35g + l,50s
&
>
l,35(g + q + s)
l,35g + l,50q
'~EZOZE-0 q
l,35g + l,50P* )
1 I i i I i i I Ig
X
l,35g + l,50s
l ^ t g + q + s + P^)
q
g
w
r&
g
q
s
w
dead load
imposed load
point load
snow load
wind load
1.
l,35g + l,50w
2.
l,35g + l,50q
3.
l,35g + l,50s
4.
l,35(g + q + w + s)
rA
") assuming is independent of g, q, s and w
12
IV MEMBERS IN COMPRESSION (N)
IV
IV.l
Generalities
(1) For each load case (see chapter III) the design value of the following internal force may
be applied to members submitted to centered axial compression which shall be checked
at ultimate limit states :
(2) This chapter only deals with composite columns which are of two main types :
- totally (Figure IV.l a)) or partially (Figure IV.l b)) concrete encased steel sections
and,
- concrete filled steel sections (Figures IV.l c) and d)).
EC4 [4.8.1 (l)]
Figure IV.l Type of cross-sections of composite columns

The steel section and the uncracked concrete section usually have the same centroid.
115
EC4
[4.8.1 (2)]
EC4
[4.8.1 (3)]
(3) This chapter IV only applies to isolated non-sway composite members in compression.
(4) This chapter IV presents the simplified method of design (EC4 [4.8.3]) for composite
columns of double symmetrical (Figure IV.l) and uniform cross-section over the
column length. This simplified method uses the European buckling curves for steel
columns (Eurocode 3) as the basic design curves for composite columns.
Application mies for composite columns of mono-symmetrical cross-section are given in
Annex D of Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4).
When the limits of applicability of the simplified method are not fulfilled (see chapter
IV. 1.1), the general method (EC4 : [4.8.3]) has to be applied.
That general method includes composite columns with non-symmetrical or non-uniform
cross-section over the column length.
EC4
[4.8.3.1]
(5) Design assumptions :

Both approaches for the design of composite columns are based on the following main
assumptions :
-
full interaction between concrete and steel up to the point of collapse,
allowances must be made for imperfections which are consistent with those adopted
for assessing the strength of bare steel columns,
- proper account must be taken of the steel and concrete stresse-strain curves,
- plane sections remain plane.
(6) The Table IV.l provides a list of checks to be performed at Ultimate Limit States for the
member submitted to centered axial compression (Nx sd) A member shall have
sufficient bearing capacity if al[ checks are fulfilled. All the checks have both references
to Eurocode 4 and to the design handbook.
Table IV.l
EC4
[4.8.3.1 (5)]
List of checks to be performed at ULS for the composite member in

compression
List of checks to be performed at ULS for the composite member in

compression
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Check
Check
Check
Check
[4.8.3.3]
(5)
[4.8.3.8]
(6)
Resistance of cross-section to Nx.sd :

Nx.Sd - Npi Rd
(design plastic resistance to compression of the
composite cross-section)
Stability of member to Nx.sd for both buckling axes :
Nx.Sd - minimum (NDy.Rd;Nbz.Rd) (design flexural buckling
resistances of the composite
member about y and axes)
[4.8.3.1 (3)]
[4.8.2.5]
[4.8.2.4]
[4.8.2.6] to
[4.8.2.8]
References to
design handbook
the limits of applicability of the simplified design method

IV.1.1
concrete cover and reinforcement
IV 1.1 (4) to (6)
for local buckling of steel members
IV.1.2
the load introduction and the longitudinal shear
IV.1.3 & IV.1.4
116
IV.2
IV.3
EC4
[4.8.3.1 (3)]
I V.l. 1
Limits of applicability of the simplified design method
(1) Type of cross-section :

The column is of double-symmetrical and uniform cross-section over the column length
(see Figure IV.l).
(2) Steel ratio :
The steel contribution ratio of rolled or welded members should lie between following
limits :
[4.8.3.4]
0,2<<0,9 , where
where Npi.Rd
is the design plastic resistance to compression of the composite

cross-section (see chapter IV.2),
is the area of the structural steel profile,
is the yield strength of the structural steel profile (see table
.5),
is the partial safety factor for structural steel (see Table 11.10).
Ya
Ref. 7 [8.3.6]
If is less than 0,2 , the column shall be designed according to Eurocode 2. If exceeds
0,9 , column design shall be made on the basis of Eurocode 3.
(3) Member slendemess :
The non-dimensional slendemess of composite member should be limited for both
axes :
Xy <2,0 and < 2 , 0
where and are the non-dimensional relative siendemesses for flexural

buckling about major axis (yy) and minor axis (zz)
respectively (see chapter IV.3).
(4) Reinforcement (in general) :
If the longitudinal reinforcement is considered in design, extreme limits of
reinforcement, which are expressed in percentage of concrete area, are imposed :
0,3%<
<4,0%
where As
Ac
Ref. 7 [8.3.6]
EC4
[4.8.2.5 (4)]
is the cross-sectional area of all longitudinal reinforcement bars,

is the cross-sectional area of concrete.
For reasons of fire protection, greater percentages of reinforcement can be included but
shall not be taken into account for the design without consideration of fire problems.
The transverse reinforcement in concrete encased columns (see Figure IV.l a) and b))
should be designed according to clause 5.4.1.2.2 of Eurocode 2 (Ref. 2).
117
EC4
[4.8.2.5 (5)]
EC4
[4.8.2.5 (8)]
For the spacing of the reinforcement clause 5.2 of Eurocode 2 applies.

(5) Minimum reinforcement :
Concrete filled steel sections (see Figure IV.l c) and d)) may be fabricated without any
reinforcement. But in general if the longitudinal reinforcement is neglected in
calculations for the resistance of the column, guidance on minimum reinforcement is
given for all types of cross-sections in clause 4.8.3.1 (3)(f) of Eurocode 4 .
(6) Concrete cover :
For totally concrete encased steel sections (see Figure IV.l a)), limits to the thickness of
concrete cover (c y , cz) that may be used in the calculations are :
in the y-direction
40mm < c y < 0,4b
in the z-direction. maximum | 40 mm;| < c z < 0,3 h

Greater cover can be used but should be ignored in calculation.
IV.1.2
Local buckling of steel members
EC4
[4.8.2.4(2)] (1) At ultimate limit states the effects of local buckling of steel members in composite
columns may be neglected provided that the steel parts in compression have to satisfy the
limits defined in Table IV.2.
(2) In practice, all standard H or I hot-rolled profiles presented in Tables V.7 (designed by
IPE, IPE A, IPE O, HE AA, HE A, HE B, HE M, UB and UC) fulfill the limit conditions
of Table IV.2 (first type of cross-section : partially concrete encased steel profile) for all
steel grades (S 235, S 275, S 355); therefore they can be designed without consideration
of local buckling.
EC4
[4.8.2.4 (3)] (3) If the limit values given in Table IV.2 are exceeded, the effect of local buckling should
be taken into account by an appropriate experimentally confirmed method.
118
Limiting width-to-thickness ratios to avoid local buckling
Table IV.2
Ref. 7 Table 8.1
Limiting ratio
Type of cross-section
Limits for different steel

grades
S 235
S 275
S 355
b/tf <
44
41
36
h/t <
52
48
42
d/t <
90
77
60
b
itf
in,,
'"
|
'it
>
''
- No verification of local buckling for steel

member,
- In order to prevent premature spalling of
the concrete, minimum concrete cover may
be provided (see IV. 1.1 (6)) :
fr
-4r._
I V.l.3
>1
naximum 4umm;
Influence of longitudinal shear
EC4
[4.8.2.6 (l)] (1) In general internal forces and moments applied from members connected to the ends of
a composite column length have to be distributed between the steel and concrete
components of the column, by considering the shear resistance at the interface between
steel and concrete.
EC4
[4.8.2.7 (1)]
The shear resistance between the steel section and the concrete may be developed by :
- chemical bond and friction at the interface steel-concrete, or
- mechanical shear connection,
such that no significant slip occurs.
EC4
[4.8.2.7
Ref.7
[8.2.4]
Ref. 9
[4.7]
(2)] (2) As the natural bond between steel profile and concrete is uncertain, the design shear
resistance due to bond and friction may be limited to the values given in Table IV.3.
(3) An exact determination of bond stresses between structural steel and concrete requires
extensive calculation. Stresses may be determined in a simplified way either according to
elastic theory or from the plastic resistance of the cross-section. The variation of stresses
in the concrete member between two critical sections can be used for the determination
of bond stresses.
(4) For axially loaded columns, it is usually found that this interface shear is sufficient to
develop the combined strengths of both materials at the critical cross-section (mid-
119
column height). For columns with significant end moments, a horizontal shear force is
needed, which requires the development of longitudinal shear forces between the
concrete and steel.
Design shear resistance stresses (due to bond and friction) at the interface
between steel and concrete
Types of cross-section
Design shear stresses
Table IV.3
0,6 N/mm2
'
for flanges :
0,2 N/mm2
for web :
0,0 N/mm2
"N
<* S
IV.1.4
Ref. 9
[4.8]
cJ
f>v
0,4 N/mm2
Regions of load int roduct ion
(1) Where a load is applied to a composite column, it must be ensured that within a specified
introduction length, the individual components of the composite cross-section are loaded
according to their resistances so that no significant ship occurs between these parts. For
this purpose, a division of the loads between the steel and the concrete must be made in a
manner similar to that described in section IV. 1.3.
In order to estimate the distribution of the applied load, the stress distributions at the
beginning and the end of the region of introduction must be known. From the
differences in these stresses, the loads which are transferred to the cross-section
components may be determined.
The following requirement on the introduction length l\ of the region of load
introduction should be satisfied :
EC4 [4.8.2.6 (3)]
r' ~2d
where d
is the smaller of the two cross-section dimensions h or b (see

Figure IV.2) or the cross-section dimension normal to the
bending axis (h for My.sd o r b for M z .sd)
Figure IV.2 Introduction length l\ for the shear force
120
(2) A simple method of distributing the loads to be introduced can be made by help of the
plastic resistance of the different cross-section components, the steel section, the concrete
and the reinforcing steel, as follows :
N cs.Sd
N a.Rd
= N x.Sd 1
N pl.Rd
or Nx.Sd (1-),
Na.Sd = N x .sd - N cs .sd = Nx.sd ,

M a.Rd
M cs.Sd = M Sd 1
M pl.Rd
Ma.Sd = Msd - Mcs.sd
is the resistance to compression of the steel cross-section
where Na.Rd
'Afy)
< Ya J
is the resistance to compression of the composite cross-section
(see chapter IV.2),
Wplfy^
is the moment resistance of the steel cross-section
Ya
is the plastic moment resistance of the composite crosssection(see chapter VI.2),
NpLRd
Maild
M
pl.Rd
Ncs.Sd
is the design axial load applied to the

reinforcement,
concrete and the
Mcs.Sd
is the design bending moment applied to the concrete and the

reinforcement.
If the loads are applied through a connection to the steel section, the elements of the load
introduction, e.g. the headed studs, must be designed to transmit the concrete
components of the loading, N cs .sd and M cs .sd In the case of load introduction from the
concrete into the steel section, e.g. through brackets, the respective steel forces and
moments, N a .sd and Ma.sd must be allowed for in the design.
EC4
[4.8.2.6 (4)] (3) In an I-section with concrete only between the flanges, the concrete should be gripped by
stirrups and a clear defined load transmission path between concrete and steel web should
be identified (see Figure IV. 3).
- :
tt= = 0
1I
(Stirrups
: - : - :
weldec1
to web
sJtirrups passe d
through web
Shear connecte)rs
on web
Figure IV.3 Mechanical shear connection

(4) For single-storeys columns, head plates are generally used as the elements for load
introduction. In those cases no other connecting devices are needed. Special detailing is
necessary for continuous columns; for these cases, headed studs have proved to be
121
economie when used with open cross-sections as shown in Figure IV.4 . The forces on
the outward stud connectors are transmitted to the flanges and the friction force
developed, R, may be evaluated as follows :
EC4 [4.8.2.8 (2)]
R = p f PRd
is the design resistance of one headed stud connector (see
chapter V.2.7),
where P R
EC4 [6.5.2.1 (1)]
is the coefficient of friction (= 0,5).
\{
EC4 [Fig. 4.11]
p.PRd/2
|, *
30Q
< 400
C3
ch
i-600
Figure IV.4 Shear resistance of headed stud connectors used to create direct load
transfer into the concrete
IV.2
4.8.3.3 (l)
Resistance of cross-section to axial compressive force Nx.sd
(1) For members in axial compression, the design value for the compressive force N x .sd at
each composite cross-section shall satisfy:
x.Sd < N pl.Rd
where Npi.Rd
Aa, Ac, As

cross-section (see Table IV.5),
are the cross-sectional areas of the structural steel, the concrete
and the reinforcement (see Table IV.6),
is the yield strength of the structural steel (see Table II.5),
fck
is the compression strength of the concrete (see Table II. 1),
fsk
is the yield strength of the reinforcement (see Table II.8),
YMa Yc Ys are partial safety factors at ultimate limit states for the structural
steel, concrete and reinforcement steel (see Table 11.10),
1 0 = 4 , 9 - 1 8 , 5 + 17 T2
X-, a n d i n o > 0 (see Table IV.4),
122
20 = 0,25 (3 + 2),
is the non-dimensional relative slendemess of

member (see chapter IV.3),
composite
Values of 10 and r|20 in function of
Table IV.4
EC4 [Table 4.5]
and 20 ^ LO (see Table IV.4),
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
> 0,5
io
2
4,90
3,22
1,88
0,88
0,22
0,00
0,75
0,80
0,85
0,90
0,95
1,00
Design plastic resistance to compression Npi.Rd
Table IV.5
Types of cross-sections and stress distributions for

Npi.Rd
Npi.Rd =
fy/YMa 0,85fck/Yc fsk/Ys
+
^HH^MHB
= a
Npi.Rd
Q85f c k
=3
f
YMa
y /YMa 0,85 fck/Yc fsk /%
Yc
+ AS *sk
J
Ys
+
Npi.Rd
11
wtmmm
y /YMa
\]
WYC
fsk /Ys
\~
Npi.Rd
"
L
+
:
: ..
'a"
^
c
YMa
+ AC
'sk
c J
==1
yc
20 fy/YMa fsk /js

if
Npl.Rd
3 20
- + A,
YMa
Ick
V le
+
)
t fy^
HY
+ AC
d f,ek )
Notation : "+" means stresses in compression ; for calculation of A a , A s and A c , see Table IV.6
123
EC4 [4.8.3.3
(3) to (6)]
(2) For concrete-filled circular hollow section (the 4th type of cross-section in Table IV.5)
the strength is increased because of confinement of the steel tube and triaxial
containment of concrete and, if relative slendemess of the member : < 0,5.
Table IV.6
Cross-sectional areas of the structural steel (A a ), the reinforcement (As) and

the concrete (Ac)
Types of cross-sections
Cross-sectional area
b=b
A a = 2 b tf + (h - 2 tf) t w + (4 - ) r2
/
As
2
A s ; =7U
2jAs
i=l
V
A c = b c hc - A a - As
A a = 2 t ( h + b - 4 r ) + ( r 2 - r.2nt)
[:
I*
2 "\
AS
2v^S
A si =
"
i=l
ilt
' : . ' . % : ,
A c = (b - 2 t) (h - 2 t) - (4 - ) r, - A s
Aa
d
*K
D
=
2
A s = 2vA s
i=l
Ac
124
A si =
nnt
"
4
As
'
IV.3
Stability of member to axial compressive force Nx.sd
(1) The compression members shall be checked to flexural buckling mode (buckling by
plane bending) according to both principal axes of the section (major axis: yy; minor
axis: zz) with the appropriate buckling lengths (Lb.y, Lb.z)
EC4
[4.8.3.8]
(2) For members submitted to axial compression the design value of the compressive force
Nx.Sd shall satisfy:
with Nh.Rd
Nx.Sd ^ Nby.Rd
= Xy Npi.Rd
Nx.Sd ^ Nbz.Rd
= Xz Npi.Rd
where Nby.Rd and Nby.Rd are the design flexural buckling resistances of the
member for buckling mode about yy and zz axes,
%y,
are the buckling reduction factors for the buckling mode about
yy and zz axes,
Npi.Rd

cross-section (see chapter IV.2 and Table IV.3).
(3) For constant axial compression in members of constant cross-section, the value of the
buckling reduction coefficient (Xy, ) is related to the appropriate non-dimensional
relative slendemess ( , ) :
EC3, [5.5.1.2 (1)]
[form. (5.46)]
= ():
where
+^-2
,but <
= 0,5 1 + oc ( - 0 , 2 ) + 2
is an imperfection factor (see Table IV.7), depending on the
appropriate buckling curve.
Table IV.7
Imperfection factors a
Buckling curve
Imperfection factor
0,21
0,34
0,49
The buckling reduction factor is given in function of and the appropriate buckling
curve for each type of cross-sections in Table IV.ll. When < 0 , 2 flexural buckling is
not a potential failure mode (then, = 1,0).
125
(4) The non-dimensional relative slendemess has to be considered for the relevant plane
of bending : and , respectively for buckling about major yy and minor zz axes :
=.
where Npi.R
pl.R
is equal to Npij^d as defined in Table IV.5 (see chapter IV.2)

with YMa = Yc = Ys = l&
Nc,y=r(EIy)
/L b.y
Ncr,=r(EIz)e/L2b.
(E I) e
is the elastic critical load of the member about

yy axis,
is the elastic critical load of the member about
zz axis,
is the effective elastic flexural stiffness of the composite crosssection, about major (yy) and minor (zz) axes :
(E Iy J = E a ly a + 0 , 8 E c d Iy.C +E S Iy , or.
( E I z ) e = E a 'z.a + 0 , 8 E c d I z . c +E S I2
Ea, Es
are the moduli of elasticity of the structural steel and the

reinforcement steel (see Table II.7),
Ecd
is the effective elastic modulus of the concrete according to the

following clause IV.3 (5),
ly.a* ly.c- ly.s are the moments of inertia for bending about y axis of the
structural steel, the concrete (assumed to be uncracked) and
the reinforcement, respectively (see Table IV.8),
Iz.a. Iz.c Iz.s are the moments of inertia for bending about axis of the
structural steel, the concrete (assumed to be uncracked) and
the reinforcement, respectively (see Table IV.8),
Lb.y, Lb.z
are the buckling lengths of the member about y and axes

according to clause IV.3 (6).
126
Table IV.8 a) Moments of inertia of totally and partially concrete-encased steel profile
I a , Is- Ic
are the moments of inertia for structural steel, reinforcement and concrete
(assumed to be uncracked) for bending about y and axes
b = bc
yj
>r-H
ez
Cz
he
~+
ey
Tz
Ia.y =[bh3-(b-tw)(h-2tf)2
Is.v =
i=l
Psi
+ 0,03r4 +0,2146r 2 (h-2t f -0,4468r) 2
Zj
c
I1 c.y - bcc. hc
- 1 a.y _ i1 s.y
~
Ia.z = [2tfb 3 +(h-2t f ) t i ] + 0,03r4 +0,2146r 2 (t w +0,4468r):

+ Assi.e.
Is.z = 1^.
pi
yi
i=l
Ix
c.z
hrbr
.r.
- Ix
a.z
- xI
s.z
Notations : see table IV.8 c)
127
h = hc
Table IV.8 b) Moments of inertia of concrete-filled rectangular hollow section

Ia, Is, Ic
are the moments of inertia for structural steel, reinforcement

b
1 f^4
*
^ r
l'intu
ez
J
and concrete
u
Iav
a y
'
(b-2r)h3
2 r ( h - 2 r ) 3 i r r 4
64 + ~
= +
+
2
4
9
)
.2
3,
12
12
3
(b-2t-2rint)(h-2t)
2r i n t (h-- 2 t - 2 r i n t ) 3 KXUX
h-2t
64
-rcr i n-t
12
12
4 ( 9 2
'-rl-'
)]
f,
4 y
2 'H^J
Is.y =
i=l
c y
Psi
Zj
(b-2t-2rint)(h-2t)3
rint(h-2t-2rint)3
12
4
_(h-2r)b3
a z
' ~
2r(b-2r)3
12
12
(h-2t-2rint)(b-2t)3
4 I
4 1
'
9~ J
4-"
"h-2t
+ 7Cr
12
KTU
-Zi-i-i'
's.y
3
2
b-2t
l T
2 n i
- 4
4 y
bt
2r i n t (b-- 2 t - 2 r i n t ) 3
12
{ -9K r
4V
2 "H^JJ
i s .z = !psi
i=l
+ A
seyi
(h-2t-2rint)(b-2t)3
r hl t ( b - 2 t - 2 r i n t ) 3
12
64
4
Notations : see table IV.8 c)
f.- :
l
97C-J
+ 7cr
"b-2t
4 y
. 2 - ^ r J j -Is.z
Table IV.8 c) Moments of inertia of concrete-filled circular hollow section

I a , Is, I c
are the moments of inertia for structural steel, reinforcement and concrete
ja4-at)
Iay
64
is.v = Ipsj
+A
siezi
1=1
-y
a.z
-I
64
*a.y
r
is.z - Ipsi
+A
sieyi
i=l
=
C-Z
-I
s
64
Notations
is the number of reinforcement bars,

psj
^si
e y i or e z i
is the own moment of inertia of re-bar i ( = , with

~64~
= re-bar diameter),
is the area of re-bar i (= , with = re-bar diameter),

is the distance of the re-bar i of area ASj to the relevant
middle line (z axis or y axis).
129
EC4
[4.8.3.5]
(5) The effective elastic modulus of the concrete ECd varies if the effects of short-term or
long-term loading are taken into account for the composite columns. F or slender
columns (with greater than limits given in Table IV.9), the long-term behaviour of the
concrete (creep and shrinkage of concrete) reduces the resistance. This influence can be
considered by a simple modification of the effective elastic modulus of the concrete Ecd :
for short-term loading :
EC4 [4.8.3.5 (1)]
where
cd
-'
is the secant modulus of elasticity of the concrete according to

Table II. 1),
Yc = 1,35
EC2 [A.3.1] [A.3.4]

EC4 [4.8.3.5 (2)]
according to Eurocode 2 (Ref. 2).
for long-term loading and slender columns (if relative slendemess, is greater
than limits given in Table IV.9) :
where E c m and yc
Table IV.9
cd
1-0,5-
N G.Sd
x.Sd J
are defined for short-term loading,
Nx.Sd
is the applied design axial force,
NG.Sd
is the part of the applied design axial force (N x .sd) that is

permanently acting on the column,
is the non-dimensional relative slendemess for flexural

buckling about relevant axis ( y A z ) ( s e e clause IV.3 (4)).
Limiting values of for long-term loading
For braced non-sway frames, influence of

long-terni behaviour of concrete should be
considered :
if >
r.
|*<
0,8
T
=L
y\
^ (r
iv
0,8/(1 -)
'
Notation : is the steel contribution ratio (see chapter IV. 1.1, clause (2))
130
EC4 [4.8.3.6
(l)and(2)] (6)
The buckling length Lb (Lb.y, Lb.z) of an isolated non-sway compression member with
both ends effectively held in position laterally may conservatively be taken as equal to its
system length L; or alternatively, the buckling length may be determined using
informative Annex E of Eurocode 3 (Ref. 3) and specific rules given in Eurocode 4
(Ref. 4 : [4.8.3.6]).
Buckling lengths of columns in a non-sway mode may be provided in Table IV. 10 for
different boundary conditions to be demonstrated according to Eurocode 4.
Table IV.10 Buckling length of column, Lb

Buckling length
System
Lb
2L
Nx.Sd
Nx.Sd
Nx.Sd
Nx.Sd
131
0,7 L
0,5 L
Table IV.ll Buckling reduction factors = f ( ) for composite cross-sections

EC3
[table 5.5.2]
Reduction buckling factors

Xy
F
relative
slendemess
Buckling axis : any

curve a
curve b
curve c
0,0
1,0000
1,0000
1.0000
0,2
1,0000
1,0000
1,0000
0,3
0,9775
0,9641
0,9491
0,4
0,9528
0,9261
0,8973
0,5
0,9243
0,8842
0,8430
0,6
0,8900
0,8371
0.7854
0,7
0,8477
0,7837
0,7247
0,8
0,7957
0,7245
0,6622
0,9
0,7339
0,6612
0,5998
1,0
0,6656
0,5970
0,5399
1,1
0,5960
0,5352
0,4842
1,2
0,5300
0,4781
0,4338
1,3
0,4703
0,4269
0,3888
1,4
0,4179
0,3817
0,3492
1,5
0,3724
0,3422
0,3145
1,6
0,3332
0,3079
0,2842
1,7
0,2994
0,2781
0,2577
1,8
0,2702
0,2521
0,2345
1,9
0,2449
0,2294
0,2141
2,0
0,2229
0,2095
0,1962
Major buckling axis : yy Minor buckling axis : zz
132
MEMBERS IN BENDING
(V;M;(V,M))
V.l
Generalities
( 1 ) For each load case (see chapter III) the design values for the following effects of actions
are applied to members in bending and shall be checked at serviceability limit states
(SLS) and at ultimate limit states (ULS) :
EC4
[4.1.2 (l)]
EC4
[4.1.1 (1)]
EC4
[4.1.3]
- For SLS :
. vertical deflections (),

. cracking of concrete (wK),
. vibrations (f)
- For ULS :
separate or combined vertical shear force and bending moment :
(2) This chapter V only deals with composite beams which have been presented in chapter II
(see Figure II.2 for typical types of cross-sections).
Beams with concrete-encased steel webs are included (see Figure II.2) but beams with
fully-encased steel sections are excluded.
(3) This chapter V applies to isolated composite beams and to composite beams in composite
frames.
(4) Depending on sequences of construction, steel beams loaded by wet concrete have to be
checked at construction stage according to Eurocode 3 rules (Ref. 3). Those verifications
are out of the scope of this design handbook.
At composite stage when concrete is matured, composite beams have to be checked at
ultimate limit states and at serviceability limit states according to Eurocode 4 as explained
in this chapter V.
(5) In composite beams the possible critical sections to be checked, are summarised in Table
V.l.
135
Table V.l
Critical sections for the design calculation and related action effects to be
checked
Ref.7
[Figure 6.2]
|B
C|
.;
.p
welded plate
CITC \
Al
EC4
[4.1.2 (3) & (4)]
|C
r...
Critical cross-sections :
A-
bending moment resistance to My.sd (cross-section)
B-B
vertical shear resistance to Vz.Sd (cross-section, shear buckling,

web crippling)
C-C
bending moment-vertical shear interaction to Vz.sd and My $d

(cross-section, shear buckling)
Regions :
D-D
longitudinal shear resistance to Vf of the shear connectors
E- and F-F longitudinal shear resistance to Vf of the slab and transverse

reinforcement
G-G
EC4
[4.1.2 (4)]
lateral-torsional buckling to My.sd of bottom

continuous beam or cantilever).
flange
(for
Critical cross-sections may be for example the sections A- (maximum sagging

moment), B-B (support) and C-C (sudden change of cross-section and internal support
with maximum hogging moment) shown in Table V. 1 ; critical cross-sections may be also
sections subjected to heavy concentrated loads or reactions.
In case of simply-supported beams : no check of lateral-torsional buckling may be
needed (see chapter V.2.5.2.1) and if beam is subject to uniform load, no bending
moment-vertical shear interaction has to be considered.
136
(6) The Table V.2 provides a list of the checks to be performed at Ultimate Limit States for
the member in bending (V; M; (V,M)). A member shall have sufficient bearing capacity
if aU the checks are fulfilled according to the loading applied to that member. For
instance, in the case of loading nr , aU checks from (1) to (5) have to be satisfied.
All the checks have both references to Eurocodes 3 or 4 and to the design handbook.
The Table V.2 proposes the following loadings applied to the member:
Vertical shear force : Vz.sd
Bending moment: My.d
Interaction of vertical shear force and bending moment: (Vz.sd and My.sd)
Table V.2
List of checks to be performed at ULS for the member in bending

according to the applied internal forces and/or moments (V ; M ; (V , M))
References to
design handbook
Vertical shear force V7sd :
(1 ) Resistance of cross-section to Vz.Sd '

Vz.Sd - Vpi.z.Rd
E C 3 [5.4.6 (1)]
E C 3 [5.6.1 (1)]
(2) Stability of web to Vz.Sd.

Vz.Sd - Vba.Rd
E C 3 [5.6.3 (1)]
(design shear buckling resistance)
Table V.8
V.2.4.2
(design crippling resistance)
V.2.4.3
(4) Resistance of shear connectors to longitudinal shear Vf.

V < PR(J
E C 4 [6.3.2.1]
ifdltw>69E:
V.2.4.1
(3) Crippling of web to Vz sd , at internal support of a beam :

Vz.Sd - Ra.Rd
E C 3 [5.7.4 (1)]
(design plastic shear resistance of the cross-section)
(design shear resistance of headed studs)
V.2.7
(5) Resistance of concrete slab to longitudinal shear Vg :

Vf < VRd
E C 4 [6.6.2]
(2)
(design resistance of the concrete flange)
V.2.7
Bending moment MV.SH :
(1 ) Resistance of cross-section to My $d'

E C 4 [4.4.1]
E C 4 [4.6.2]
E C 4 [4.6.3]
E C 4 [6.3.2.1]
My.sd - My.Rd
(design bending moment resistance of the crosssection)

(2) Stability of member to hogging MySd in continuous beam or
cantilever, if initial conditions are not fulfilled :
My.sd - Mb.Rd
(design lateral-torsional buckling resistance moment

of the member)
(3) Resistance of shear connectors to longitudinal shear Vg :
Vf < PRd
V.2.5.1
V.2.5.2.2
V.2.5.2.3
V.2.7

E C 4 [6.6.2]
Vf < VRd
137
V.2.7
Table V.2
List of checks to be performed at ULS for the member in bending

according to the applied internal forces and/or moments (V ; M ; (V , M))
Interaction of vertical shear

(Vz.Sd M y .sd) :
force
and
bending
moment
If v z.Sd ^ 0,5 Vpi.z.Rd then interaction (Vz.sd , My.sd) is not

considered and all checks nr and nr of this Table V.2 shall
be performed, with the following check nr (3) (6).
E C 4 [4.4.3 (1)]
If V z .sd > 0,5 Vpi.z.Rd then interaction (Vz.sd , My.sd) has to be

considered and all following checks shall be carried out :
Reference to
design
handbook :
V.2.6.1
(1 ) Resistance of cross-section to Vz sd '

E C 3 [5.4.6 (1)]
Vz.Sd - Vpi.z.Rd
(design plastic shear resistance of the cross-section)
V.2.4.1
(2) Resistance of cross-section to Mysd '

E C 4 [4.4.1]
My.Sd - My.Rd
(design bending moment resistance of the crosssection)
V.2.5.1
(3) Crippling of web to Vz sd > ot internal support of a beam :

E C 3 [5.7.4 (1)]
E C 4 [4.6.2]
E C 4 [4.6.3]
E C 4 [4.4.3]
E C 4 [4.4.5]
E C 3 [5.6.1 (1)]
Vz.Sd - Ra.Rd
(design crippling resistance)
(4) Stability of member to hogging MySd 'n continuous beam or
cantilever, if initial conditions are not fulfilled :
(design lateral-torsional buckling resistance moment
of the member)
(5) Resistance of cross-section to (V- $d , My.Sd) '
V.2.4.3
V.2.5.2.2
My.sd - Mb.Rd
V.2.5.2.3
My.Sd - My.Rd
V.2.6.1
(design plastic resistance moment reduced by shear

force)
(6) Stability of web to (Vzsd .My.Sd) if d I tw > 69 :
One of the three following checks ((6.1), (6.2), (6.3)) shall be
fulfilled :
Mf.Rd (design plastic moment resistance of crosssection with the flanges only)
then V z sd - Vba.Rd (design shear buckling resistance of the
web)
V.2.6.2 (3) A
EC3
[5.6.7.2 (2)]
(6.2) If My.sd > Mf.Rd and V z .sd < 0,5 Vba.Rd

then My sd - My.Rd (design bending moment resistance of the
cross-section)
V.2.6.2 (3)
V.2.5.1
EC3
[5.6.7.2 (3)]
(6.3) If My.sd > Mf.Rd and Vz.sd > 0,5 Vba.Rd

then My sd design moment resistance reduced by shear
buckling (interaction (Vz.sd . My.sd))
and, My.sd ^ My.Rd
and, V z .sd ^ Vba.Rd
V.2.6.2 (3) C
V.2.6.2 (3) C
EC3
[5.6.7.2 (1)]
(6.1) If My.sd -
Table V.8
V.2.4.2
V.2.5.1
V.2.4.2
(7) Resistance of shear connectors to longitudinal shear Vg :

E C 4 [6.3.2.1]
Vf < PRd
V.2.7

E C 4 [6.6.2
Vj> < VR(J
138
V.2.7
V.2
Checks at Ultimate Limit States
V.2.1
Properties of cross-sections of composite beams
(1) Effective cross-section :

EC4
[4.2.1 (1)]
EC4
[4.2.2.1]
Allowance shall be made for the flexibility of a concrete flange that induces unequal
bending normal stress distribution over the flange width because of in-plane shear
("shear lag"). In the simple model proposed in Eurocode 4, the effective composite
cross-section is composed of an effective width beff of the concrete slab for which
constant normal stress distribution replaces the trae stress distribution variable along the
true slab width
(2) Effective width of concrete slab :
The effective width on each side of the steel web should be taken as IQ I 8, but not greater
than distances bj (see Figure V.l):
beff = b e l +b e 2
where
b e l = minimum
b e 2 = minimum
(it :b,
;b 2
b e i and b e 2 are evaluated independently,

EC4 [4.2.2.1 (3)]
bi
is the half distance from the beam web to the adjacent beam
web or the distance from the beam web to the free edge of
concrete slab (b = b2 and bi respectively in Figure V.l),
EC4 [4.2.2.1 (4)]
is equal to the span length for simply supported beams,

is the approximate distance between points of zero bending
moment in case of continuous composite beams ; for typical
continuous beams shown in Figure V.l values of Q at
support are given above the beam and midspan values of IQ
are provided below the beam.
EC4
[4.2.2.1 (1)] (3) For elastic global analysis, the effective width beff of the concrete flange may be
assumed to be constant over the whole of each span. It may be taken as the value at midspan (for a beam supported at both ends), or as the value at the support (for cantilever
beam). For continuous beams two methods are proposed (see chapter V.2.3).
EC4
[4.2.2.2]
(4) For verifications of cross-sections, the effective width beff should be taken as the relevant
midspan value (for sections in sagging bending), or as the value at the relevant support
(for sections in hogging bending).
139
Effective width, beff

beff
Jf
bel y
/-
be2
bi
-?'
b2
bi
-7
- Length In :
lp = L
/7^7
/-
/T7777
l0 = 0,25 (L2+L3) 0 = 1,5 L 4 < L 4 + 0,5 L 3
0=0,25(Li+L2)
/w777
SJ/7/J
^0 = 0 , 8 L i
Li
* =
Figure V . l
EC4
[4.2.3]
Co = 0,7 L 2
V-
(0
Lo
7<
/7T777
3,8 L3 - 0,3 L 4 ;> 0,7 IL3

p ^
L4
L3
7-
Effective width beff and equivalent spans io of concrete Hange
(5) Flexural stiffness :

The elastic section properties of a composite cross-section should be expressed as those
of an equivalent steel cross-section by dividing the contribution of the concrete
component by a modular ratio (see Table II.3).
The flexural stiffnesses of a composite cross-section are defined as follows:
Designation
Flexural stiffness
"Uncracked" method
E a Il
"Cracked" method
Eaf2
where
Ea
II
12
is the modulus of elasticity for structural steel (see Table II.7),

is the moment of inertia of the effective equivalent steel section
calculated assuming that concrete in tension is uncracked;
proposed formula for sagging bending moment (see Figure
V.2) :
is the moment of inertia of the effective equivalent steel section

calculated neglecting concrete in tension but including
reinforcement; proposed formula for hogging bending
moment if the reinforcement is placed at mid height of the
slab (he / 2) above the steel sheeting (see Figure V.2) :
1?
Aa(hc+2hp+ha)
:
;
4(1 + 0
140
r-l.
= the modular ratio (see Table II. 3),
rc
beff h c
Aa.
A.
rs
E'c
is the effective modulus of concrete taking into account creep

effects (see clause II.5.1 (5)),
Aa
is the cross-sectional area of the steel section,
beff
is the effective width of concrete slab (see clause V.2.1 (2)),
beff he
is the area of the concrete section,
is the cross-sectional area of reinforcement within the effective

width beff of the concrete slab,
la
is the moment of inertia of the structural steel section (see

Table IV.8),
he
is the depth of concrete flange above upper flange of the

profiled steel decking,
hp
is the depth of the profiled steel decking,
ha
is the height of the structural steel profile.

CROSS-SECTION
*
beff
^beff/m
ELASTIC STRESSES
j.
'J
My.Sd
Profiled
steel sheet
beff
^beff/q.
(=> II)
ea strain fra stress

}
_ . _ ) My.Sd
(=> l2)
a strain
Figure V2
Oa stress
Elastic analysis of composite beam under sagging and hogging moment
141
EC4 [4.3]
V .2.2
Classification of cross-sections of composite cross-sections
V.2.2.1
Generalities
( 1 ) For a designer the usual procedure is to choose a cross-section in such a way that the
maximal capacity is not controlled by local buckling but is associated with the bearing
load of a particular member of the structure (column, beam, beam-column). Therefore
the local buckling plays an important role in the design of cross-sections including
structural steel section.
The critical level over which local buckling appears in composite beams, is defined by
the classification of steel sections.
(2) For the check of composite cross-sections and composite beams at Ultimate Limit States,
the steel cross-sections shall be classified. The classification of cross-sections allows to
evaluate beforehand their behaviour, their ultimate resistance and their deformation
capacity, taking into account the possible limits on the resistance due to local buckling of
compression elements of steel sections.
(3) The classification of cross-sections permits (see Table V.3):
- to guide the selection of global analysis methods of the structure (elastic or plastic
global analysis),
- to determine the criteria to be used for ULS checks of composite cross-sections
and members.
(4) Four classes of composite cross-section are defined according to (see chapters V.2.2.2
and V.2.2.3) :
- the slendemess of its steel elements in compression (width-over-thickness ratios of
steel web or steel flange in compression),
- the yield strength of the steel and,
- the sign of bending moment applied to the composite cross-section (sagging or
hogging bending moments) :
(5) It is important to precise that the present classification of cross-sections is only based on
the distribution of normal stresses across the steel section and is not affected by vertical
shear force Vz.sd- The resistance of steel webs to shear buckling (induced by Vz.Sd)
should be checked in chapter V.2.4.2.
Ref. 10
(p. 21)
(6)
EC4 [1.1.2 (6)]
The procedure of classification (and Eurocode 4 as a whole) is applicable only to

composite beams where the steel section is symmetrical about an axis (zz) normal to the
neutral axis (yy) of bending. Asymmetry of the concrete slab or its reinforcement is
acceptable.
142
Ref. 10
(p. 22)
EC4
[4.5.2.2 and
(7) Designers of structures for buildings normally select beams with steel sections such that
the composite sections are in Class 1 or 2, for the following reasons :
4.9.7]
EC4
[4.4.1.1 (2)]
b) Plastic theory for the bending resistances of beams is available only for crosssections in Class 1 or Class 2. The ratio of the plastic resistance to the elastic
resistance is in the range of 1,2 to 1,4 for composite sections, compared with about
1,15 for rolled steel I-section.
EC4
[4.5.3.4]
c) Where elastic global analysis is used, the limits to the redistribution of moments are
more favourable for the lower classes (see chapter V.2.3).
EC4
[6.2.1]
EC4
a) Rigid-plastic global analysis (also known as plastic hinge analysis) is available only
for structures where the cross-sections at plastic hinge locations are in Class 1 and
other cross-sections of beams are in Class 2. That method of plastic global analysis
is out of the scope of this design hanbook.
d) Where floor slabs are composite, it is convenient to use partial shear connection.
This is allowed only for beams where the critical cross-sections are in Class 1 or
Class 2 (see chapter V.2.7).
V.2.2.2
Definition of cross-sections classification
[4.3.1 (l)] (1) Four classes of cross-sections are defined for composite beams, as follows :
Class 1 ("plastic") cross-sections are those which can form a plastic hinge with the
rotation capacity required for plastic analysis.
. Class 2 ("compact") cross-sections are those which can develop their plastic
moment resistance, but have limited rotation capacity.
. Class 3 ("semi-compact") cross-sections are those in which the calculated stress in
the extreme compression fibre of the steel member can reach its yield strength, but
local buckling is liable to prevent development of the plastic moment resistance.
. Class 4 ("slender") cross-sections are those in which it is necessary to make
explicit allowances for the effects of local buckling when determining their
moment resistance or compression resistance.
(2) The Table V.3 recapitulates the characteristics of each class of cross-section in case of
steel simply-supported beam.
(3) The ultimate resistance of cross-sections and of members submitted to bending depends
on class of cross-sections and is based on the following properties (see Table V.3):
Distribution of stresses across Cross-section properties for ULS partial
the section
ULS check formulas
safety factors
- full plastic distribution
Class 1 or 2
plastic properties (Mpi.Rd)
Ya
- at the level of yield strength
- elastic distribution
Class 3
Ya
- with yield strength reached elastic properties (Mei.Rd)
in the extreme fibres
- elastic distribution across
the effective section taking
Class 4
into account local buckling effective properties (Meff.Rd)
YRd
- with yield strength reached
in the extreme fibres.
143
Table V.3
Definition of the classification of cross-section
^^JJJJjHpP^
Class
Behaviour model
Design resistance
PLASTIC
across full section
fy
PLASTIC
across full section
fy
Available rotation
capacity of plastic hinge
important
fy
limited
none
elastic
with
redistribution
of moments
none
elastic
with
redistribution
of moments
M pi
Mel
"" local
buckling
ELASTIC
across effective section
fy
plastic
or,
elastic
with
redistribution
of moments
elastic
with
redistribution
of moments
ELASTIC
across full section
Global
analysis
of
structures
(4) Compression steel elements of cross-section of composite beams are classified separately
according to :
- their geometrical proportions (slendemess : width-over-thickness ratios),
EC4
[4.3.1 (2)]
EC4
[4.3.1 (5)]
EC4
[4.3.3.2 (2)]
- the yield strength of steel material and,

- the stress distribution related to the sign of applied bending moment (sagging or
hogging) influencing to position of neutral axis yy.
Compression steel elements include every part of a steel section (flanges and web) which
is either totally or partially in compression.
For class 1 and class 2 cross-sections the positions of the plastic neutral axes of
composite sections should be calculated for the effective cross-section using design
values of strengths of materials (see chapter V.2.5.1).
For class 3 and class 4 beams in buildings the position of the elastic neutral axis should
be determined for the effective concrete flange, neglecting concrete in tension, and for
the gross cross-section of the steel web. The modular ratio for concrete in compression
should be as used in the global analysis for long-term effects (see Table II.3).
144
(5) The various compression elements in a cross-section (web or flange) can, in general, be
in different classes.
EC4
[4.3.1 (2)]
(6) A cross-section is normally classified by quoting the highest (least favourable) class of
its steel compression elements.
Alternatively the classification of a cross-section may be defined by quoting both the
flange classification and the web classification. For instance, the compression flange of
an I-section may be class 1 and its web may be class 3. Then this I-section is class 3.
(7) An element of a cross-section (as such a web or a flenge) which fails to satisfy the limits
for class 3 should be taken as class 4.
EC4
(8) The methods of classification are described in following chapters :
[4.3.2]
- chapter V.2.2.3 : classification of steel flanges in compression,
[4.3.3]
- chapter V.2.2.4 : classification of steel webs.
Ref. 10 (p. 23)

Ref. io (p. 22)
The procedures are summarized in Figure V.3 where references to Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4)
and this design handbook are given respectively on the left and right sides in boxes of
the flow-chart. The flow-chart in Figure V.3 includes several unusual cases. The typical
situations are outlined below for members of uniform section :
a) For simply-supported beams : Only the midspan region needs to be classified. The
steel top flange is restrained by shear connection (see chapter V.2.2.3, Figure V.4),
or by embedment in a slab , and so is in class 1. The depth of steel web in
compression (if any) is so small that it is also in class 1. The other classes can occur
in deep composite plate girders.
Where partial shear connection is used, the area of structural steel in compression is
increased (see chapter V.2.7). Class 2 webs can then occur in the deeper beams in
buildings.
b) For continuous beams and cantilevers : Midspan regions of beams are usually in
class 1, as above. The other critical sections are near internal supports, where the
compression flange is unrestrained. Almost all rolled sections have outstand
flanges in class 1 or 2 : see Tables V.7 where all IPE, IPE A, IPE O, HE B, HE M
and UB profiles and several HE AA, HE A and UC profiles have outstand flanges
in compression in class 1 or 2, for steel grades S 235, S 275 and S 355. Bottom
flanges of plate girders can be so proportioned that the class is not worse than that
of the web.
The class of the web is determined mainly by the area of longitudinal
reinforcement in the slab that is assumed to contribute to the resistance to hogging
bending. Any significant area of reinforcement will raise the neutral axis of
composite cross-section and will put the web of most rolled I-sections into class 2,
or even class 3 or 4 (see chapter V.2.2.4). For all standard ht-rolled I-sections
(IPE, IPE A, IPE O, HE AA, HE A, HE B, HE M, UB and UC) and for steel grades
S 235, S 275 and S 355, Tables V.7 present two extreme classification for webs
subjected to hogging bending : the worst classification related to full webs
subjected to compression and the particular classification related to webs subjected
to bending (when steel profiles resist alone).
The use of an effective web in accordance with Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4, clause 4.3.3.1
(3)) is intended to eliminate the anomaly caused by the sudden change from
plastic to elastic section analysis at the class 2/3 boundary (see Ref. 4 : Note to
clause 4.3.3.1 (3)). This "hole-in-web" method is presented in chapter V.2.2.4.
Partial shear connection is not allowed by Eurocode 4 in hogging moment regions.
This is fortunate here, because it would be a complex matter to combine it with the
"hole-in-web" method.
145
rw'-
Is the steel compression flange

restrained by shear connectors?
[6.4.1.5(2)] [V.2.2.3 (2)Jig. V.4
yes
Classify compression flange

[4.3.2, Table 4.1] [Tables V.4 or V.5 )
Flange is
Class 1
Flange is
Class 2
Locate the plastic neutral axis.

Allow for partial shear connection
(if any)
[4.4.1.2/4.4.1.3]
{V.2.5.1 (4))
Locate the elastic neutral axis,

assuming full shear connection
and propped construction
[4.3.3.2 (2)]
(V.2.2.2 (4))
Classify the web using

plastic stress distribution
[4.3.3, Table 4.2] [Table V.6]
Classify the web using

elastic stress distribution
[4.3.3, Table 4.2] (Table V.6)
Web in
compression
is Class 3
Web is
Class 1
Figure V.3
V.2.2.3
EC4
[4.3.2 (l)]
Web is
Class 2
Web is
Class 2 or 3
yes
Web is
Class 4
Is the flange
Class 1 or 2?
Replace web by
effective web
in Class 2 ?
[4.3.3.1 (3)]
{VÂlffl.Fig.V.}/
j yes
Effective web
is Class 2
/ I s the flan
Class 3?
yes
7I
Is the flange \
Classi? /
Section is
Class 1
Ref. 10 (p. 23)
Web not
classified
(Class 3 or 4?)
Is web
encased ?
[4.3.1 (6) to (9)]
UV.2.2.3(3),Fig.V.5]
yes
Flange is
Class 4
Flange is
Class 3
Section is
Class 2
Effective section
is Class 2
Section is
Class 3
Section is
Class 4
Flow-chart for classification of a composite beam cross-section (with

references to [EC4] and to {design handbook})
Classification of steel flanges in compression
(1) A steel compression flange that is restrained from buckling by effective attachment to a
concrete flange by shear connectors in accordance with the Figure V.4 (see Ref. 4,
6.4.1.5) may be assumed to be in Class 1.
EC4
[6.4.1.5 (2)] (2) The classification of other steel flanges in compression in composite beams shall be in
accordance with Table V.4, for outstand flanges, and Table V.5 for internal flange
elements.
146
EC4
[6.4.1.5 (2)]
[6.4.1.5 (3)]
Ref. 11
[Figure 1]
Case of sagging bending moment :

I + Ify (stresses in steel profile)
jit
My.Sd
)
LJfy
fy
Spacing requirements of shear connectors :

- when solid slab :
eT
235
f.
e L < 22 t f
L4
Figure V.4
it
235
tf 4
.
I
- when composite slab with ribs transverse to the beam :

eL
e T < 9 tf
eL
e T < 9 tf
ande L <(6h c ;800mm)
L^T^JL/^ I
235
e L < 15 t f
235
and eL< (6 (h c +h p ); 800 mm)
Spacing requirements of shear connectors for the Class 1 steel flange in

compression
EC4
[4.3.1 (6)]
(3) For a web to be treated as "encased" in Table V.4 the concrete that encases it shall be
reinforced, mechanically connected to the steel section, and capable of preventing
buckling of the web and of any part of the compression flange towards the web. Figure
V.5 presents the requirements of Eurocode 4 for "encased" webs (see Ref. 4: 4.3.1 (7)
to (9)).
147
EC4
[4.3.1 (7)]
to
[4.3.1 (9)]
1) Concrete extended over full width of both steel flanges,

2) Concrete reinforced by longitudinal bars and stirrups, and/or welded mesh,
3) Concrete between flanges fixed to the web by :
=}ev
or
*?,
=ê v
or
,<P
Bars (with > 6 mm)

through holes
in the web
Stirrup welded
to the web
/Studs (with > 10 mm)

welded to the web
j - e L J- e L I-1
ev^
e
< 400 mm
e
h
> 400 mm
e L ^ 400 mm
ev < 200 mm
Figure V.5
V.2.2.4
Requirements for encased web
Classification of steel webs
Different rales are defined to evaluate the class of steel webs in function of the class of
compression flange (see chapter V.2.2.3) : if compression flange is in class 1 or 2 refer
to chapter V.2.2.4.1, or if compression flange is in class 3 or 4 refer then to chapter
V.2.2.4.2.
V.2.2.4.1 Classification of steel webs where the compression flange is in Class 1 or 2
EC4
[4.3.3.1 (l)] (1) The Class of the web shall be determined by Table V.6. The plastic stress distribution for
the effective composite section shall be used, except if web is in class 3 (or 4) where the
elastic stress distribution shall be used. The position of neutral axes of composite sections
should be calculated as explained in V.2.2.2 (4).
EC4
[4.3.3.1 (2)] (2) A web in Class 3 that is encased in concrete may be represented by an effective web of
the same cross-section in Qass 2 (see Figure V.6). The requirements for a web to be
encased in concrete are given in clause V.2.2.3 (3) and Figure V.5.
EC4
[4.3.3.1 (3)] (3) An uncased web in Qass 3 may be represented by an effective web in Class 2, by
assuming that the depth of web that resists compression is limited to (20 t w ) adjacent to
the compression flange, and (20 t w ) adjacent to the new plastic neutral axis ("hole-inweb" method), as shown in Figure V.6.
148
1 ) Encased webs in class 2 instead of class 3 (see Figure V.5 for requirements to have
encased webs) :
,fsk/Ys
,
, fsk/Ys
> ,
..-*
:-:.:
_ 1 Mhogging
_ 1 Mhogging
fy/Ya
fy/Ya
fyy t/Y
a
fy /Ya
- Compression flange : class 1 or 2
Compression flange : class 1 or 2

Encased web : class 3
- Encased effective web : class 2
=>
(with the same cross-section)

2) Use of an effective web in class 2 for a section subjected to hogging bending
moment with a web in class 3 :
Stress blocks :
fsk/Ys
new P.N.A
20\
initial ( d - 4 0 t w )
P.N.A
f
ad
/1
neglected
fy/Ya
2 ( a d - 40tw
40 tw E)i
Mpl.y.Rd
2 0 tw
Remark : P.N.A = plastic neutral axis

y'â
* provided that the new P.N.A is in the web.
"+" : stresses in tension
stresses in compression
fy (N/mm2)
^ 2 3 5 / f y
(if t < 40 mm)

(if 40 mm < t < 100 mm)
Figure V.6
235
275
t = tf or t w
355
0,92
0,81
0,96
0,84
Improved classification of steel webs with compression flange in class 1 or

2 and with specific conditions
V.2.2.4.2 Classification of steel webs where the compression flange is in Class 3 or 4

EC4
[4.3.3.2(1)] (1) The Qass of the web shall be determined by Table V.6, using the elastic stress
distribution.
EC4
[4.3.3.2 (2)] (2) hi composite beams for buildings, the position of the elastic neutral axis of composite
cross-sections should be determined as explained in clause V.2.2.2 (4).
149
Table V.4
Qassification of composite cross-sections : limiting width-over-thickness

ratio (c / tf) for steel outstandflangesin compression
Type of loading and stresses distribution in compression flange :

fy (in structural steel )
JJL
tf
M hogging
M sagging
sassi
lyLZD
in all cases
if requirements of F igure V.4

are not fulfilled
or
Qass
Type of cross-sections
Rolled sections
Welded sections
tm
tf
* -*
lia
web encased **)
web encased **)
C/tf
C/tf
C/tf
C/tf
< 10
< 10
< 9
< 9
< 11
< 15
< 10
< 14
< 15
< 21
< 14
< 20
> 15
> 21
> 14
> 20
Conditions : * ) for welded sections the outstand dimension c is measured from the toe
of the weld
* * ) a web is encased if requirements of F igure V.5 are satisfied
: Stresses in compression
275
355
(if tf < 40 mm)
0,92
0,81
< 100 mm)
0,96
0,84
235
fy (N/mm2)
. = ^235/fy
150
Table V.5
Classification of composite cross-section : limiting width-to-thickness ratios

for steel internal flange elements in compression
EC3 [Table 5.3.1 (sheet 2)]
Internal flange elements (internal elements parallel to axis of bending) :
wX*\
Axis of
Deriding
Type of loading
"
"
'
Stresses distribution
Class 1
!+!
R (b-3tf)/tf < 33 R (b-3tf)/tf < 38

O
V)
fv
Qass 2
internal flange
b / tf < 33
b / t f < 38
Class 3
internal flange
R
(b-3tf)/tf < 4 2
b / tf < 42
"R" means rolled hollow sections
' - " means stresses in compression
"O" means other sections
'+" means stresses in tension

235
275
355
(if tf < 40 mm)
0,92
0,81
( 4 0 < < 100 mm)
0,96
0,84
fy (N/mm2)
= ,J235/fy
'
151
Qassification of composite cross-sections : limiting width-over-thickness

ratios (d / t w ) for steel webs
Table V.6
Webs (internal elements perpendicular to axis of bending) :
.
f
Axis of h
bending
tf
t"*" -
*-tw
d = h-2(tf + r)
tw
d = h -2 (tf + av/2)
d = h -2 tf
Stresses distribution on web for different classes
d/tw <
1) Web in compression ( a = = 1) :
I
1.
- 1
-"-tw
d = h - 3 t (t = ^ = t^.)
i
k,
Class 1
Class 2
Class 3
33
38
42
72
83
124
I fy
I fv
2) Web in bending ( a = 0,5 and = -1) :

I
for
class 1 & 2 :
fy
'
'
1 +
for
class 3 :
fy
F^
3) Web subjected to combined bending and compression

f
== 'AM
if a > 0,5 if a > 0,5:

396
456
13a-l
13a-l
=3il
ad
For class 1 and 2 :
I
I
if a < 0,5
ad fi
-d-
fv
36
a
~T~
I
(IVfy < |fy| )
For class 3 :
if > -1
42
0,67 + 0,33
^ /
......................
(|fy/\|/|< |fy|).
l l i i
*)
fy (N/mm2)
= /2357
if a < 0,5
41,5
a
*y
if < -1 :
: . .
62( - )/-
:;;
355
(if t w < 40 mm)
0,92
0,81
e ( i f 4 0 m m < t w < 100 mm)
0,96
0,84
152
"
mm. .........SSKi'K
' 'SiHsSS::'
275
235
'-
stresses in compression
"+"
stresses in tension
Table V.7 a) Qassification of flange and web subjected to particular loading for standard hot-rolled
IPE, IPE A and IPE O steel profiles
I P E - I P E A - I P E O hot-rolled steel profiles
Class offlangein compression Class of web in compression
Class of web in bending

fy
_D
M,
Designation
fyC J
with web not encased
Steel grades
S 355
S 235
S 275
Steel grades
S 235 S 275 S 355
IPE 80
IPE 100
IPE120
IPE 140
IPE 160
IPE 180
200
IPE 220
IPE 240
IPE 270
IPE300
IPE 330
IPE360
IPE 400
IPE450
IPE500
IPE 550
IPE 600
IPE 750 137
IPE 750 147
IPE 750 173
IPE750X 196
80
IPE A 100
rPEA 120
IPE A 140
IPE A 160
IPE A 180
IPE A 200
IPE A 220
IPE A 240
IPE A 270
IPE A 300
IPE A 330
IPE A 360
IPE A 400
IPE A 450
IPE A 500
IPE A 550
IPEA600
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
?4i
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
m
:4.i
Ml
m
m
IPE 180
IPE 200
IPE 220
IPE O 240
IPE O 270
IPEO300
IPE O 330
IPE O 360
IPE O 400
IPE O 450
IPEO500
IPE O 550
IPE O 600
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
;:4:
W.
4
4
M
U:
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
4
m
4
:'4 :
4
4
A:
:4'
4
2
2
2
2
3
4
;;4:;;
W
4
m.
4
'W:
4
4
4
1
1
1
2
3
3
M
4
4
M
4
4:
:?4::
i;4:-:
4
4':;
:4:
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
m
4:-:
:-4::::
4
153
fy My
stresses for class 1 and 2
Steel grades
S 235 S 275
S 355
Table V.7 b) Classification of flange and web subjected to particular loading for standard hot-rolled
HE AA and HE A steel profiles
H E A A - H E A hot-rolled steel profiles
Class of flange in compression Class of web in compression
hn^
_L
)
fy M y
stresses lor class 1 and 2
fyL3Z]
Steel grades
HE 100 AA
HE 120 AA
HE 140 AA
HE 160 AA
HE 180 AA
HE 200 AA
HE 220 AA
HE 240 AA
HE 260 AA
HE 280 AA
HE 300 AA
HE 320 AA
HE 340 AA
HE 360 AA
HE 400 AA
HE 450 AA
HE 500 AA
HE 550 AA
HE 600 AA
HE 650 AA
HE 700 AA
HE 800 AA
HE 900 AA
HE 1000 AA
HE 100 A
HE 120 A
HE 140 A
HE 160 A
HE 180 A
HE 200 A
HE 220 A
HE 240 A
HE 260 A
HE 280 A
HE 300 A
HE 320 A
HE 340 A
HE 360 A
HE 400 A
HE 450 A
HE 500 A
HE 550 A
HE 600 A
HE 650 A
HE 700 A
HE 800 A
HE 900 A
HE 1000 A
fy
M,
My
Designation
Steel grades
Steel grades
S 235
S 275
S 355
1
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
1
1
S 235
3
3
4
4
4
S 275
S 355
2
2
2
2
2
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
154
2
2
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
S 235
S 275
S 355
Table V.7 c) Qassification of flange and web subjected to particular loading for standard hot-rolled
HE and HE M steel profiles
H E - H E M hot-rolled steel profiles

fv
+
)
M,
Designation
fy My
fyC
Steel grades
S 235
S 275
S 355
Steel grades
S 235
S 275
S 355
HEIOOB
HE 120
HE 140
HE 160
HE 180
HE 200
HE 220
HE 240
HE 260
HE 280
HE 300
HE 320
HE 340
HE 360
HE 400
HE 450
HE 500
HE 550
HE 600
HE 650
HE 700
HE 800
HE 900
HEIOOOB
2
2
3
3
4
?4i
n\
HE 100 M
HE 120 M
HE 140 M
HE 160 M
HE 180 M
HE 200 M
HE 220 M
HE 240 M
HE 260 M
HE 280 M
HE 300 M
HE 320 M
HE 340 M
HE 360 M
HE 400 M
HE 450 M
HE 500 M
HE 550 M
HE 600 M
HE 650 M
HE 700 M
HE 800 M
HE 900 M
HE1000M
2
3
4
155
2
3
4:
4
Steel grades
S 235 S 275
S 355
Table V.7 d) Classification of flange and web subjected to particular loading for standard hot-rolled
UB steel profiles
U B hot-rolled steel profiles
''*": :*::.: ' : ' '7:'. J
J_
Designation
UB 178 102 19
UB 203 102 23
UB 203 133 25
UB 203 133 30
UB 254 102 22
UB 254 102 25
UB 254 102 28
UB 254 146 31
UB 254 146 37
UB 254 146 43
UB 305 165 40
UB 305 165 46
UB 305 165 54
UB356X 171 45
UB356X 1 7 1 x 5 1
UB 356 1 7 1 x 5 7
UB 3 5 6 x 1 7 1 67
UB 406 178 54
UB 406 178 60
UB 406 178 67
UB 406 178 74
UB 457 152 52
UB 457 152 60
UB 457 152 67
UB 457 152 74
UB 457 152 82
UB457X 1 9 1 x 6 7
UB 457 191 74
UB457X 1 9 1 x 8 2
UB457X 1 9 1 x 8 9
UB457X 1 9 1 x 9 8
UB 533 210 82
UB 533 210 92
UB 533 210 101
UB 533 210 109
UB 533 210 122
UB 610 229 101
UB 610 229 113
UB 610 229 125
UB 610 229 140
UB 610 305 149
UB 610 305 179
UB 610 305 238
UB 686 254 125
UB 686 254 140
UB 686 254 152
UB 686 254 170
UB 762 267 147
UB 762 267 173
UB 762 267 197
UB 838 292 176
UB 838 292 194
UB 838 292 226
UB 914 305 201
UB 914 305 224
UB 914 305 253
UB 914 305 289
UB 914 419 343
UB 914 419 388

fv
+
Mv
y|I
Steel grades
S 235
S 355
S 275
Steel grades
S 235 S 275 S 355
2
1
4
3
2
4
4
"3"
2
:::
4
4
'
2
4
4
4
'Ar
3
4
4
3
3
2
4
3
2
mi:
w
4
3
'Ai
3
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
2
156
4 m.
am
2
3
4
4
4
A
4
3
2
4
4
4
A i
4
4
mi..
3
4
4
iii: 4
:-:i4
4 '
-4 :4
4
3
m 4
,, 4
A
544
i
4
3
4
:4:
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
'4
4
3
' :4
4
4
4
4
4
4
,.. 4
4
4
3
4
1
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4 .:,
4
4 : i vu. 4.
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
:: :4
4
4
4
4
3
4
: :
)
fy My
Steel grades
S 235 S 275 S 355
Table V.7 e) Qassification of flange and web subjected to particular loading for standard hot-rolled
UC steel profiles
U C hot-rolled steel profiles


fy
;
fy My
M,
Designation
fy
Steel grades
S 235
S 275
S 355
UC 152 152 23
UC 152 152 30
U C 152 152 37
UC 203 203 46
UC 203 203 52
UC 203 203 60
UC 203 203 71
UC 203 203 86
UC 254 254 73
UC 254 254 89
UC 254 254 107
U C 254 254 132
U C 254 254 167
U C 305 305 97
UC 305 305 118
UC 305 305 137
UC 305 305 158
U C 305 305 198
U C 305 305 240
UC 305 305 283
UC 356 368 129
UC 356 368 153
UC 356 368 177
UC 356 368 202
UC 356 406 235
UC 356 406 287
UC 356 406 340
UC 356 406 393
UC 356 406 467
UC 356 406 551
UC 356 406 634
Steel grades
S 235 S 275
S 355
3
1
1
3
2
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
,3:.
2"
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
157
Steel grades
S 235 S 275 S 355
Distribution of internal forces and moments in continuous beams
V.2.3
EC4
[4.5.1]
(1) Internal forces and bending moments in composite beams at ultimate limit states may be
determined by elastic or rigid-plastic global analyses, using factored loads. This design
handbook only presents the application of elastic global analysis which may be used for
all continuous beams.
[4.5.3.1 (l)] (2) Elastic global analysis is based on the assumption of a linear stress-strain relationship for
the materials, whatever the stress level. The tensile strength of concrete may be neglected.
[4.5.3.2]
(3) When unpropped construction is used for composite beams in class 3 or class 4,
appropriate global analyses shall be made to separate effects on steel members and on
composite members.
[4.5.3.3]
(4) No account needs to be taken of bending moments due to shrinkage except at crosssections in class 4.
[4.5.3.4 (l)] (5) Loss of stiffness, due to cracking of concrete in hogging moment regions, due to
yielding and local buckling of structural steel, influences the distribution of bending
moments in continuous composite beams.
[4.5.3.1 (2)]
Two methods of elastic global analysis are permitted by Eurocode 4 at the ultimate limit
state to determine the bending moment distribution (see Figure V.7):
-
uncracked section elastic analysis, based on midspan effective width ignoring any
longitudinal reinforcement (method 1) ; the related flexural stiffness E a li (see
clause V.2.1 (5)) is assumed to be constant along the whole beam;
cracked section elastic analysis, based on a section in the region of the internal
support comprising the steel member together with the effectively anchored
reinforcement located within the effective width at the support (method 2) ; the
related flexural stiffness E a I2 (see clause V.2.1 (5)) is taken for a length of 15% of
the span on each side of each internal supports, whereas the values E a 11 are taken
elsewhere (I2 < II)
The "cracked" method (method 2) is more suitable for computer. However, this method
may be also used at the serviceability limit state to accurately determine the moments in
cases of crack control in the slab.
EC4
[4.5.3.4 (2)] (6) The elastic bending moments for a continuous composite beam of uniform depth within
each span may be modified :
- by reducing maximum hogging moments by amounts not exceeding
percentage of Table V.8 ;
-
the
or, in beams with all cross-sections in classes 1 or 2 only, by increasing hogging

moments amounts not exceeding 10% for "uncracked" elastic analysis, or 20%
for "cracked" elastic analysis.
For each load case internal forces and bending moments after redistribution should be in
equilibrium with loads. For composite cross-sections in class 3 or 4, moments applied to
the steel member should not be redistributed.
Table V.8
Limits to redistribution of hogging moments at supports (in terms of the

maximum percentage of the initial bending moment to be reduced)
Class of cross-section in hogging moment region
For "uncracked" elastic analysis
40%
30%
20%
10%
For "cracked" elastic analysis
25%
15%
10%
0%
158
Method 2
Method 1
^
7?
hl
.[
^ J.
Eall
uncracked sections
>
/777
,|.
flexural
stiffnesses
WW///
0,15 Li ^0,15 L 2
u *~T *
Eall
-Ealr
^l
EaIl
cracked sections
Details for method 2

beffi
distance between steel webs : 2 b2
Figure V.7 Definition of "uncracked" and "cracked" sections for elastic global analysis
V.2.4
Verification at ULS to vertical shear Vz.sd
V.2.4.1
Resistance of cross-section to vertical shear Vz,sd
EC4 [4.4.2.2]
EC3 [form. (5.20)]
The contribution of the concrete slab to the resistance to vertical shear is normally
neglected. Therefore, the design value of vertical shear force Vz.sd applied to the
composite section should satisfy the mies of Eurocode 3 (see Ref. 3, 5.4.6):
fv
V
z.Sd ^ V pl.z.Rd =
where Vpi.z.Rd
Av.z
fy
Ya
v.z
V3ya
is the design plastic shear resistance of structural steel section

about axis.
is the shear area of structural steel section about axis, given in
Table V.9,
is the yield strength of structural steel (see Table II.5),
is a partial safety factor (see Table 11.10).
159
Table V.9
EC3
Shear area Av
Cross-sections
for cross-sections
Loading
Av
[5.4.6 (2)]
Load
parallel
to web
Ay.z -
A - 2btf + (t w + 2r)tf
Vz.Sd
w>'-
1^
,V-
, _y.
l
Rolled
Load
parallel
to
flanges
^1
Av v
Vy.Sd
-.-t.
\1M
2btf + (t w + r) t w
I and
sections
Vz.Sd
Load
parallel
to web
Ay.z-
(h - 2tf) t w
Welded
-t,
*)
Load
parallel
to
flanges
A v .y =
i VySd -i, - t ,
t Wi
A - (h - 2tf) t w
i
*)
Vz.Sd
Load
parallel Av.z
to depth
A h
b+ h
4^4^
Rolled rectangular
hollow sections
of
uniform thickness
iVy.Sd
Load
parallel
to
breadth
v.y
A b
b+h
*)
Sd
Rolled circular
hollow sections of
uniform thickness
2A
Note : *) A is the total cross-sectional area
160
V.2.4.2
Stability of web to vertical shear Vz.sd for composite beams
EC3
[5.6.1 (l)]
(1) If webs are submitted to vertical shear force VZ-sd and if their ratio
EC3 [5.6.1 (4)]
exceeds the
limits given in Table V.10 then they shall be checked for resistance to shear buckling
and transverse stiffeners shall be provided at supports.
Table V.10 Limiting width-to-thickness ratio related to the shear buckling in web
Potential shear buckling to be
checked if webs have
Profiles
a) For unstiffened webs :
>69
tw
^7
b) For webs with transverse stiffener :
>30ejk
tw
The value of kT is defined in Table V.12

fy (N/mm2)
235
: = ^/235/fy (if t w < 40 mm)

(if 40 mm < t w < 100mm
275
355
0,92
0,81
0,96
0,84
(2) Nearly all hot-rolled I and sections do not need to be checked for shear buckling.
EC3
[5.6.2(1)]
(3) The shear buckling resistance may be verified according to Eurocode 3 (Ref. 3) using
either :
- the simple post-critical method, or
- the tension field method.
EC3
[5.6.2(3)]
The first method is presented hereafter.

(4) The simple post-critical method can be used for webs of I-section girders, with or without
intermediate transverse stiffeners, provided that the web has transverse stiffeners at the
supports.
161
(5) For webs withd/t w exceeding limits of Table V.10, the design value of the shear force
Vz.Sd shall satisfy :
T
EC3 [5.6.3(1)]
z.Sd ^
ba.Rd
d t
YMI
is the design shear buckling resistance.
where Vba.Rd
Table V.ll
ba
is the web depth (see Table V.10),
tw
is the web thickness,
^ba
is the simple post-critical shear strength (see Table V.ll),
Simple post-critical shear strength Tba

< 0,8
f
tba
f
-r (1,5 - 0,625 )
V3
*yw
V3
Notations :
> 1,2
0,8 < w < 1,2
fyw
is the yield strength of the web,
is the web slendemess.
yw
N/3
0,9
XVJ
(6) The web slendemess \ should be determined from :
Aw
37,4 ^k7
= ^235 /fy
where
, given in Table V.10,
is the buckling factor for shear given in Table V.12,

where a is the clear spacing between transverse stiffeners.
Table V.12 B uckling factor for shear kT
a/d
<1
>1
OO
,
1 |
kx
. 5,34
4+
-
Vsd
5,34 + ^ 5 -
5,34
Vsd d
\
V.
1
/
'
\-m ~
162
V.2.4.3
EC4
[4.7.2]
Stability of steel web to crippling
( 1 ) At internal supports of continuous composite beams designed using an effective web in

class 2 (see clause V.2.2.4.1 (3) and Figure V.6 2)) transverse stiffening should be
provided unless it can be shown that the unstiffened web has sufficient resistance to web
crippling (see Figure V.8). Application mies of Eurocode 3 (Ref. 3 : 5.7) are applicable
to non-composite steel flanges of composite beams and to the adjacent part of the web.
(2) The design value of the transverse force applied to the unstiffened web, Vz.sd , shall
satisfy :
EC3 [5.7.4 (1)]
where Ra_R<j
IS
the design crippling resistance of the web,
ss
is the length of stiff bearing, but s s / d < 0,2, (see Figure V.8),
fyw
is the yield strength of the web.
EC3 [Fig. 5.7.2]
Figure V.8 Load introduction and length of stiff bearing, ss
163
V.2.5
Verifications at ULS to bending moment Mv.Sd
V.2.5.1
Resistance of cross-section to Mv Sd
EC4
[4.4.1.1(3)] (1) The elastic global analysis may be applied to cross-sections of any class in order to
determine the design values of applied bending moments My.sd
For members in bending and in absence of shear force, the design values of applied
bending moment My.sd shall satisfy at each section :
My.Rd depending on classes of cross-section :
My.Sd -- My.Rd
where
Class 1 or 2
Class 3
Qass 4
= Mpl.y.Rd
= Mel.y.Rd
= Meff.y.Rd
Mpi.y.Rd
is the design plastic moment resistance of the cross-section

about y axis (see clause V.2.5.1(4)),
Mel.y.Rd
is the design elastic moment resistance of the cross-section

about y axis (see clause V.2.5.1(3)),
Meff.yRd
is the design effective moment resistance of the cross-section

about y axis (see clause V.2.5.1(3)).
EC4
[4.4.1.1(4)] (2) The evaluation of moment resistance of a composite cross-section is based on the
following assumptions :
- the tensile strength of concrete is neglected,
- plane cross-sections of the structural steel and reinforced concrete parts of a
composite member each remain plane.
EC4
[4.4.1.4]
(3) Where the effective composite section is in class 3 or class 4 (see chapter V.2.2) reference
should be made to Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4 : 4.4.1.4) to calculate the elastic resistance to
bending : Mei.y.Rd or Meff.y.Rd
(4) Where the effective composite section is in class 1 or class 2 (see chapter V.2.2), the
design bending resistance Mpi.y.Rd may be deteimined by plastic theory.
EC4
[4.4.l.2(2)&(4)] The following assumptions shall be made in the calculation of Mpi.y.Rd :
a) there is full interaction between structural steel, reinforcement and concrete;

b) the effective area of the structural steel member is stressed to its design yield
strength fy/ya in tension or compression (rectangular stress block) (see Table II.5
for fy) ;
164
c) the effective area of concrete in compression resists a design stress of 0,85 WYc
constant over the whole depth of the compressed part of concrete slab (rectangular
stress block) (see Table II. 1 for fck) ;
d) the effective areas of longitudinal steel reinforcement are stressed to their design
yield strengths fsk/Ys in tension and in compression (rectangular stress block) (see
Table II.8 for fsk). Alternatively steel reinforcement in compression in concrete
slab may be neglected;
e) profiled steel sheeting in compression shall be neglected;
and where ya , yc and ys are partial safety factors at ULS (see Table 11.10).
EC4
[4.4.1.3(2)]
These hypothesis for calculation Mpi.y.Rd are defined for a composite cross-section with
full shear interaction. When a partial shear connection is used for the composite beam,
the plastic moment resistance is calculated with a reduced value of the compressive force
in the concrete and two plastic neutral axes have to be considered : one axis in the slab
and a second axis within the steel section (see chapter V.2.7.2.2 for details).
Typical plastic stress distributions related to different positions of plastic neutral axis and
different values of Mpi.y.Rd are given in Table V.l3 for the two types of bending
moments : sagging bending moments (e.g. in simply-supported beams) and hogging
bending moment (e.g. usually on supports of continuous beams). The calculation
method for Mpi.y.Rd depends on the location of the plastic neutral axis.
(5) Mpi.y.Rd for sagging bending moment (see Table V.13) :
The presence of profiled steel decking, when running transverse to the main span,
reduces the area of concrete that may resist compression forces. Hence, the maximum
possible depth of concrete in compression is he, which is the depth of concrete flange
above upper flange of profiled steel decking of depth, hp.
Moreover, account may be taken of the concrete contained within the ribs of the profiled
decking in cases where the ribs run parallel to the beams, but this benefit is usually
neglected.
(6) Mpi y.Rd for hogging bending moment (see Table V.13) :
The composite cross-section consists of the steel section together with the effectively
anchored reinforcement located within the effective width of the concrete flange at
support. The reinforcement is located at height a, above the top flange of the steel beam.
(7) In the classification of cross-sections (see chapter V.2.2), it may result that the flange
belongs to class 1 or 2 and the web to class 3. Nevertheless this cross-section may be
assigned to class 2, if the effective web area is applied for hogging bending moment as
explained in clause V.2.2.4.1 and in Figure V.6.
165
Table V.13 a)
Plastic stress distributions, positions of plastic neutral axis and plastic

bending moment resistance Mpi.y.Rd for sagging bending moment
If F c > F a then the neutral axis lies in the concrete flange :
hcf
+
hp
beff
3=
0,85 f c k /
** '-
heet*
:hp
h a /2
-)M P ,
.y.Rd
hJ2
M
zr =
<ht
beff0,85fck/yt
Mpi.y.Rd -
(\l.
a
a + h cc + h pn -
2J
. 2
If F a > F c > F w then the neutral axis lies in the steel flange :
hcfhp
0,85f ck /Y r
0,85f ck /Y r
-beffPl
^l2Fal J
Fal
tffhr
(ha
V2
Mpi.y.Rd
fyft 2 fy/Ya J.
Jy/%fy/%\
z cc = V( Fa a - Fc ;c ) - ^ - + hc c + hpD
2bf y
"Fa
Fa2
, with (hp + he) < z c < (hp + he + tf)
rzc+hp^
h
+ hT " ( F . - F c )
2
Mpi.y.Rd = F a ^- ++-^
If Fc < Fw then the neutral axis lies in the web :

0,85f ck /Y r
-beff-
hcf hp
tf
ha/2
he
hp
zcw
Fal
~tv
ha/2
0,85f ck /Y r
Fa
hhfyty
fy///
Hence, the depth of web in compression, z c w and the neutral axis depth, z c :
zcw -
and
2 t w fy/Ya
Mpi.y.Rd -M a p l.y.Rd + F C
(ha
,_
z c = hp + he + z,
cw
Fc2
2 J 4 t w fy/Ya
hc
Notations : see Table V.13 b)
166
Mpi.y.Rd
Table V.13 b)
Plastic stress distributions, positions of plastic neutral axis and plastic

bending moment resistance Mpi.y.Rd for hogging bending moment
If F a > F s > F w then the neutral axis lies in the steel flange
-f
hcf hp
WYS F
*
rs
b eff
a
Fai
PI
2Fai
|y/%fy/%.
c
=(F
Mpi.y.Rd
Fa
Fa2
sk/Y s
| - fy/Ya
hit
- F s ) - ^ + hc+h
2bfy
M pl.y.Rd -= rF,a l " ^
-+a "(F a -F s ) a +
zc-hc-hp
If Fs < Fw then the neutral axis lies in the steel web :
beff
hcflp
sk/Y s
T"
he
:hp
Fai
Zcw
ha/2
sk/Y s
ha/2
-)
Mpi.y.Rd
Fa2
jfy/Yajfy/^
[^///{
Hence, the depth of web in tension, z c w and the neutral axis depth, z c :
= -2
2twfy/Ya
Mpi.y.Rd =M ap i.y.Rd+F s
z c = hp + he + z c w
and
;H
F 2s
1
4 t w fy/Y a
Notations : The resistances of the different parts of the composite beam should be expressed as follows :
Fa
- resistance of the structural steel section in tension or compression :
=Aafv/Y
a*y
- resistance of the web of the structural steel section in tension or compression :

Fw = (ha-2tf)tw
fy/Ya
F c = h c b e f f 0,85 f c k /,
- resistance of the concrete section in compression :

- resistance of the reinforcement steel section in tension :
F s A s fsl/;
- the plastic moment resistance of the steel section alone :
Mapl.y.Rd = W p l . y fy/Ya
where A a and A s
are the cross-sectional areas of steel section and reinforcement (see Table IV.6),
fy
is the yield strength of steel profile (see Table II.5),
fck
is the compression strength of the concrete (see Table II.1),
fsk
is the yield strength of reinforcement steel (see Table II.8),
Wpiy
is the plastic section modulus of steel section bent about yy axis (see Table VI.3a),
Ya, Yc and 8 are partial safety factors (see Table 11.10)

" - " means compression
"+" means tension
167
V.2.5.2
Stability of member to My.sd
EC4 [4.6]
V.2.5.2.1 Generalities
EC4 [4.6.1]
(1) A steel flange that is attached to a concrete or composite slab by shear connection in
accordance with chapter V.2.7 may be assumed to be laterally stable, provided that the
overall width of the slab is not less than the depth of the steel member. Therefore simplysupported beams with beff ^ 2 h a and with adequate shear connectors do not need to be
checked against lateral-torsional buckling.
(2) All other steel flanges in compression shall be checked for lateral stability. In hogging
moment regions of cantilever beams and of continuous composite beams the lower
flange is subjected to compression. The tendency of the lower flange to buckle laterally
is restrained by the distorsional stiffness of the cross-section ("inverted U-frame action":
see Figure V.9).
(3) Web encasement may be assumed to contribute to resistance to lateral-torsional buckling
(see Table V.14).
(4) In checks for lateral stability of beams built unpropped, the bending moment at any
cross section shall be taken as the sum of the moment applied to the composite member
and the moment applied to its structural steel component.
V.2.5.2.2 Check of lateral-torsional buckling without direct calculation

EC4 [4.6.2]
( 1 ) A continuous beam or a beam in a frame that is composite throughout its length may be
designed without additional lateral bracing and without direct calculation for lateral
stability when the following conditions are satisfied :
a) adjacent spans do not differ in length by more than 20 % of the shorter span or
where there is a cantilever, its length does not exceed 15 % of the adjacent span :
Li
L">
0,83<^-<1,20
L,
L3
L- < 1,15 L
and
b) the loading on each span is uniformly distributed and the design permanent load
exceeds 40 % of the total design load :
qd
t
i j j
3t(f a c tored variable loads)
J t
jgd
. (factored permanent loads)
gd > 0,40(gd + qd)
or.
gd > - q d
c) The top flange of the steel member is attached to a reinforced concrete or

<-rvmrv-citi> clsh h v chpar r n n n p r t n r in rrnrHanrp with nhanter V . 2 . 7 .
168
d) The longitudinal spacing of studs or rows of studs, s, is such that for uncased
beams :
s / b < 0,02dha/twJ
Where
is the diameter of studs, and
b, h a and t w
are as shown in Figure V.9.
a/4
B
H
Ah
cipr-^
-FTTH
* I f 1-L
k
,\ M- s ,\ s k
w_^
tf
nrL
\ *
Figure V.9
Inverted U-frame action
e) The same slab is also attached to another supporting member approximately

parallel to the composite beam considered, to form an inverted-U frame of width a
(see Figure V.9).
f) If the slab is composite, it spans between the two supporting members of the
inverted-U frame considered.
g) For edge beams where the slab is simply-supported at the composite beam
considered, fully anchored top reinforcement extends over the length AB shown in
Figure V.9. The area of this reinforcement should be such that the resistance of the
slab to hogging transverse bending, per unit length of beam, is not less than
f y t w / 4 Y i where the notation is as in d) above, fy is the yield strength of
structural steel (see Table II.5) and Ya is the related partial safety factor (see Table
11.10).
h) At each support of the steel member, its bottom flange is laterally restrained (e.g.
bracing or transverse members) and its web is stiffened. Elsewhere, the web is
unstiffened.
i) The slab proportions are typical of those in general building design (see chapter
VII). A minimum value of flexural stiffness of the solid or composite slab may be
evaluated according to Eurocode 4 (see Ref. 4 : clause 4.6.2(j)).
j) The depth h a of the steel member does not exceed the limit given in Table V.14
for IPE sections according to Euronorm 19-57 (IPE 80 to IPE 600) and for HE
sections according to Euronorm 53-62 (HE A, HE and HE M 100 to 1000).
Similar shapes or hot-rolled section to IPE and HE sections given in Table V.14
may be identified with the mies of Eurocode 4 (see Ref. 4 : clause 4.5.6 (k)).
(2) If any of the conditions ( a) to j) ) presented in previous clause V.2.5.2.2(1) is not
fulfilled, a check for lateral-torsional buckling according to Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4) is
required and summarized in following chapter V.2.5.2.3.
169
Table V.14
Maximum depth h a in [mm] of the steel member to avoid lateral-torsional

buckling in the hogging moment region
ha <
i
1
|
-)ff
>
1 Msd
__
[ _J
1-,
cl
1 MSd
1 ^
ha
ha
Steel grades
Steel grades
Profile
S 235
S 275
S 355
S 235
S 275
S 355
IPE
HE
600
800
550
700
400
650
800
1000
750
900
600
850
V.2.5.2.3 Buckling resistance moment

EC4 [4.6.3]
(1) F or members with appropriate non-dimensional slendemess ^ <0,40 no allowance

for lateral-torsional buckling is necessary. The value of Lx is defined hereafter.
(2) F or laterally unrestrained members in bending, the design value for the bending moment
about major axis (My.sd) shall satisfy :
Mb.Rd depending on classes of cross-section :
Qass 1 or 2
My.Sd -- Mb.Rd
where
Class 3
/ L T Mpl.y.Rd Y a
XLT Mel.y.Rd Ya
YRd
YRd
Class 4
= XLT Mel.y.Rd
Mfoj^j
is the design buckling resistance moment of members in

bending,
XLT
is the reduction factor for lateral-torsional buckling,
Mpl.y.Rd
is the plastic resistance moment about y axis defined in chapter

V.2.5.1,
Mel.y.Rd
is the elastic resistance moment about y axis defined in chapter

V.2.5.1,
are partial safety factors of steel section (see Table 11.10).
Ya-YRd
170
(3) The value of %LT for the appropriate non-dimensional slendemess ^ may be
detemiined from :
1
XLT=fpLT) =
+- LT
, but %LT --1
where <)LT = 0,5 il + a L T (XLT - 0,2 + XL T )

CCLT
is the imperfection factor for lateral-torsional buckling;

aLT should be taken as :
- for rolled section
LT = 0,21 (buckling curve a),
- for welded section
CtLT = 0,49 (buckling curve c).
(4) The non-dimentional slendemess XLj may be determined from :

^ depending on the class of cross-section :
Class 1 or 2
. | M pi-y
^LT
EC4
[4.6.3(4)]
i MCT
Class 3 or 4
(M e i.y
~ Mcr
where Mpi.y and Mei.y
are the values of Mpiy.Rd and Mei.y.Rd (see chapter

V.2.5.1) when partial safety factors Ya, Yc and Ys are taken
as 1,0.
Mcr
is the elastic critical moment of the gross cross-section for

lateral-torsional buckling. The calculation of Mcr is
detailed in Eurocode 4 (see Ref. 4 : Annex B ) but if the
composite beam does not comply with the conditions of
that annex B, the value of Mcr could be determined from
literature or numerical analysis or, conservatively, from
Eurocode 3 (see Ref. 3 : Annex F).
171
V.2.6
Verification at ULS to combined (Vz,sd> My.Sd)
V.2.6.1
Resistance of cross-section to (Vz.sd> My.sd)
EC4 [4.4.3]
( 1 ) If the design value of the vertical shear force

Vz.Sd<0,5VpU.Rd
where Vp^.Rd,
is the design plastic shear resistance about minor (zz) axis (see
chapter V.2.4.1),
no reduction needs to be made in the resistance moments. With this condition the design
value of bending moment My.sd shall be verified according to chapter V.2.5.
EC4
[4.4.3(1)]
(2) For the resistance of cross-section submitted to combined vertical shear force Vz.sd and
bending moment My.sd if the design value of vertical shear force
v
z.Sd > 0 ' 5 vpl.z.Rd (high shear)

then interaction between vertical shear force and bending moment shall be considered.
The plastic resistance moment should thus be calculated using a reduced design yield
strength fy.red for the shear area A v (see Figure V.10). Then, if there is no shear buckling
problem, the following interaction criterion (illustrated in Figure V.ll) should be
satisfied by the design value of bending moment My.sd at each cross-section :
EC4 [4.4.3(2)]
M y . S d < M V.Rd
where
but
M V.Rd
< M y.Rd
My.Rd = M f R d + ( M R d - M f R d ) ( l - p z ) i s the reduced design plastic

resistance moment allowing for the shear force,
My.Rd
is the design bending moment resistance of the cross-section
about y axis (see chapter V.2.5.1),
Mf.Rd
is the design plastic bending resistance of a cross-section
consisting of the flanges only ("flanges" meaning both
structural steel flanges and reinforcement steel of concrete
flange), with effective sections as used in the calculation of
My.Rd,
In Figure V.10, fy.red 0= fy O - Pz)) is applied on the shear area A v . z of the profile (for
Av.z values, see Table V.7).
Figure V.10 Normal stress distribution for M-V interaction with hogging bending
moment
172
EC4 [Fig. 4.6]
Vi i
VpLz.Rd
0,5 VpLz.Rd
M
0
Mf.Rd
My.Rd
Figure V . l l Resistance in bending and vertical shear in absence of shear buckling
EC4 [4.4.5]
EC3
[5.6.1(1)]
V.2.6.2
Stability of web to (Vz.sd, My.sd)
(1) If webs are submitted to combined shear force Vz.sd and bending moment My.sd and if
they have ratio
exceeding the limits given in Table V.10 then they shall be checked
for resistance to shear buckling and transverse stiffeners shall be provided at supports.
EC3
[5.6.1(4)]
(2) The interaction of shear buckling resistance and moment resistance is shown in Table
V.15 according to the simple post-critical method.
Table V.15
Interaction of shear buckling resistance and moment resistance with the

simple post-critical method
EC3
^~
[Fig. 5.6.4(a)]
173
EC3
[5.6.7.2]
(3) The web may be assumed to be satisfactory if one of the three following checks A), B)
or C) (according to the loading level of Vz sd and My.sd) shall be satisfied:
A ) If the design value of bending moment
EC3 [5.6.7.2 (1)]

EC4 [4.4.5 (a)]
My.sd ^ Mf.Rd
where Mf.Rd
is the design plastic moment resistance of a cross-section

consisting of the flanges only ("flanges" meaning both
structural steel flanges and reinforcement steel of concrete
flange), with effective sections as used in the calculation of
My.Rd (see chapter V.2.5.1),
then the design value of vertical shear force shall satisfy :

Vz.Sd < V ba.Rd
where
EC3
[5.6.7.2 (2)]
Vba.Rd
is the design shear resistance buckling of the web according to

simple post-critical method (see chapter V.2.4.2).
B) the design values of bending moment and vertical shear force

M y sd > M f.Rd and
V z . S d <0,50V b a . R d
then the bending moment shall satisfy :

My.Sd -- My.Rd
where My.Rd
EC3
[5.6.7.2 (3)]
is the design bending moment resistance of the cross-section

about y axis depending on the class of cross-section (see
chapter V.2.5.1).
C) [the design values of bending moment and vertical shear force

My.sd > M f.Rd and
V z .sd>0,50V ba .Rd
then the bending moment and the shear force shall satisfy the three following
checks:
and,
My.Sd -- My.Rd
and,
z.Sd -- V ba.Rd
174
EC4
[6.1.1 (1)]
V.2.7
Verification of shear connectors at ULS to longitudinal shear
V.2.7.1
Generalities
(1) Shear connectors and transverse reinforcement shall be provided throughout the length
of the beam to transmit the longitudinal shear force V between the concrete slab and the
steel beam at the ultimate limit state, ignoring the effect of natural bond between the
materials. The total design longitudinal shear force W (see chapter V.2.7.2) have to be
resisted by shear connectors :
we <PRd
where PRd
EC4
[6.1.1 (7)]
is the design shear resistance of shear connectors (see chapter

V.2.7.3).
(2) Longitudinal shear failure and splitting of the concrete slab due to concentrated forces
applied by the shear connectors shall be prevented. The total design longitudinal shear
force W( (see chapter V.2.7.2) to be resisted by shear connectors shall satify :
V{ <VRd
where VRd
EC4
[4.5.1 (4)]
is the design resistance of any surface of potential shear failure

in concrete flange (see chapter V.2.7.5).
(3) The effects of slip and uplift may be neglected at interfaces between steel and concrete at
which shear connection is provided in accordance with rules about headed studs
EC4 [6.1.1 (6)] presented in this chapter V.2.7. Headed studs may be assumed to provide sufficient
resistance to uplift unless the shear connection is subjected to direct tension.
EC4
[6.1.2]
(4) Headed studs may be considered as ductile within certain limits (see chapter V.2.7.2.2).
EC4
[4.1.2(6)]
EC4
[6.1.1 (3)]
(5) The concepts "full shear connection" and " partial shear connection" are applicable
only to beams in which plastic theory is used for calculating bending resistances of
critical cross-sections (i.e. for class 1 or class 2 cross-sections).
A span of a beam or a cantilever has full shear connection when increase in the number
of shear connectors would not increase the design bending resistance of the member (see
chapter V.2.7.2.1).
Otherwise the shear connection is partial if the design ultimate loading is less than that
which could be carried by the member if full shear connection were provided. Limits to
the used partial shear connection with ductile connectors are given in chapter V.2.7.2.2.
(6) This chapter V.2.7 focuses on headed studs; Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4) should be consulted for
mies about other types of shear connectors listed in chapter II.3.4.
EC4 [6.2]
V.2.7.2
Design longitudinal shear force
The mies presented hereafter applies to beams in which plastic theory is used for
resistance of cross-sections : Mpi.Rd is the plastic resistance moment of a class 1 or class 2
cross-section (see chapter V.2.5.1). For beams with cross-sections in class 3 or 4 and for
which elastic theory is used, refer to Eurocode 4 (see Ref. 4 : 6.2.2).
175
V.2.7.2.1 Full shear connection

EC4 [6.2.1.1]
( 1 ) For simply supported beams :

Ref. 8 [4.6]
In simply supported composite beams subject to uniform load, the elastic shear flow
defining the shear transfer between the slab and the beam is linear, increasing to a
maximum at the ends of the beam. B eyond the elastic limit of the shear connectors, there
is a transfer of force along the beam such that, at failure, each of the shear connectors is
assumed to resist equal force. This implies that the shear connectors possess adequate
deformation capacity, i.e. is ductile.
EC4 [6.2.1.1 (1)] In the plastic design of single span composite beams and for full shear connection, the
total design longitudinal shear force, V; to be transferred between the points of zero
moment (at simple end supports) and maximum sagging moment should be the smaller
of the resistance of the concrete section and of reinforcement in compression, (F c + F s )
and the resistance of the structural steel section F a (see Figure V.12) :
V = F c f
where
/
F cf = minimum A a - ^
la
ck
, A
b e f f h c O , 8 5 ^ + A^
)c
sk
is J
Aa
is the area of structural steel section (see Table IV.6),
beff
is the effective width of concrete slab (see chapter V.2.1),
he
is the maximum possible depth of concrete in compression (sec

chapter V.2.5.1),
Ase
is the effective area of any longitudinal reinforcement in

compression that is included in the calculation of the sagging
bending resistance,
fck
is the compression strength of the concrete (see Table II. 1),
fsk
Ya, Yc and 5 are partial safety factors at utimate limit states for the structural
steel, concrete and reinforcement steel (see Table 11.10).
EC4
[6.2.1.1 (2)]
(2) For continuous beams :

For full shear connection, the total design longitudinal shear force W to be resisted by
shear connectors between the point of maximum sagging bending moment and an
intermediate support or a restrained end support shall be calculated as follows (see Figure
V.13) :
f.yp
f,sk
V, =F f +A
+ A ap
ap
where Fcf
is as defined above in clause V.2.7.2.1 (1) and is taken as zero

for cantilever,
is the effective area of longitudinal slab reinforcement used in
the calculation of the hogging bending resistance (at support)
(see chapter V.2.5.1),
176
EC4 [4.2.1 (4)]
is the effective area of any profiled steel sheeting included in

the calculation of the hogging bending resistance, only if ribs
run parallel to the beam and if the detail design ensures
continuity of strength across joints in the sheeting and
appropiate resistance to longitudinal shear,
*ap
fsk
lyp
is the yield strength of the profiled steel sheeting (see Table

.9),
Ys and Yap
are partial safety factors at utimate limit states for the

reinforcement steel and the profiled steel decking (see Table
11.10).
Qd
+ i
+ +~q,
MpLRd
-t
Jh
-?'
(a) Moments in simply-supported beam

Fcf
S2SZZ
V M pi-Rd) sagging
Vi
/faff?
Jr-
Fcf
*
F^(Mpi.Rd) sagging
Vi = Fcf = minimum (Fa ; F c + F s )
r,rj;/;v;^
V
e
/-
-K
(b) Internal force distribution
Figure V.12 Calculation of the longitudinal shear force V^ in simply supported beams
177
EC4
[6.1.1 (2)] (3) The number of shear connectors for full shear connection shall be at least equal to the
design longitudinal shear force Wg, divided by the design resistance of a connector, PRd
(see chapter V.2.7.3). Therefore, the number of shear connectors in the zone under
consideration is :
Nf =
V,
PRd
PRd takes into account the influence of the shape of the profiled sheeting, as given in
chapter V.2.7.3.
+ +
+ +
+ +
<ld
(a) Moments in continuous beam

Fcf
Vf
^
r a ^
V M pi-Rd) sagging
Vi = Fcf + F s + F;ap
We = Fcf = minimum (F a ; F c + F s )
We
ET F.>
(Mpi.Rd)sagging-
-r
(Mpi.Rd) h o g g i n g
ibi Internal force distribution
Figure V.13 Calculation of the longitudinal shear force Wg in continuous beams
178
V.2.7.2.2 Partial shear connection with ductile connectors

EC4 [6.2.1.2]
EC4
[6.1.1 (3)]
(1) Partial shear connection may be used if all cross-sections are in Class 1 or 2.
EC4
[6.2.1.2 (l)] (2) If connectors are ductile, it may be assumed that sufficient slip at interface between steel
and concrete can occur at the ultimate limit state for moments of resistance at critical
sections to be calculated from plastic theory (see chapter V.2.5.1).
EC4
[6.1.2]
(3) Headed studs (see chapter II.5.5, Figure II.4) may be considered as ductile in having
sufficient deformation capacity to justify the assumption of ideal plastic behaviour, if a
minimum degree of shear connection (expressed as N / Nf ratio) is provided (see Figure
V.14).
(4) The moment resistance of a composite beam designed for partial shear connection may
be determined by one of the following methods (see Figure V.15) :
a) Method 1 :
Linear interpolation method,
b) Method 2 :
Plastic stress block (or equilibrium) method.
EC4
[6.2.1.2 (3)] (5) Method 1 is more conservative than method 2 but is a simple method of determining the
moment resistance. The relationship is defined by the line AC in Figure V.15. The force
transferred by shear connectors, F c is :
Fc =
M S d -M a p i.Rd
M pl.Rd -MapLRd
where Msd
Fcf
is the applied design sagging bending moment (Msd ^ Mpi.Rd),
Mapi.Rd
is the design plastic resistance to bending of the structural steel

section alone (Wpi fy / 3 ) (see Table V.13 b) : Notations),
Mpi.Rd
is the design plastic sagging moment resistance of composite

cross-section with full shear connection (see Table V.13 a)),
Fcf
is the longitudinal shear force required

connection (see chapter V.2.7.2.1).
179
for
full
shear
EC4
[6.1.2 (2)
to (4)]
Ref.7
(Fig. 6.14)
L[m]
0
5
10
15
Minimum degree of shear connection :
In all c a s e s | N / N f >0,4
case A :
/ Nf > 0,4 + 0,03 L
where 3 At > Ab
case :
/ Nf > 0,25 + 0,03 L
where At = Ab
case C :
/ Nf > 0,04 L
where At = Ab
where
At
is the top flange area,
Ab
is the bottom flange area,
is the number of shear connectors,

is the number of shear connectors for full shear connection (see
clause V.2.7.2.1 (3)).
Nf
Conditions of ductile behaviour of headed studs:

case C :
cases A and :
h>4d
and,
D h > 76 mm
2) 1 9 m m < d < 2 0 m m
3) rolled I or H steel section (At = Ab),
4) composite concrete slab with profiles
steel
sheeting
that
spans
perpendicular to the beam and is
continuous across it,
5) one stud per rib of sheeting, placed
centrally within the rib,
6) deck profile with b 0 / h p > 2 and
2) 16mm < d < 2 2 m m
**<
h < 60 mm
7) and, the longitudinal shear force F c is
calculated by linear interpolation
method (clause V.2.7.2.2 (5)).
Figure V.14 Minimum degree of shear connection allowing ductile behaviour of

headed studs
180
EC4 [Fig. 6.1]
M sd
i M pl.Rd
LO
"Ductile" shear-connectors
"Rigid"
shear-connectors
Mapl.Rd
M pl.Rd
steel
cross-section
alone I 4.
Fc = 0
0,4
Lower limit on -t
(EC4)
Nf/
**- or IL
1,0 F cf
Nf
Degree of shear connection
Figure V.15 Relation between F c and Msd for partial shear connection
The design longitudinal shear force Wg can be determined from Figures V.12 or V.13
with Fcf replaced by the force transferred by the shear connectors, F c (see chapter
V.2.7.2.1).
On the other hand, if F c is determined for a known distribution of shear connectors
( F c = P R d ) ' then the maximum value of the reduced moment resistance MRd
(< Mpi.Rd) calculated from the same linear interpolation method, should satisfy :
M
Sd -- M Rd = Mapi.Rd +7^-(M p l .R d -MapijRd)

**cf
(6) In Method 2 the force transferred to the concrete is determined by the longitudinal
resistance of shear connectors. Equilibrium equations can be established explicitly in a
similar manner to chapter V.2.5.1. The relationship is defined by the curve ABC in
Figure V.l6.
Ref. 7 (p. 53)
A good approximation of the reduced bending moment resistance of composite crosssection MRd (< Mpi.Rd) can be obtained by considering the moment axial force
interaction for an I-section according to Eurocode 3 (Ref. 3) (see Figure V.16) and Msd
should satisfy :
M S d < M R d = F c ( h a + 2 h p + h c ) / 2 + l,llM a p l .R d 1 ~
where Msd
Mpi.Rd
'a J
is the applied design sagging bending moment (Msd ^ Mpi Rd),
is the design plastic sagging moment resistance of composite
cross-section with full shear connection (see Table V.13 a)),
181
is the force transferred by shear connectors (F c = P R d ) (see

chapter V.2.7.3),
N<Nf
Fa
is the axial resistance of steel section (= A a fy / ) (see Table

V.13 b) : Notations),
MapLRd
is the design plastic resistance to bending of the structural steel

section alone (= Wpi iy Iy-) (see Table V.13 b) : Notations).
0,85; ck| /Y c
0,85 f c k /
rpTic--
h,
P=3
33*-
Fc
M RRd
ha
Fc 0
^M,
iiaL
strain ()
Zc
zs
where
L ^ a L ^
stresses
is the position of first plastic neutral axis in concrete,

is the position of second plastic neutral axis in steel section.
Figure V.16 MRd, reduced bending moment resistance of composite

because of partial shear connection
V.2.7.3
M apl.Rd (Fc)
cross-section
Design shear resistance of headed studs
V.2.7.3.1 Headed studs in solid slabs
'
^
) (
Figure V.17 Composite beam with solid slab

EC4
[6.3.2.1]
(1) The design shear resistance of an automatically welded headed stud with a normal weld
collar, should be determined from :
[form. 6.13 and 6.14]
PRd = minimum 0 , 8 ^ -
Yv \
where
fu
;
J
0,29ad'
yfk
Yv
is the specified ultimate tensile strength of the material of the

stud but not greater than 500 N/mm 2 . The commonly
specified strength is 450 N/mm2 (see chapter II.5.5),
182
is the diameter of the shank of the stud (d < 22 mm) (see

Figure V.l7),
is the overall height of the stud (see F igure V.17),
fck
is the characteristic cylinder compressive strength of the

concrete at the age considered (see Table II. 1),
is the mean value of the secant modulus of the concrete (see
Table II. 1),
Ecm
a = 0 . 2 i - + l],
,d J
f h
,
if
>4,
d
06= 1
Yv
Table V.16
if 3 < < 4 ,
d
is the partial safety factor given in Table 11.10.
Design resistance PRd [kN] of headed studs with h / d > 4
First equation of
PRd with fu =
Ref.7
[Table 6.6]
Second equation of PRd with = 1,0
450
500
C 25/30
C 30/37
C 35/45
C 40/50
C 45/55
22
109,4
121,6
98,1
110,0
121,6
(132,9)
(142,9)
19
81,6
90,7
73,1
82,1
90,7
(99,1)
(106,6)
16
57,9
64,3
51,9
58,2
64,3
(70,3)
(75,6)
Diameter d
[mm]
The values in brackets denote values which exceed those given by first equation of PRd;
the lower value should therefore be used in design.
(2) A normal weld collar should comply requirements shown in F igure II.4. Moreover the
weld should have a regular form and be fused to the shank of the stud.
V.2.7.3.2 Headed studs in composite slabs with profiled steel sheeting

EC4 [6.3.3]
EC4
[6.3.3.1]
(1) Profiled steel sheeting with ribs parallel to the supporting beam :
-bo.
\ centroidal axis of sheet
Figure V.18 Beams with steel decking ribs parallel to the beam
Where profiled steel sheeting with ribs parallel to the supporting beam is used (see F igure
V.18), the headed studs are located within the region of concrete that has the shape of a
haunch.
183
The design shear resistance should be taken as their resistance in a solid slab (PRd from
chapter V.2.7.3.1) multiplied by the reduction factor kg given by the following
expression :
EC4 [form. 6.15]
where bo
h
is the mean width of the ribs (see Figure V.18),

is the overall height of the stud, but should satisfy :
h < hp + 75 mm
is the overall depth of the sheeting excluding embossments.
EC4
[6.3.3.2]
(2) Profiled steel sheeting with ribs transverse to the supporting beam
Figure V.19 Beams with steel decking ribs transverse to the beam
Where the headed studs are placed in ribs perpendicular to the supporting beam (sec
Figure V.19), the design shear resistance should be taken as their resistance in a solid slab
(PRd from chapter V.2.7.3.1) multiplied by the reduction factor k t given by the
following expression :
[form. 6.16]
where N r
is the number of stud connectors in one rib at a beam

intersection, not to exceed 2 in computations,
is the overall depth of the sheeting excluding embossments and,
hp < 85 mm
bo
is the mean width of the ribs (see Figure V.18) and,

bo ^ hp
is the overall height of the stud, but should satisfy :
h < hp + 75 mm
Ref.7
[6.3.2.2]
and
kt
< 1,0
if N r = 1
< 0,8
ifN r > 2
184
for studs welded

through the steel decking
V.2.7.4
EC4
[6.1.3 (3)]
Spacing and detailing of headed studs
(1) Headed studs in accordance with chapter V.2.7.3 may be placed uniformly over a length
L c r between adjacent critical cross-sections (see chapter V.l and Table V.l) provided that
a) all critical sections in the span considered are in class 1 or class 2,
b) N / Nf satisfies the limits for partial shear connection given in chapter V.2.7.2.2,
when L is replaced by L cr , and,
c) the plastic resistance moment of the composite section does not exceed 2,5 times
the plastic resistance moment of the steel member alone (Mpi.Rd < 2,5 Mapi.Rd)
(see Tables V.13 a) and b) respectively for Mpi.Rd a n d Mapi.Rd),
EC4
[4.1.2 (5)]
For checking the resistance to longitudinal shear critical cross-sections also include free
ends of cantilever.
(2) Requirements for dimension of headed studs and its normal weld collar are given in
Figure II.4.
EC4
[6.1.2]
(3) When headed studs are expected to be ductile and develop sufficient deformation
capacity, specific requirements are provided in chapter V.2.7.2.2 (see Figure V.14).
EC4
[6.4.1.5 (2)] (4) When a steel compression flange (e.g. due to sagging bending moment) that would
otherwise be in a lower class, is assumed to be in class 1 or class 2 because of restraint
from shear connectors, requirements of spacing for shear connectors are shown in
chapter V.2.2.3 (see Figure V.4).
(5) For solid slabs, requirements of spacing for headed studs are given in Figure V.20.
mesh
shear connector
<
>20mm
P--2mrS
Figure V.20 Detailing of shear connectors in solid slab
185
>5d,
< 6 h c and,
< 800 mm
steel beam
bo>hp
1~
ULI
I
-Hr
>2d
fe=
h c >50mm''
< 85 mm
-*
-f-
-rh^_. i
a) Decking ribs transverse to the beam
AIA
-^5-
; /_/>....;
b) Decking ribs parallel to the beam
Ref.7
(5.4.1)
Figure V.21 Types of composite beams with composite slabs

(6) For composite slabs, more detailing mies are provided hereafter about welding and
spacing of studs welded through profiled steel decking :
When the decking is continuous and transverse to the beam (Figure V.21), the correct
placement of studs in relation to the decking rib is of great importance. The most
important mies for welded headed studs are repeated here : welded headed studs are
normally between 19 mm and 22 mm in diameter. Stud diameters up to 19 mm are
generally used for through deck welding only. For welded studs upper flange of the steel
EC4 [6.4.3.1 (2)] beam should be clean, dry and unpainted. For satisfactory welding, the deck thickness
should not exceed 1,25 mm if galvanized, or 1,5 mm if ungalvanized. In all cases,
welding trials shall be performed. The following limitations should also be observed :
EC4 [6.4..2 (4)]
The flange thickness of the supporting beams should not be less than 0,4 times the
diameter of the stud, unless the studs are located directly over the web.
EC4 [6.4.3.1 (3)]

EC4 [6.4.1.2 (2)]
After welding, the top of the stud should extend at least 2 times diameter of the
stud above the top of the decking ribs and should have a concrete cover of at least
20 mm.
EC4 [6.4.1.6 (2)]
- The minimum distance between the edge of the stud and edge of the steel flange is
20 mm.
EC4 [6.4.2 (3)]
- The transverse spacing between studs should not be less than 4 times the diameter
of the stud.
EC4 [6.4.3 (3)]

EC4 [6.4.1.5 (3)]
- The longitudinal spacing between studs should not be less than 5 times the stud
diameter and not greater than 6 times the overall slab depth nor 800 mm.
186
Ref.7
(5.4.2)
For composite slabs, additional requirements for steel decking :

Studs must be properly placed in decking ribs. A summary of these mies are shown in
Figure V.22, and listed below :
- Studs are usually attached in every decking rib, in alternate ribs, or in some cases,
in pairs in every rib. If more studs are needed than are given by a standard pattern
these additional studs should be positioned in equal numbers near the two ends of
the span.
- Some modem decks have a central stiffener in the rib which means that it is
impossible to attach the stud centrally. In such cases it is recommended that studs
are attached to the side of each stiffener closest to the end of the beam shown as
the favourable side in Figure V.22. This means that a change in location at
midspan is needed.
- Alternatively, studs can be "staggered" so that they are attached on each side of
the stiffener in adjacent ribs.
EC4
[7.6.1.4 (3)]
- At discontinuities in the decking, studs should be attached in such a way that both
edges of the decking at the discontinuity are properly "anchored". If the decking
is considered to act as transverse reinforcement this may mean placing studs in
zigzag pattern along the beam, as shown in Figure V.22.
- The minimum distance of the centre of the stud to the edge of the decking is
defined as 2,2 times the stud diameter.
187
Ref. 7 [Fig. 5.5]
mesh
=h c +hp
^r-
favourable side
unfavourable side
>20mm
W -v
Fk 30_mm
r . . I J : ____
.> 2d
>2i
-\
-stiffener in decking
>5d
shear connector
> 20 mm J l
>2,2d
>4d
hc
~ 50 mm
"end of span~ < 5 mm
steel beam
butt joint
in decking
>2,2d
>2C mm i _ _
mesh
>20mm
-Hr
->2d
hs
^J
stiffener in decking /
shear connector
> 20 mm_J
^r
>4d
>20 mm T^ _
Figure V.22 Detailing of shear connectors in composite slabs with steel decks including
central stiffener
V.2.7.5
Design shear resistance of concrete slab
Sufficient transverse reinforcement shall be provided in the slab so that premature

longitudinal shear failure (see chapters V.2.7.5.1 to V.2.7.5.3) or longitudinal splitting
(see Eurocode 4, chapter 6.6.5) is prevented at ultimate limit states.
V.2.7.5.1 Longitudinal shear in the slab vsd

EC4 [6.6.1]
(1) The design longitudinal shear per unit length of the beam for any potential surface of
longitudinal shear failure within the slab (see Figure V.23), vsd. shall not exceed the
design resistance to longitudinal shear, VRd, of the shear surface considered :
vsd ^ v R d
vsd should be determined in accordance with chapter V.2.7.2 (determination of Wg) and
be consistent with the design of the shear connectors at the ultimate limit state. A model
to evaluate VRd is given in chapter V.2.7.5.2.
EC4 [Fig. 6.12]
Case 3J
Type of surface
Ae
a- a
(A b +At )
2Ab
b-b
Remark :
EC4 [6.6.1 (2)]
'
the length of shear surface b-b should be taken as equal to :

(2 h + (ph) for a single row of headed studs or staggered
stud connectors,
or, (2 h + st + cph) for headed studs arranged in pairs.
Figure V.23 Typical potential surfaces of shear failure in slabs

(2) Potential failure surfaces are shown in Figure V.23. Top (area At) and bottom (area Ab)
reinforcement in the slab may be considered to be effective. Where steel decking is
continuous over the beam, or is effectively anchored by shear connectors, it may also be
considered to act as transverse reinforcement. Failure surface a-a controls in these cases.
EC4 [6.6.1 (3)] Failure surface b-b is not considered critical in Eurocode 4 in cases where steel decking
is used transverse to the beam (see Figure V.23, case 2)), provided that the design
resistances of the studs are determined using the appropriate reduction factor as given in
clause V.2.7.3.2 (2).
EC4 [6.6.1
(4)&(5)]
(3) In determining vsd. account may be taken of the variation of longitudinal shear across
the width of the concrete flange. Longitudinal shear is considered to be transferred
uniformly by the shear connectors.
189
V.2.7.5.2 D esign resistance to longitudinal shear VR

EC4 [6.6.2]
EC4
[6.6.2 (1)]
EC4
[6.6.2 (2)]
(2) The design resistance of the concrete flange (shear planes a-a illustrated in Figure V.23)
shall be determined in accordance with the principles in clause 4.3.2.5 of Eurocode 2
(Ref. 2). Profiled steel sheeting with ribs transverse to the steel beam (sec Figure V.23,
case 2)) may be assumed to contribute to resistance to longitudinal shear, provided it is
continuous across the top flange of the steel beam or if it is welded to the steel beam by
stud shear connectors.
(2) In the absence of more accurate calculation the design resistance of any surface of
potential shear failure in the flange or a haunch should be determined from :
[Form. 6.25 and 6.26]
VR(J = minimum 2 , 5 A c v r ) T R d + A e - ^sk- + v I'd

where XRd
( U A e v t i - ^ + Vpd/Va
is the basic shear strength to be taken as iR d =

where
0 2 5 fctk 0.05
fctk 0 05 and Yc a r e given in Table II. 1 and Tabic

11.10.
Table V.17 B asic shear strength xRd [N/mm2]
Concrete strength C 20/25 C 25/30 C 30/37 C 35/45 C 40/50 C 45/55 C 50/60

Rd
0,25
0,30
0,33
0,37
0,42
0,45
0,48
fck
is the characteristic cylinder strength of the concrete in N/mm 2

(see Table II. 1),
fsk
is the characteristic yield strength of the reinforcement (see

Table II.8),
is a factor for the concrete strength defined in chapter II.5.1 :

= 1 for normal-weight concrete,
= 0,3 + 0,7 ( / 2400) for light-weight-aggregate concrete of
oven-dry unit mass in kg/m3,
Ac\
is the mean cross-sectional area per unit length of beam of the

concrete shear surface under consideration,
is the sum of the cross-sectional areas of transverse

reinforcement (assumed to be perpendicular to the beam) per
unit length of beam crossing the shear surface under
consideration (see Figure V.23) including any reinforcement
provided for bending of the slab,
v pd
is the contribution of the profiled steel sheeting, if applicable
(see chapter V.2.7.5.3).
(3) For a ribbed slab the area of concrete shear surface A c v should be determined taking into
account of the effect of the ribs. Where the ribs run transverse to the span of the beam
(see Figure V.23, case 2)), the concrete within the depth of the ribs may be included in
the value of A c v but for parallel ribs (see Figure V.23, case 3)) it should not be included
in A C v
(4) Transverse reinforcement considered to resist longitudinal shear shall be anchored so as
to develop its yield strength in accordance with Eurocode 2 (Ref. 2). At edge beams,
anchorage may be provided by means of U-bars looped around the shear connectors.
Ae
190
V.2.7.5.3 Contribution of profiled steel sheeting as transverse reinforcement, v p d

EC4 [6.6.3]
EC4
[6.6.3 (l)]
(1) Where the profiled steel sheets are continuous across the top flange of the steel beam, the
contribution of profiled steel sheeting with ribs transverse to the beam should be taken as
EC4 [form. (6.27)]
V'pd
H
A f
'yp
ap
where Vpd
is per unit length of the beam for each intersection of the shear
surface by the sheeting,
is the cross-sectional area of the profiled steel sheeting per unit
length of the beam,
EC4
[6.6.3 (2)]
fyp
is the sheeting yield strength (see chapter II.9),
Yap
is a partial safety factor (see chapter 11.10).
(2) Where the profiled steel sheeting with ribs transverse to the beam is discontinuous
across
the top flange of the steel beam, and stud connectors are welded to the steel beam
directly through the profiled steel sheets, the contribution of profiled steel sheeting
should be taken as :
P
Vpd =
where
EC4 [7.6.1.4]
pb.Rd
but vpd <
f
p *yp
'ap
is spacing centre-to-centre of the stud along the beam,
Ppb.Rd
is the design bearing resistance of a headed stud against tearing

through the steel sheet :
d d 0 t p typ
pb.Rd
ap
where
1+-
but < 4,0,
"do
ddO
is the diameter of the weld collar ( = 1 , 1 d),
is the diameter of the shank of the stud,
is the distance from the centre of the stud to

the end of the sheeting (a > 2 ddo).
is the thickness of the sheeting,
fyp
191
is the sheeting yield strength (see chapter

II.9).
EC4 [6.6.4]
V.2.7.5.4 Minimum transverse reinforcement

( 1 ) The area of reinforcement in a solid slab should be not less than 0,002 times the concrete
area being reinforced and should be uniformly distributed.
>0,2% A.
where As
Ac
is the cross-sectional area of transverse reinforcement and,

is the effective area of concrete flange.
(2) Where the ribs are parallel to the beam span, the area of transverse reinforcement should
be not less than 0,002 times the concrete cover slab area in the longitudinal direction and
should be uniformly distributed.
(3) Where the ribs are transverse to the beam span, the area of transverse reinforcement
should be not less than 0,002 times the concrete slab area in the longitudinal direction
and should be uniformly distributed. Profiled steel sheeting continuous across the top
flange of the steel beam may be assumed to contribute to this requirement.
EC4 [5]
V.3
Verifications at Serviceability Limit States SLS
V.3.1
Generalities about SLS
EC4 [5.1]
Ref. 7 [7.1] (1) The serviceability requirements for composite beams concern the control of :
-
deflections (see chapter V.3.2),
- cracking of concrete (see chapter V.3.3),

- vibration response (see chapter V.3.4).
Deflections are important in order to prevent cracking or deformation of the partitions
and cladding, or to avoid noticeable deviations of floors or ceilings. Floor vibrations may
be important in long span applications, but these calculations are outside the scope of
Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4).
(2) Loads to be used at the serviceability limit state are presented in chapter III. Normally
unfactored loads are used.
EC4 [5.1(2)] (3) Calculation of stresses and deformations at the serviceability limit states shall take into
account the effects of :
-
shear lag;
increased flexibility resulting from significant incomplete interaction, due to slip

and/or uplift;
cracking and tension stiffening of concrete in hogging moment regions;
- creep and shrinkage of concrete;

-
yielding of steel, if any, especially when unpropped construction is used;
yielding of reinforcement, if any, in hogging moment regions.
These effects shall be established by test or analysis, where practicable.
192
(4) Most designers base assessments at the serviceability limit state on elastic behaviour (with
certain modifications for creep and cracking etc). In the absence of a more rigorous
analysis, the effects of creep may be taken into account by using modular ratios (as given
in Table II.3) for the calculation of flexural stiffnesses. To avoid consideration of postelastic effects, limits are often placed on the stresses existing in beams at the serviceability
limit state.
Ref. 7 [7.1] (5) No stress limitations are made in Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4) because :
- post-elastic effects in the mid-span region are likely to be small and have little
influence on deflections,
- the influence of the connections on the deflection of simply supported beams has
been neglected,
- account is taken of plasticity in the support region of continuous beams.
V.3.2 D eflections
EC4 [5.2]
EC3 [4.2]
EC4
[5.2.1(2)]
EC4
[5.2.1(4)]
( 1 ) Composite structures and components shall be so proportioned that deflections are within
limits agreed between the clients, the designer and the competent authority as being
appropriate to the intended use and occupancy of the building and the nature of the
materials to be supported.
(2) In buildings it will normally be satisfactory to consider the deflections under the rare
combination of loading.
(3) The design values for the vertical deflections ( ) should be lower limiting values given
in Table V.18. Deflection limits are not specified in Eurocode 4. Reference is made to
Eurocode 3 (Ref. 3) (see Tables V.18 and V.19) for limits on deflections due to
permanent and variable loads. Those limiting values are illustrated by reference to the
simply supported beam shown in Table V.19. The sagging vertical deflection (5v)max f r
unpropped beams should be determined for the underside of the beam, only where the
deflection can impair the appearance of the building. In all other cases the reference
level is the upperside of the beam. Against excessive maximum deflection ( m a x ) a usual
solution consists in introducing an initial pre-cambering () of structural steel beam (see
Table V.19).
(4) The values given in Table V.18 are empirical values. They are intended for comparison
with the results of calculations and should not be interpreted as performance criteria.
Ref. 7 [7.2.1] (5) Deflections are calculated knowing the moment of inertia of the composite section based
on elastic properties (see Figure V.2). Under sagging moment the concrete may be
assumed to be uncracked, and the moment of inertia of the composite section I c
(expressed as a transformed equivalent steel section) is given by a formula in clause
V.2.1 (5).
Ref. 7 [p. 61](6) The ratio I c / I a (=Ii / I a ) therefore defines the improvement in the stiffness of the
composite section relative to the steel section. This ratio is presented in Figure 1.4 for all
IPE and HE sections (up to 600 mm deep) for typical slab depth. Typically, I c / I a is in
the range of 2,5 to 4,0, indicating that one of the main benefits of composite action is in
reduction of deflections.
193
Table V.18 Recommended limiting values for vertical deflections

Ref. 6
[Table 4.2]
Limits
Conditions
Omax
L/200 *
L/250
roofs frequently carrying personnel other than for maintenance
L/250
L/300
floors generally
L/250
L/300
floors and roofs supporting brittle finish or non-flexible partitions
L/250
L/350
floors supporting columns (unless the deflection has been

included in the global analysis for the ultimate limit state)
L/400
L/500
* where m a x can impair the appearance of the building
L/250
roofs generally
L = span of the beam; for cantilever beams : L = twice cantilever span

Discharge of rainwater :
slope of the roof less than 5% check that rainwater cannot collect in pools,
slope of the roofless than 3% additional check that incremental collapse cannot occur due
to the weight of water.
Table V.19 Vertical deflections to be considered

Ref. 6
[Table 4.1]
Ref.7
[p. 61]
max is the sagging in the final

state relative to the straight
line joining the supports,
is the pre-camber (hogging)

of the beam in the unloaded
state (state 0),
is the variation of the

deflection of
the
beam
due to permanent loads (G)
immediately after loading
(state 1),
02
is the variation of the

deflection of the beam due
to the variable loading (Q)
(state 2).
(7) It is not usually necessary to calculate the "cracked" moment of inertia under sagging
bending moment as the elastic neutral axis will normally lie in the steel beam, or near the
base of the slab. Where it is necessary to know the "cracked" moment of inertia IC(n
(=12) under hogging bending moment, a simple formula may be derived from Figure
V.2. Assuming that the reinforcement is placed at mid-height of the slab above the
sheeting, a formula is provided for Ic,n in clause V.2.1 (5).
This formula may be used in establishing the moments in elastic global analysis (method
2 in chapter V.2.3), or in crack control calculations (see chapter V.3.3).
194
EC4
(8)
[3.1.4.2]
Ref. 7 [7.2.2]
Modular ratio :
The values of elastic modulus of concrete under short term loads, E cm , are given in Table
ILL The elastic modulus under long term loads is affected by creep, which causes a
reduction in the stiffness of the concrete. The modular ratio, n, is the ratio of the elastic
modulus of steel to the time-dependent elastic modulus of concrete (see Table II.3).
The modular ratio n for normal-weight concrete is typically, 6,5 for short term (variable)
loading.
The elastic modulus of concrete for long term (permanent) loads is taken as one-third of
the short term value, leading to a modulus ratio n of approximately 20 for long term
(permanent) loading in an internal environment. Details of different n values are
provided in Table II.3.
EC4
[5.2.2(6)]
For building of normal usage, surveys have shown that the proportions of variable and
permanent imposed loads rarely exceed 3:1. Although separate deflection calculations
may be needed for the variable and permanent deflections, a representative modular ratio
is usually appropriate for calculation of imposed load deflection. This value of n may be
taken as twice the short term modular ratio (i.e. approximately 13) for buildings of
normal usage.
(9)
Influence of partial shear connection :

Deflections increase due to the effects of slip in the shear connectors. These effects are
ignored in composite beams designed for full shear connection. For cases of partial shear
connection using headed stud shear connectors and class 1 or 2 cross-section (see
chapter V.2.7.2), the deflection, , is increased according to :
- for propped construction,
= 1 + 0,5 -LI
0
^ NfJ \ c
for unpropped construction,
A.i
EC4
[5.2.2(6)]
EC4
[5.2.2(5)]
+ 0 ,3
-iL
I NfJ V c
where -
is the deflection of the steel beam acting alone under the same
loads,
is the deflection of the composite beam with full shear

interaction.
__
Nf
is the degree of shear connection at the ultimate state (with N/Nf

> 0,4).
The difference between the formulas arises from the higher force in the shear connectors
at serviceability in propped construction.
An additional simplification is that slip effects can usually be ignored when / Nf > 0,5
or forces on the shear connectors do not exceed 0,7 PRk, in unpropped constmction and
in case of aribbedslab with ribs transverse to the beam (with the height of ribs : h p < 80
mm). This is because of beneficial effects that are ignored in calculating deflections
making the above equation too conservative in many cases.
195
EC4
[5.2.2(9)]
(lO)Shrinkage yielding deflections :

Eurocode 4 states that shrinkage deflections need only be calculated for staticallydeterminate beams in buildings (simply supported beams or cantilever) when the span :
depth ratio of the beam exceeds 20 ( L / (h a +hp+h c ) > 20 ), and when the free shrinkage
strain of the concrete exceeds 400 10-6 (see Table II.2). In practice, these deflections will
only be significant for spans greater than 12 m in exceptionally warm dry atmospheres.
The curvature, K s , due to a free shrinkage strain, s (see Table II.2) is :
Ref. 7 [7.2.4]
Ks =
e s (h + h c + 2 h p ) A .
2(l + nr)l c
where n
is the modular ratio appropriate for shrinkage calculations (n

20) (see Table II.3),
h, he, hp, A a , I c and r are defined in chapter V.2.1.

The deflection due to this curvature is :
5 = 0,125 K S L 2
This deflection formula ignores continuity effects at the supports and probably
overestimate shrinkage deflections by a considerable margin.
Ref. 7
[7.2.5]
(ll)Continuous
beams :
The deflection of a continuous beam is modified by the influence of cracking in the

negative moment region. Analyses with uncracked section or cracked section may be
used.
EC4 [5.2.2(7)(b)] This may be taken into account by calculating the moment of inertia of the cracked
section under hogging bending moment (ignoring the concrete). The hogging bending
-0,35
moment at the supports is assumed to vary as a reduction factor of ( I t / 1 2 )

times
the hogging bending moment at the serviceability limit state based on analysis of the
uncracked section, where li is the uncracked moment of inertia, and I2 is the cracked
moment of inertia (see clause V.2.1 (5)). The lower limit to this reduction factor on
hogging bending moment is |0,6|, which is applicable where there is minimum
reinforcement in the slab. This method may be used where the difference in adjacent
spans is less than 25%.
EC4 [5.2.2(8)]
In continuous beams, there is a possibility of yielding in the hogging bending moment

region. To take account of this effect the hogging bending moments may be further
reduced. In reality, this reduction is a function of the moment resistance of the composite
section under hogging and sagging bending moment. A conservative way of taking this
into account is to multiply the "elastic" hogging bending moments at the supports by a
further reduction factor. This factor is given in Eurocode 4 as [0/7], where load sufficient
to cause yielding is applied to the section with hardened concrete, which is the normal
design case. Together with the minimum factor of |0,6l due to concrete cracking, the
final hogging bending moment may be conservatively taken as |0,42| times the elastic
moment based on uncracked analysis.
196
The mid-span deflection of a beam, as influenced by the support moments, may be

calculated from :
A
= 'l_cM1+M1
M0
where C
Mo and
= 0,6 for uniform load,

= 0,5 for central point load,
are the midspan moment and deflection of the equivalent
simply-supported beam,
Mi and M2 are the hogging moments at the supports (for the same loading
condition), reduced for cracking and yielding as noted
above.
As an approximation, a deflection coefficient of 3/384 is usually appropriate for
determining the deflection of a continuous composite beam subjected to uniform
loading on equal adjacent spans. This may be reduced to 4/384 for end spans. The
moment of inertia of the section is based on the uncracked value.
EC4
Alternatively, a more precise method is to use the "cracked section" analysis model of
elastic global analysis described in chapter V.2.3 in order to determine the hogging
bending moments directly. No further reduction in hogging bending moments should be
made in this case.
[7.5.2(2)&(3)](12)In order to avoid the need to consider additional loading due to ponding of the wet
concrete in the design of the floor and supporting structure, the total deflection of the
profiled sheet decking submitted to its own weight plus the weight of wet concrete (but
without construction loads) at the construction stage should be limited by :
<L/180or20mm,
where L
EC4 [5.3]
Ref. 7 [7.4]
EC4
[5.3.1 (5)]
V.3.3
is the effective span between supports (props being supports in

this context).
Cracking of concrete
(1) It is necessary to control cracking of concrete only in cases where the proper functioning
of the structure or its appearance would be impaired. Internally within buildings,
durability is not affected by cracking. Similarly when raised floors are used, cracking is
not visually important.
(2) Minimum reinforcement without control of crack width :
Where a composite beam is subjected to hogging bending moment and if no attempt is
made to control the width of cracks in the concrete of its top flange, the longitudinal
reinforcement within the effective width beff of that flange should be at least :
A s > 0 , 4 % A, , for propped construction or,
A s > 0 , 2 % A, , for unpropped construction,
where A s
Ac
is the cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement and,

is the effective area of the concrete flange.
For information the Table V.20 gives the percentage of reinforcement (A s / Ac) for
specific bar diameters, spacings and solid slab thicknesses.
197
The reinforcement should extend over a length span/4 each side of an internal support,
or length/2 for a cantilever as shown in Figure V.24.
0,25 Li 0,25 L^
'T"
f
0,25 L 0.25 L 3
//7'/'/
77777
,<-
Li
L2
L3
-?'-
Figure V.24 Reinforcement length at supports for a composite beam

Table V.20 Minimum percentage of reinforcement bars for propped and unpropped
constructions
Percentage of reinforcement (%)
Reinforcement bars
for different thicknesses of solid slab h c [mm]

Diameter of
bar [mm]
8
6
8
10
8
10
12
12
14
10
16
14
12
18
16
14
20
18
22
16
20
22
18
26
20
30
26
22
30
26
EC4 [5.3.1 (5)]
Condition :
spacing
[mm]
200
100
150
200
100
150
200
150
200
100
200
150
100
200
150
100
200
150
200
100
150
150
100
200
100
200
150
100
150
100
for propped
100
120
0,25
0,28
0,34
039
0.50
0.52
0.57
0.75
0.77
0,79
1,01
1,03
1,13
1,27
1,34
1.54
1,57
1,70
1,90
2,01
2,09
2,53
2,54
2,65
3,14
3,53
3,54
3,80
0,21
0,24
0,28
0,33
0,42
0,44
0,47
0,63
0,64
0,65
0,84
0,86
0,94
1,06
1,12
1,28
1,31
1,41
1,58
1,68
1,75
2,11
2,12
2,21
2,62
2,95
2,95
3,17
3,93
150
0,22
0,26
0,34
035
038
0,50
0.51
0,52
0,67
0,68
0,75
0,85
0,89
1,03
1,05
1,13
1,27
1,34
1,40
1,69
1,70
1,77
2,09
2,36
2,36
2,53
3,14
3,54
0,20
0.25:
0,26
0,28
0,38
038
039
0,50
0,51
0,57
0,64
0,67
0,77
0,79
0,85
0,95
1,01
1,05
1,27
1,27
1,33
1,57
1,77
1,77
1,90
2,36
2,65
A c / A r > 0,4%
construction :
for unpropped
construction :
s
198
200
-.
250
300
0,20
0,21
0,23
030
031
0,31
0,40
0,41
0,45
0,51
0,54
0,62
0,63
0,68
0,76
0,80
0,84
1,01
1,02
1,06
1,26
1,41
1,42
1,52
1,88
2,12
025
026
026
034
034
038
0,42
0,45
0,51
032
037
0,63
0,67
0,70
0,84
0,85
0,88
1,05
1,18
1,18
127
137
1.77
AQ/ Ac > 0,2%

:
r-r-7:
EC4
[5.3.1 (5)] (3) Minimum reinforcement with control of crack width
EC4
[5.3.2]
Where it is necessary to control cracking, a minimum amount of reinforcement should be

imposed in order to avoid the presence of large cracks in the hogging moment region.
This minimum percentage of reinforcement area to concrete slab area, pmin, is given by :
min
'
kck
cte
'st
where As
is the cross-sectional area of reinforcement,
is the effective area of the concrete flange,
kc
is a coefficient due to the bending stress distribution in the

section (kc ~ 0,9),
k
is a coefficient accounting for the decrease in tensile strength of
concrete (k = 0,8),
fcte
is the effective tensile strength of concrete : a value of 3 N/mm2
is the minimum adopted,
ast
is the maximum stress permitted in the reinforcement
immediately after cracking, depending on the chosen bar size
and with Gst < fsk .
where fsk is the characteristic yield strength of reinforcement
(see Table II.8).
A typical value of p m i n is 0,4% to 0,6% which is well in excess of the minimum of 0,2%
necessary in unpropped construction for shrinkage control and transverse load
distribution. However, these bars need only be placed in the hogging bending moment
region of the beams or slabs. This reinforcement may also act as fire reinforcement or
transverse reinforcement.
At least half of the required minimum reinforcement should be placed between middepth of the slab and the face subjected to the greater tensile strain.
(4) An additional criterion is that the bars should be of small diameter and should be spaced
relatively closely together in order to be more effective in crack control. Maximum bar
diameters of high bond bars are given in Table V.21 as a function of the maximum
reinforcement stress, ast, and the maximum allowed crack width, wk. If detailed crack
control is necessary, more information is given in Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4 . clause 5.3.4).
199
Table V.21
EC4 [Table 5.1]
Maximum bar diameters for high bond bars for different

reinforcement stresses and crack widths at SLS
160
180
200
220
240
260
280
300
320
340
360
380
400
450
V.3.4
EC4 [5.1 (1)]
Maximum steel bar diameters [mm]
Reinforcement
steel stresses Ost
[N/mm2]
maximum
for crack widths wk in concrete :

wk = 0,3 mm
32
28
25
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
10
8
8
6
wk = 0,5 mm
36
36
36
36
36
32
28
25
22
20
18
16
14
12
Vibrations
(1) A check of the potential vibration response may be necessary for long span beams
designed for light imposed loads. A simple measure of the natural frequency f given in
[Hz] or [cycles/sec] of a beam is :
Ref. 7 [7.3]
f=
18
V^s
where sV
is the instantaneous deflection [mm] caused by reapplication of

the self weight of the floor and beam to the composite
member.
A minimum limit on natural frequency, f, is proposed as 4 cycles/sec for most building

applications except where there is vibrating machinery, or 3 cycles/sec for car parks. The
limit may be raised to 5 cycles/sec for special buildings such as sports halls.
200
VI
MEMBERS WITH COMBINED

AXIAL COMPRESSIVE FORCE
AND BENDING MOMENT
((N,M);(N,V,M))
VI
MEMBERS WITH COMBINED AXIAL COMPRESSIVE FORCE AND

BENDING MOMENT ( (N , M) ; (N , V , M) )
VI.l
Generalities
(1) For each load case (see chapter III) the design values of the following internal forces
and moments may be applied to members with combined axial force and bending
moment, that shall be checked at ultimate limit states :
EC4
[4.8.1 (l)]
Figure VI.l Internal forces and bending moments applied to composite member
(2) This chapter VI only deals with composite members which are of two main types :
- totally (Figure VI.2 a)) or partially (Figure VI.2 b)) concrete encased steel sections
and,
- concrete filled steel sections (Figures VI.2 c) and d)).
Figure VI.2 Type of cross-sections of composite columns
203
Ref. 12
(p. 51)
(3) The design for members in compression and bending is done in the following steps :
The composite member is examined isolated from the system. Then the end moments
which may result from the analysis of the system as a whole are taken up. These end
moments may also have been determined by second-order theory in the analysis of the
whole system according to the respective requirements. With the end moments and
possible horizontal forces within the member length, as well as with the normal force,
action effects are determined. For slender member this must be done considering
second-order effects (see chapter VI. 1.1). In the simplified method of Eurocode 4
imperfections need not to be considered in the analysis of action effects for the
composite members. They are taken into account in the determination of the resistance.
EC4
[4.8.1 (2)]
EC4
[4.8.1 (3)]
The resistance of the composite member to compression and bending (see chapters VI.3
to VI.5) is determined by help of the cross-section interaction curve (see chapter VI.2).
The influence of transverse shear forces may be considered in the interaction curve (see
chapter VI.6).
(4) This chapter VI only applies to isolated non-sway composite members with combined
axial load and bending moments.
(5) This chapter VI presents the simplified method of design (EC4 : [4.8.3]) for composite
members of double symmetrical (Figure VI.2) and uniform cross-section over the
column length. This simplified method uses the European buckling curves for steel
columns (Eurocode 3) as the basic design curves for composite members.
Application rules for composite members of mono-symmetrical cross-section arc given
in Annex D of Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4).
When the limits of applicability of the simplified method are not fulfilled (sec chapter
IV.1.1), the general method (EC4 : [4.8.3]) has to be applied.
Ref. 10 (p. 57)

EC4
[4.8.3.1]
That general method includes composite members with non-symmetrical or non-uniform

cross-section over the column length.
The method assumes that composite members are not suceptible to lateral-torsional
buckling.
(6) Design assumptions :

Both approaches for the design of composite columns (general and simplified methods)
are based on the following main assumptions :
- full interaction between concrete and steel up to the point of collapse,
-
allowances must be made for imperfections which are consistent with those adopted
for assessing the strength of bare steel columns,
- proper account must be taken of the steel and concrete stresse-strain curves,
- plane sections remain plane.
(7) The Table VI.l provides a list of checks to be performed at Ultimate Limit States for the
composite member submitted to combined axial compressive force and bending
moment ( , M). A member shall have sufficient bearing capacity if aU_ general checks
about the design method (list of checks ) are satisfied and if aU checks are fulfilled
according to the loading applied to that member. All the checks have both references to
Eurocode 4 and to the design handbook.
Beside general checks about the design method (list of checks (D), the Table VI.l
proposes the following loading applied to the member :
(2) Axial compressive force and uniaxial bending moment (Nx.sd> My.Sd)
Mz.SdX
or
(Nx.Sd-
Axial compressive force and biaxial bending moment (Nx.s<j. My.sd and M z .sd)
The influence of transverse shear forces (Vz.Sd, Vy.Sd) ' s explained in chapter VI.6.
204
EC4
[4.8.3.1 (5)]
Table VI.l
References to
List of checks to be performed at ULS for the
design
handbook
composite member submitted to combined axial
compressive force and bending moment (N,M)
[4.8.3.1 (3)]
(1)
[4.8.2.5]
(2)
(3)
(4)
General checks about the design method :

IV.1.1
Check the limits of applicability of the simplified design
method
IV 1.1 (4) to (6)
Check concrete cover and reinforcement
I V.l.2
Check for local buckling of steel members
IV.
1.3
& IV. 1.4
Check the load introduction and the longitudinal shear
(5)
(6)
Second-order effects on bending moments

Specific remarks for N-M checks
[4.8.2.4]
[4.8.2.6] to
[4.8.2.8]
[4.8.3.10]
[4.8.3.3]
(1)
[4.8.3.8]
(2)
[4.8.3.11]
(3)
[Figure 4.12]
[4.8.3.13]
(4)
[4.8.3.13 (8)]
(D
[4.8.3.3]
(1)
[4.8.3.8]
(2)
[4.8.3.11]
(3)
[Figure 4.12]
[4.8.3.14]
[4.8.3.14 (5)]
(4)
Axial compressive force and uniaxial bending moment

(Nx.Sd- My.sd) 2L (Nx.Sd. Mz.sd) :
Nx.Sd - Npi.Rd
(design plastic resistance to compression of
the composite cross-section)
Stability of member to Nx.sd> for both buckling axes :
Nx.Sd - minimum (Nby.Rd ; Nbz.Rd) (design flexural buckling
Resistance of cross-section to (Nx.sd , M y s d) or (N x .sd > Mz.sd)
interaction (N x . S d, My.sd)
or
interaction (Nx.sd , Mz.sd)
Stability of member to (Nx.sd - M y . sd ) or (N x . S d - M z . S d) :
My.Sd ^ 0,9 Py Mpl.y.Rd
or
Mz.sd ^ 0,9 Mpi.z.Rd
Axial compressive force and biaxial bending moment
(Nx.Sd . My.sd and Mz.sd) :
Nx.Sd - Npi.Rd
(design plastic resistance to compression of the
composite cross-section)
Stability of member to Nx.sd, for both buckling axes :
Nx.sd ^minimum (Nby.Rd ; Nbz.Rd)(design flexural buckling
Resistance of cross-section to (Nx.sd , My.sd and Mz.sd), for
each separate bending plane (xz) and (xy) :
interaction (N x .sd, My.sd)
and interaction (Nx.sd , Mz.sd)
Stability of member to (Nx.sd . My.sd and M z .sd) '
My.Sd ^ 0,9 Py Mpl.y.Rd ,
Mz.Sd ^ 0,9 Mpi.z.Rd,
rind
My.Sd
^yMpl.y.Rd
,
7 ha
"
M-zMpl.z.Rd
205
* 1
VI.1.1
VI. 1.2
IV.2
IV.3
VI.2
VI.3
IV.2
IV.3
VI.4
VI.5
VI.1.1
Second order effects on bending moments
EC4
[4.8.3.10 (2)] (1) Columns generally should be checked for second-order effects. For memory, secondorder theory takes into account the influence of the defomiation of a structure in order
to determine internal forces and moments, whereas first-order theory uses the initial
geometry of the structure.
Ref. 9 [5.3.2] (2) In slender isolated non-sway columns under combined compression and bending,
second-order effects on the bending may be significant. Eurocode 4 requires that the
second-order effects on bending moments about each relevant axis should be considered
if the following both conditions (a) and b)) are satisfied :
EC4 [4.8.3.10 (3)]
a)
N x.Sd
>0,1 and.
N,
b) > 0 , 2 ( 2 - r )
where Nx.sd
is the applied design axial load,
2( )
2()
(Ncr) v = - ^ and ( N c r ) z = .
LL
by
*"'*-
l?
^b.z
are the elastic critical loads for the column length about
relevant axis (yy or zz) (see clause IV.3 (4) and additional
comments in clause VI. 1.2 (2)),
is the non-dimensional slendemess of the composite member
for flexural buckling mode about relevant axis (ky,Xz)
(see
clause IV.3 (4) and additional comments in clauses VI. 1.2
(1) and (2)),
is the ratio of the lesser to the greater end moments :
Msd
rMsd
l-l<r<ll
for transverse loading within the column length : r = 1.

For simplification, the bending moment according to second-order theory (M S d j can be
calculated by increasing the greatest first-order bending moment (Msd in Table VI.2)
with a correction factor k :
and
EC4 [4.8.3.10 (4)]
where NCT.L
k>l,0
is the elastic critical load of the composite column for the

relevant axis (yy or zz) and with the effective length taken as
the column length (see clause IV.3 (4) and additional
comments in clause VI. 1.2 (2)),
is an equivalent moment factor given in Table VI.2.
The composite member is then designed for combined compression (N x .sd) and bending
with the bending moment accounting for second-order effects equal to M S d = k M S d
206
If any one of the conditions (a) or b)) is not satisfied, the second-order effects may be
regarded as insignificant and the applied design moment obtained from first-order
theory may be used for the subsequent check of member to combined compression and
bending.
Table VI.2
Line
Factors for the determination of moments according to second-order

theory
Moment factors
Moment distribution
First-order bending
moments
from lateral loads in isolated nonsway column
=1,0
Msd
Comment
Msd is the
bending
within the
length due
forces
second-order
maximum
moment
column
to lateral
ignoring
effects
Msd
End moments
frame
in a non-sway
= 0,66 + 0,44 r
Msd and r Msd are the

end moments
but > 0,44
Msd
rMsd
-1 < r < 1
> 1,0
Msd
VI.l.2
Combined action of
end
moments
and
moments from lateral
loads
rMsd
Specific remarks for N-M calculations
EC4
[4.8.3.3(3)] (1) Increase ofNpi Rd for concrete-filled tubes :
In case of concrete-filled circular hollow profile (see Figure VI.2 d)) submitted to N-M
loading, the load bearing capacity Npi.Rd of the composite cross-section may be
increased because of confinement and triaxial containment of concrete, if both following
conditions (a) and b)) are satisfied :
a) the relative slendemess of composite member is limited to :
< 0 , 5 and,
b) the greatest design bending moment calculated by first-order theory, M max .sd is
limited to :
M max.Sd <N x.Sd
M m 9 T CA
which is equivalent to : e =
10
Nx.sd
207
<
10
is the non-dimensional slendemess of composite member (see

chapter IV.3 and additional comments in clause VI. 1.2 (2)),
N x .sd
is the applied design normal force,
is the external diameter of the column,
is the excentricity of the normal force N x .sd related to Mmax.Sd-
where
In chapter IV.2 this effect is already presented for cross-section submitted to centered
axial compressive force N x .sd hi this chapter VI. 1.2 concerning loading of combined
axial force and bending moment, a supplementary condition (the second one : b)) is
introduced considering the effect of bending moment amplitude. The following mie for
Npi.Rd evaluation replaces the one presented in chapter IV.2 (Table IV.5):
ft
EC4 [4.8.3.3 (4)]
Npi.Rd =A a T|2
YMa
where
+ AC
1+%t
\ c J
V+ A
d f,ck )
[
C
sk
Npi.Rd

cross-section,
A a , A, A s
are the cross-sectional areas of the structural steel, the concrete

and the reinforcement (see Table IV.6),
fck
is the compression strength of the concrete (sec Table II. 1),
fsk
is the wall thickness of the circular hollow profile,
YMa. Yc> Ys
are partial safety factors at ultimate limit states for the structural
steel, concrete and reinforcement steel (see Table 11.10),
EC4
[4.8.3.3 (5) and (6)]
* For 0 < e < dl io and < 0,5 :
= - e/d),
2 =20 + (1 -Tl20)(10e/d),
where
and ]20 values related to e = 0,0 , depend on as follows :

1 0 = 4 , 9 - 1 8 , 5 + 17 2 ,
2 =0,25 (3 + 2),
*For e > dl io or X>0 :

= 0 , 0 a n d i l 2 = LO.
208
andr|io > 0 (see Table IV.4),

and 20 ^ LO (see Table IV.4),
(2) Secant modulus of elasticity of the concrete for long-term loading :
EC4
The effective elastic flexural stiffness (E I) e of a cross-section of a composite column

should be calculated from :
(EI)=EaI,+0,8EcdIc+E8I,
[4.8.3.5]
as presented in clause IV.3 (4) where the effects of short-term and long-term loading are
taken into account.
In clause IV.3 (5) this effect is already presented for cross-section submitted to centered
axial compressive force Nx.Sd- 1 this chapter VI. 1.2 concerning loading of combined
axial compression and bending moment, an additional condition (about the eccentricity
e of axial load N x .sd) is considered to decide if the influence of long-term behaviour of
the concrete (creep and shrinkage of concrete) has to be allowed for.
for short-term loading :
EC4 [4.8.3.5 (1)]
where Ecm
EC4 [4.8.3.5 (2)]
is the secant modulus of elasticity of the concrete according to

Table II. 1),
Yc = 1,35
EC2 [A.3.1] [A.3.4]
P
_ ^cm
fc
cd
according to Eurocode 2 (Ref. 2).
for long-term loading and slender columns:

if exceeds the limits given in Table IV.9,
and,
ife/d < 2:
E
_ c-c m
fc
cd - Yc
then
where E c m and yc
N
1-0,5- G.Sd
x.Sd J
are defined for short-term loading,
Nx.sd
is the applied design axial force,
NG.Sd
is the part of the applied design axial force (N x .sd) that is

permanently acting on the column,
is the non-dimensional relative slendemess for flexural

buckling about relevant axis (ky,Xz)(see
clause IV.3 (4)
and additional comments in clause VI. 1.2 (1)),
Mmax.Sd
x.Sd
-, is the excentricity of the axial force,
M max.Sd
is the greatest design bending moment calculated by first-order

theory,
is the overall depth of the cross-section in the bending plane.
This effective elastic flexural stiffness of cross-section of a composite column is used to

evaluate the elastic critical load N c r and the relative slendemess , for relevant buckling
axis (see clause IV.3 (4)).
209
VI.2
Ref.7
[8.3.3]
Resistance of cross-sections to combined compression and uniaxial bending

(Nx.Sd ; My.sd) or (Nx.Sd ; Mz.sd)
(1) The resistance of composite member to combined compression and bending is

determined with the help of a cross-section interaction curve. The different combined
effects of actions applied to the composite cross-section (Nx.sd My.sd) o r (Nx.sd
Mz.sd)> shall De situated in the validity area delimited by the N-M cross-section
interaction curve (see Figure VI.3).
In a typical interaction curve of a member with steel section only, it is observed that the
moment resistance undergoes a continuous reduction with increase of the axial load (sec
Ref. 3 chapter 5). However, it is shown in the interaction curve of a composite crosssection that the moment resistance may be increased by the presence of axial load. This
is because the prestressing effect of an axial compression may in certain circumstances,
prevent concrete cracking and make the concrete more effective in resisting moments
( , M R d > (see Figure VI.3).
M pl.Rd
EC4
[4.8.3.11]
(2) The cross-section interaction curve can be found by considering different positions of
the neutral axis over the whole cross-section and by determining the internal action
effects from the resulting stress blocks. This approach can only be carried out by
computer analysis.
But, with the simplified method of Eurocode 4, it is possible to calculate by hand four or
five points (A, C, D, and E) of the interaction curve. The exact interaction curve may
be replaced by the polygonal diagram (A(E)CDB) through these points as shown in
Figure VI.4. This simplified method is applicable to the design of composite columns
with cross-sections that are symmetrical about both principal axes (y and z).
NRd
Npi.Rd
1,0
rS
'VV/Vahdity a r e a / /
%^^#
MRd
1,0
M pl.Rd
Figure VI.3 Cross-section interaction curve for compression and uniaxial bending
210
EC4 [Figure 4.12
Figure VI.4 Cross-section interaction curve (with polygonal

compression and uniaxial bending
EC4
[4.8.3.11 (1)]
approximation)
for
The points on the interaction curve may be calculated assuming rectangular stress blocks
and concrete zones under tension as cracked.
The stress distributions corresponding to points A, B, C, D and E are given in Figure VI.5
for a totally concrete-encased I-section with bending about the major axis of the steel
section.
[4.8.3.11 (3)]
For concrete filled hollow sections the plastic resistances

may be calculated with 0,85 fck being replaced by fck
(see Figure VI.5 (a = 0,85 or 1), clause VI.2 (3) and
Table VI.3 c)).
EC4
[4.8.3.11 (5)]
In general, the additional point E should be determined approximately midway between

point A and point C if the resistance of the member to axial compression ( Npi.Rd) is
greater than Npm Rd, where Npm.Rd is the plastic resistance of the concrete section alone.
For encased I sections with bending about major axis
(yy) it is not necessary to calculate the point E, because
the interaction curve is almost linear between points A
and C.
211
EC4
[Figure 4.13]
Point A (compression resistance Npi.Rd )
afck/Yc
/<
7 7
fy/YMa
/-
fsk/Ys
/
S/
Npi.Rd
/
, /
ZZ :
Point B (bending resistance Mpi.Rd )
TTzjzTz
'h
ihn112.hn
7y/YMa
Mpi.Rd
7'
PointC
fsk/Ys
Mpi.Rd
Npm.Rd
Point D
Mmax.Rd
// /
s / /
Npm.Rd
Point E
ME
&]h E
"*E
Notations : "-" means compression stresses ; "+" means tension stresses
Figure VI.5 Stresses distributions corresponding to the interaction curve (Figure VI.4)
212
(3) Determination of cross-section polygonal interaction curve (see Figures VI.4 and VI.5) :
Point A marks the resistance to normal compressive axial force :
N
A = Npi.Rd (see chapter IV.2 and additional comments in clause VI.1.2 (1)),
MA=0
Point shows the stress distribution for bending moment resistance
NR=0
M B = M pl.Rd = Mmax.Rd - Mn.Rd,
MpLRd =(W p a - W p a n ) - ^ - + (w p c YMa
W p c n
) ^ + (wps
^Yc
\sk
psn
where Wpa, Wpc, Wpg are the plastic section moduli of the whole cross-section for
structural steel, for concrete part of the section (for the
calculation of WpC the concrete is assumed to be uncracked)
and for the reinforcement (see Table VI.3),
Wpan-Wpcn, Wpgn are the plastic section moduli of the cross-section parts
within the region of 2 h n (see Figure VI.5) for structural
steel, for concrete part of the section (for the calculation
of Wpc the concrete is assumed to be uncracked) and for
the reinforcement (see Table VI.3),
f
is the yield strength of the structural steel (see table II.5),
fck
is the compression strength of the concrete (see table II. 1),
is a reduction factor depending on the type of cross-section :
= 0,85
iifs sf: 1
' - . "
= 1,00
fsk
is the yield strength of the reinforcement (see table II.8),
YMa-Yo Ys
are the partial safety factors at ultimate limit states for the
structural steel, concrete and reinforcement steel (see table
11.10).
213
Point C also corresponds to the bending moment resistance but with additional
compressed region (over 2 h n ) creating a normal compressive axial force :
Nr
= N pm.Rd
Acoc
k
Yc
M c =Mpi.Rd| (see point B),

where Ac
is the whole area of concrete (see table IV.6),
a, fCk and yc are defined for point B .

The stress difference between point C and point is :
0,85 fck/Yc 2 fy /y Ma
2.hnN pm.Rd
Point D : at this point, the stress neutral axis lies within the centroidal axis of the
cross-section ; the axial resistance (over h n ) is half the one of point C and the
greatest bending resistance is reached :
pm.Rd
(see point C),
ND=M max .Rd
MD
M max .Rd = VV
Mpi.Rd + M n . R d ,
,a
7:
+Wpc
fck
^7
+Wps
*sk
Ys
where all parameters are defined for point B .

The stress difference between point D and point is :
0,85f ck / Yc
2fy/y M a
Mn.Rd
L h _?.
Npm.Rd
where
wiicic
M r>j=W
+VV
ivinRd
vv p a n
Wp^
+ W
-r w p s n
-^-
YMa
Yc
Ys
- Point E : details are provided in Annex C of Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4: see C.6.3 (5) to
(7) for concrete-encased I-sections or see C.6.4 (3) to (5) for concrete-filled
hollow sections).
The equations for the position of the neutral axis, h n , are given for selected positions in
the cross-sections. The resulting value of h n should lie within the limits of the assumed
region.
214
Table VI.3 a) Neutral axes and plastic section moduli for totally and partially concreteencased steel profile bent about major axis (yy)
EC4
[Annex C]
b=b
ez
ez
hn h
he --
hn
y
tw
h = hc
mFor the whole cross-section :

th"
3-10 3
4 - 2/
W p a = ^ + ( b - t w ) ( h - t f ) t f + - r2(h-2tf) +
b c hc
"pc ~
"j
''pa
"ps
11
" j * = ,As le^l

i=l
For the cross-section parts within the region of 2 hn :

case 1 : Neutral axis in the web :
A
hn =
c f cd -
s n ( 2 fsd
h
- f
^ - - t f
cd )
2 b c fcd + 2 t w [2 fyd - fed j

W
= t h
L
"pan
w un
case 2 : Neutral axis in the flange :
u ^ h
Acfcd-Asn(2fsd-fcd) + (b-tw)(h-2tf)(2fyd-fcd)
hn =
W
2bcfcd+2b(2fyd-fcd)
=bh
u u
"pan
2_(b-tw)(h-2tf)^
n
-<K<-^
"
2
case 3 : Neutral axis outside the steel section :
2
A
K=
c d - A s n ( 2 f s d - f c d ) - A a ( 2 f yd
2 b c fcd
W
" pan = W
" pa
2
W
" p e n = bu c "hn - W
"pan
- "^psn
W
"psn
2.Asn |ezj|
i=l
Notations : see Table VI.3 c)
215
fCd)
T a b l e V I . 3 b) Neutral a x e s and plastic section moduli for totally and partially c o n c r e t e e n c a s e d steel profile bent about m i n o r axis (zz)
EC4
[Annex C]
he
h
h = hc
tf
tf
1+
ey
1-
l.
- i
hn
hn
tw !
I
:*: f,, ; ,v,
ez
-t*
V'
F o r the w h o l e cross-section :
tfb2
h-2tf
VV =
+
pa
h r bc;
v v'pc
_ = c
4-
9
r
3-10
W wgpa w" p s
W
Z^-^si
Y A yi'"ps
i=l
F o r the cross-section parts within the region of 2 h n :

u
c a s e 1 : Neutral axis in the w e b :

_ A c f c d - A s n (2 fsd - f ^
^ ~
2hcfcd+2h(2fyd-fcd)
W
pan = h h n
f
\.
^ < h
2
c a s e 2 : Neutral axis in the flange :

Acfcd-ASn(2fsd-fcd) +
hn =
tw(2tf-h)(2fyd-fcd)
2hcfcd+4tf(2fyd-fcd)
2 ,(h-2tf)t2tfh- +
pan
c a s e 3 : Neutral axis outside the steel section :

A
=
w
b^
< b
" 2 .
c f cd
- A
! < ' * *
s n ( 2 f s d - f c d ) - A a ( 2 fyd ~ f cd )
2 h c fej
=w
"pan
"pa
VV
= h h -VV
-VV
"pen
"c "n
"pan
"psn
n
|
,
W
V A
"psn
Z . ^ s m P"yi
i=l
N o t a t i o n s : see T a b l e VI.3 c)
216
b = bc
Table VI.3 c) Neutral axes and plastic section moduli for concrete-filled circular and
rectangular hollow sections
EC4
[Annex C]
ey
m
hn
tz
1) B ending about major axis (yy) :
- Rectangular hollow sections :
. For the whole cross-section :
W
bh2
3
= -|(r+t) -(r
+ t) 2 (4-)^.
t-r
-W
"pa
W
=
"pc
pc
w.ps
*-2th-2')-^-,(4-,)(~-,|-W^
11
Wps = As |e z i|
i=l
For the cross-section parts within the region of 2 h n :

hn =
A c fed
A s n (2f s d
fed)
2bfed+4t(2fyd-fcd)
Wpan=bhn
W
"pen
- W
"psn
W p c n = ( b - 2 t ) h n - W psn
VVncn = 2wA s n i e z i
'psn
i=l
- Circular hollow sections :

The same equations may be used with good approximation by substituting h=b=d and r=d/2-t.
2) B ending about minor axis (zz) :
For bending about minor axis (zz) the same equations as for major axis (yy) may be used with
exchanging the dimensions h and b as well as the subscript and y.
Notations : fyd
fed
= fy / YMa (see Table II.5 for f y ),

= 0,85 fck / Yc , for tables VI.3 a) and b),
= fck / Yc . for table VI.3 c) (see Table II. 1 for f c k ),
= fsk / Ys (see Table II.8 for f s k ),
fsd
YMa> Yc> Ys are the partial safety factors at ULS (see Table . 10),
A a , Ac, As are the cross-sectional areas defined in Table IV.6,
is the number of reinforcement bars,

is the area of re-bar i (= % 2 / 4 , with = re-bar diameter),
Asi
Asni
is the area of re-bar i situated within the region of 2 hn.
Asn
is the sum of different areas A s n j,
e y i or e z j
is the distance of the re-bar i of area A s i to the relevant middle line (z
or y axis)
217
VI.3
Stability of members to combined

(Nx.Sd;My.Sd) or (Nx.sd;Mz.Sd)
compression
and
uniaxial
bending
EC4
[4.8.3.13]
Ref. 9
[4.5.3]
(1) The principle for checking the stability of composite member under combined
compression and uniaxial bending according to the Eurocode 4 simplified method is
illustrated graphically in Figure VI.6 where NRd and MRd are axial force resistance and
bending moment resistance of the composite member. Figure VI.6 is derived from crosssection interaction curve (see chapter VI.2) for the same bending plane of die applied
moment.
EC4
[4.8.3.13(2)] (2) Firstly, the resistance of the composite member under axial load has to be determined in
N b.Rd
the absence of bending moment. This resistance ratio is given by
where
N pl.Rd
Nb.Rd is the design flexural buckling resistance of the member (see chapter IV.3 and
additional comments in clauses V.1.2 (1) and (2)), Npi.Rd 1S the design plastic resistance
to compression of the composite cross-section (see chapter IV.2 and additional comment
in clause V.1.2 (1)) and where factor accounts for the influence of member
imperfections and slendemess. In Figure VI.6 the bearing capacity to axial load is
represented by the value . At the level of a corresponding value for bending JJj^ can
be read from the cross-section interaction curve. This bending moment resistance k
Mpi.Rd is meant to be the "moment of imperfection" of the composite member,
representing the second-order moment due to imperfections of the member (Mpi.Rd is
the plastic moment resistance of the composite cross-section : see chapter VI.2).
EC4
[4.8.3.13(4)] (3) The influence of the imperfections decreases when the axial load ratio (NRd / Npi.Rd) is
less than and is assumed to vary linearly between and . For an axial load ratio less
than , the effects of imperfections is neglected. The value accounts for the fact that
the imperfections and the bending moment do not always act unfavourably together. For
_(l-r)
end moments the ratio may be calculated from An
. X . but < Xi.
where r
is the ratio of the lesser to the greater end moment as shown in

Table VI.4 and x is defined further in clause VI.3 (4).
In other cases of bending moment distribution within the member length (for instance,
transverse loads) should be taken as zero.
Table VI.4
Typical values of
Bending moment distribution within the member length
Ratio r
Value
0
!)
0,25
-1
0,5
EC4
[4.8.3.13(3)] (4) With a design axial force applied to the member Nx.sd . the axial load ratio X is defined
as follows : Xd = x.Sd , with Npi.Rd presented in previous clause VI.3 (2).

pl.Rd
218
The corresponding bending resistance of the cross-section is given by Pd Mpi.Rd , where

d is issued from the interaction curve (see Figure VI.6).
EC4
[4.8.3.13(5)] ( 5 )
By reading off the horizontal distance from the interaction curve (see Figure VI.6), the
moment resistance ratio, , may be obtained and the moment resistance of the composite
member under combined compression and bending may then be evaluated.
The value defines the ultimate moment resistance that is still available, having taken
into account the influence of second-order effects in the member. According to Figure
VI.6 the length is calculated from :
= d-k
(Xd~Xn)
(X-Xn)
NRd
i1
Npi.Rd
1,0 .
X'
/TV
Xd'
'
\-
'~
1
1
i
k
MRd
Mpi.Rd
Figure VI.6 Design procedure for compression and uniaxial bending interaction
[4.8.3.13 (7)]
In certain regions of the interaction curve, the moment resistance ratio is allowed to be
greater than unity in the presence of axial load. This is due to the fact that in the
presence of axial load, the amount of concrete in tension and thus cracked is reduced,
and more concrete is included in the evaluation of the moment resistance. However, if the
bending moment and the applied load are independent of each other, the value of must
be limited to 1,0 : < 1,0 . On the countrary the value of may be greater than 1,0 if the
bending moment Msd is due solely to the action of the eccentricity of the force Nx.sd,
e.g. in an isolated column without transverse loads acting between the column ends.
[4.8.3.13(8)] (6) Eurocode 4 considers that the member in combined compression and uniaxial bending
has sufficient resistance if the following condition is satisfied :
M S d<0,9pM p l .Rd
where Msd
is the maximum design bending moment applied within the

column length, which may be factored to allow for secondorder effects, if necessary (see chapter VI. 1.1),
is the moment resistance ratio obtained from the cross-section

interaction curve (see clause VI.3 (5)),
Mpi.Rd
is the plastic moment resistance of the composite crosssection (see chapter VI.2).
The interaction curve has been determined without considering the strain limitations in
the concrete. Hence the moments, including second-order effects if necessary, are
219
calculated using the effective elastic flexural stiffness, (E I)e , and taking into account the
entire concrete area of the cross-section (i.e. concrete is uncracked). Consequently, a
reduction factor of 0,9 is applied to the moment resistance as shown in equation
aforementioned to allow for the simplifications in this approach.
Ref. 12
(pp. 58-59) (7) The advantage of this simplified method of calculation is its applicability for any doublesymmetrical cross-section.
Althrough the polygonal course lies beneath the exact interaction curve, the design not
always lies on the conservative side.
If the deviation between polygonal course and exact curve is very large in the region of
the moment of imperfection (at the height of in Figure VI.6), an small on the other
side at the normal force (at X in Figure VI.6), a too small imperfection is taken into
account. In this case the fifth point E of the interaction curve presented in chapter VI.2
has to be determined nearly in the middle between point A and point C.
For concrete-encased I-sections with bending about the strong axis of the section the
exact interaction curve takes an almost linear course between point A and C, so that point
E need not be determined in this case.
Ref. 9 (p. 25)
For concrete-filled hollow sections, the interaction curve AECDB as shown in Figure VI.4
may be preferred as it will give more economical design, especially for columns under
high axial load and low end moments, although much calculation effort is required. For
better approximation, the position of point E may be chosen to be closer to point A
rather than being mid-way between points A and C. Refer to Eurocode 4 for more
information.
VI.4
Resistance of cross-sections to combined compression and biaxial bending

(Nx.Sd, My.sd and Mz.sd)
For the design of a composite member under combined compression and biaxial
bending, verification of cross-section resistance has to be performed separately for each
bending axis. The applied effects of actions combined as (Nx , My.sd) and (Nx.sd.
Mz.sd). have to lie in the valid area of the respective cross-section interaction curves
calculated for bending about major axis (yy) and for bending about minor axis (zz) (see
chapter VI.2).
VI.5
Stability of members to combined compression and biaxial bending (Nx.sd>

My.sd and Mz.sd)
EC4
[4.8.3.14(2)] (1) For the design of a composite member under combined compression and biaxial
bending, the axial resistance of the member in the presence of bending moment for each
axis has to be evaluated separately. In general, it will be obvious which of the axes is
more likely to fail and the imperfections need to be considered only for this direction as
shown in Figure VI.7 (where failure is expected to occur for bending about axis). If it
is not evident which plane is the most critical, checks should be made for both bending
planes.
EC4
[4.8.3.14(4)] (2) The evaluation of the moment resistance ratios p y and for both axes is carried out on
basis of cross-section interaction curves (see chapter VI.2). If the failure plane is known
it is only necessary to consider the effect of geometric imperfections in the critical plane
of member buckling ( in Figure VI.7) and, the moment resistance ratio in the other
plane ( p y in Figure VI.7) may be evaluated without the consideration of imperfections.
The interaction of the bending moments must also be checked using the moment
interaction curve as shown in Figure VI.7. This linear interaction curve is cut off at 0,9
Py and 0,9 . The design moments, My.sd and Mz.sd. related to the respective plastic
moment resistances, must lie within the moment interaction curve.
220
(3) Eurocode 4 considers that the member has sufficient resistance if all the following
conditions are satisfied :
M y.Sd
y Mpl.y.Rd
M z .Sd
EC4 [4.8.3.14 (5)]
pl.z.Rd
and.
<0,9,
<0,9,
M y.Sd
M z.Sd
Mpl.y.Rd
M p L z R d
< 1,0
where , in the case of Figure VI.7,
is calculated from formula : = p d - p k
(Xd-Xn)
(X-Xn)
(see
chapter VI.3),
Py
is evaluated from cross-section interaction curve (see chapter
VI.2),
Mpi.y.Rd and Mpi.z.Rd are the plastic moment resistances of the composite
cross-section (see chapter VI.2).
NRd
Rd_
Npi.Rd
Npi.Rd
My.Rd
'Mpl.y.Rd
a) Plane (xy) expected to fail, with

consideration of imperfections
b) Plane (xz) without consideration

of imperfections
M y.Rd
M pl.y.Rd
0,9 \iy
I
1
1
Mz.Rd
c) Moment interaction curve

for biaxial bending resistance
M pl.z.Rd
0,9
Figure VI.7 Verification for combined compression and biaxial bending
221
VI.6
Influence of transverse shear forces
(1) Similary to explanations given in chapter IV. 1.3, the design transverse shear forces
(Vz.Sd- Vy.Sd) may be assumed to act on the steel section alone, or to share between the
steel section and the concrete. The shear force to be resisted by the concrete must be
considered according to Eurocode 2 (Ref. 2), whereas the shear force to be resisted by
the steel section can be checked using the von Mises criterion. Figure VI.8 shows the
reduction of normal stresses in the shear area (A v ) of the steel section under transverse
shear stress, for the case of totally encased I-profile bent about major y-y axis.
EC4
[4.4.3 (l)]
Figure VI.8 Reduction of normal stresses of steel profile within shear area in the
presence of transverse shear stress
(2) If the design value of the transverse shear force is allocated to the steel section alone and
if:
V z .sd<0,5V p l . z . R d
V y , S d <0,5V p l . y ,R d
and,
where Vpi.z.Rd, Vpj y.Rd are the design plastic shear resistance about minor axis
(zz) and major (yy) axes of steel profile (see chapter
V.2.4.1),
no reduction needs to be made in the resistance moments.
(3) For the resistance of the steel cross-section submitted alone to combined shear force
(Vz.Sd o r Vy.Sd) and uniaxial bending moment (My.sd or M z .sd) if the design value of
transverse shear force
V S d > 0 , 5 V pl.Rd (high shear) ,
then interaction between shear force and bending moment shall bc considered. In this
case the design value of bending moment Msd shall satisfy at each cross-section :
Msd < My.Rd ,but
where My.Rd
M V.Rd < M pl.Rd

is the reduced design plastic resistance moment of the
composite cross-section allowing for the transverse shear
force (see following clauses VI.6 (3) and (5)),
222
Mpi.Rd
is the design plastic resistance moment of the composite crosssection (see chapter VI.2 and Tables VI.3).
EC4
[4.4.3 (2)]
(4) For design purposes, the reduction in the design steel strength (fy.red) i n the shear area
(A v ) of the steel section may be transformed into a reduction in steel thickness of that
shear area (Av) : tw.red- tf.red or tred (see Table VI.5).
Table VI.5
EC4
[4.4.3(2)]
Reduced steel thickness t re d allowing for transverse shear force

If high shear
Type of cross-sections and applied loading
*r
V z .sd
jVtsd
V z .Sd
'
V S d > 0,5 Vpi.Rd
tw.red tw (1 - Pz)
::
tw:
or, tred = t (1 - p z )
tf.red = tf (1 - p y )
or, tred = t (1 - p y )
(Vz.Sd or Vy.sd)
tred = t ( l - p )
Vy.Sd
where
pz
2 V z.Sd
V pl.z.Rd
2 V y.Sd
Py
-1
V'pl.Rd
.
YaV3'
J
2
-1
With Vpl.y.Rd =
'
^Vp L y .Rd
2 V Sd
A
f
^ v v.z 1 y
with Vpi. z .Rd
"Av . y Afy
YaV3 '
Ayly
1
with Vpi.Rd
,V3'
tf
is the flange thickness,
tw
is the web thickness,
is the wall thickness,
fy
is the yield strength of steel profile (see Table II.5),
Ya
is the partial safety factor at ULS for structural steel (see Table 11.10),
Av.z- Av.y and A v
are the shear areas about different loading axes (see

chapter V.2.4.1, Table V.9).
223
EC4
[4.8.3.11 (l)]
EC4 [C.5]
Ref. 9
[4.7]
Using the reduced effective thickness tw.red> tf.red or t re d of the web or the flange of the
steel section, the moment resistances of the composite cross-section (respectively My.y.RdMv.z.Rd r My Rd) may be evaluated using the same set of expressions given in chapter
VI.2 and Tables VI.3 without any modification. The determination of the cross-section
interaction curves for (N x .sd. Vz.sd and My.sd) and (N x .sd Vy.sd and Mz.sd) combined
loading can be carried out with the same method given in chapter VI.2 and the checks of
composite members should follow the same procedure provided in chapters VI.2 to VI.5.
(5) For simplicity, the division of the shear force between the steel section and the concrete
may be neglected, and the design shear force is allocated to the steel section alone. In
practice, it is unlikely that shear will have any influence on the design of composite
columns.
224
Vn COMPOSITE SLABS OR
CONCRETE SLABS
Ref. 7 [5]
VII
Composite slabs or concrete slabs
Vn.l
Generalities
Ref. 7 [5.1]
EC4 [7]
(1) This chapter VII reviews the different forms of concrete slab that may be used in
conjunction with composite beams, and the factors that influence the design of the
beams. The detailed design of composite slabs, which is covered in chapter 7 of
Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4), is not treated in this handbook.
(2) Three types of concrete slab are often used in combination with composite beams. These
three types are listed as follows :
- Solid slab : this is a slab with no internal voids or ribs openings, normally cast-in
place using traditional wooden formwork (see Figure II.3).
- Composite slab : this is a slab which is cast-in-place using decking (cold-formed
profiled steel sheeting) as permanent formwork to the concrete slab. When ribs of
the decking have a re-entrant shape and/or are provided with embossments that
can transmit longitudinal forces between the decking and the concrete, the
resulting slab acts as a composite slab in the direction of the decking ribs (see
Figure II. 3 and Figure VII.l).
- Precast concrete slab : this is a slab consisting of prefabricated concrete units and
cast-in place concrete. There are two forms that may be used : thin precast concrete
plate elements of approximately 50 mm thickness are used as a formwork for solid
slabs or alternatively, deep precast concrete elements are used for longer spans with
a thin layer of cast-in-place concrete as a wearing surface. Deep precast concrete
units often have hollow cores which serve to reduce their dead weight (see Figure
II.3).
No further information is given on solid slabs or precast concrete slabs in this chapter
VII. For those cases reference should be made respectively to Eurocode 2 (Ref. 2) and to
Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4, chapter 8).
(3) In the design of composite slabs the following aspects have to be considered :
EC4 [4.2.2]
- The cross-sectional geometry of

area of the slab cannot be used
"effective" cross-sectional area
effective slab widths are given in
EC4 [6.3.3]
- The influence of the slab on the shear connection between the slab and the beam :
stud behaviour and maximum strength may be modified due to the shape of the
ribs in the slab (see chapter V.2.7.3). The correct placement of studs relative to ribs
is of great importance (see chapter V.2.7.4).
EC4 [6.6]
- The quantity and placement of transverse reinforcement : transverse reinforcement

is used to ensure that longitudinal shear failure or splitting of the concrete does not
occur before failure of the composite beam itself (see chapter V.2.7.5).
227
the slab : In some cases the full cross-sectional

for composite beam calculations. A reduced or
must be calculated. Formulae for determining
chapter V.2.1.
>
a) Composite slab with re-entrant deck profile
y-
mesh
^r
^
-*
'slab
hp<85mm^
embossments/
centroidal axis
of sheet
ff
bo>hp
>50mm
b) Composite slab with trapezoidal deck profile, showing the main geometrical parameters
Figure VELI Typical composite slabs
228
Ref. 7 [5.2]
Ref. 7 [5.2.1]
VII2
Initial slab design
Vn.2.1
Proportions of composite slab
(1) Typical composite slabs are shown in Figure VII.l. In general such slabs consist of :
decking (cold formed profiled steel sheeting), concrete and light mesh reinforcement.
There are many types of decking currently marketed in Europe. These can be, however,
broadly classified into two groups :
- Re-entrant rib geometries. An example of such a profile is shown in Figure VII.l
a). Note that embossements are often placed on the top flange of the deck.
- Open or trapezoidal rib geometries. An example of such a profile is shown in
Figures VII.l b). Note that embossements are often placed on the webs of the
deck.
(2) Composite slab depths range from 100 to 200 mm; 120 to 180 mm being the most
common depending on the fire resistance requirements.
(3) Decking rib geometries may vary considerably in form, width and depth. Typical rib
heights, hp, are between 40 mm and 85 mm. Centre-line distances between ribs generally
vary between 150 mm and 300 mm. Embossment shapes and sheet overlaps also vary
between decking manufacturers.
(4) In general, the sheet steel is hot-dipped galvanised with 0,02 mm of zinc coating on each
side. The base material is cold-formed steel with thicknesses between 0,75 mm and 1,5
mm. The yield strength fsk of the steel is in the range of 220 to 350 N/mm2.
(5) Deeper decks permit longer spans to be concreted without the need for propping. Ribs
deeper than 85 mm, however, are not treated in this handbook. For such ribs composite
action with the steel beam may be significantly reduced, thus requiring special attention.
Vn.2.2
Ref. 7 [5.2.2]
Construction condition
(1) Normally, decking is first used as a construction platform. This means that it supports
construction operatives, their tools and other material commonly found on construction
sites. Good construction practice requires that the decking sheets be attached to each
other and to all permanent supports using screws or shot-fired nails.
(2) Next, the decking is used as formwork so that it supports the weight of the wet concrete,
reinforcement and the concreting gang. The maximum span length of the decking
without propping can be calculed according to the mies given in Part 1.3 or Annex A of
Eurocode 3. Characteristic loads for the construction phase are intruduced in addition to
the self weight of the slab (see chapter III).
(3) Typically, decking with a steel thickness of 1,2 mm, and a rib height h p of 60 mm, can
span between 3 m and 3,5 m without propping.
Ref. 7 [5.2.3]
Vn.2.3
Composite action
After the concrete has hardened, composite action is achieved by the combination of
chemical bond and mechanical interlock between the steel decking and the concrete. The
chemical bond is unreliable and is not taken into account in design. Composite slab
design is generally based on information provided by the decking manufacturer, in the
form of allowable imposed load tables. These values are determined from test results and
their interpretation as required in Eurocode 4 (Ref. 4 : 10.3). In most catalogues the
resistance to imposed load is given as a function of decking type and steel sheet
thickness, slab thickness, span length and the number of temporary supports. Generally,
these resistances are well in excess of the applied loads, indicating that composite action
is satisfactory or that the design is controlled by other limitations. However, care should
be taken to read the catalogue for any limitations or restrictions due to dynamic loads,
and concentrated point and line loads.
229
Vn.2.4
Ref. 7 [5.2.4]
EC4
[7.6.2.2]
(1)
Deflections
Deflection calculations in reinforced concrete are notoriously inaccurate, and therefore

some approximations are justified to obtain an estimate for the deflections of a
composite slab. The stiffness of a composite slab may be calculated from the cracked
section properties of a reinforced concrete slab, by treating the cross-sectional area of
decking as an equivalent reinforcing bar.
(2) However, if the maximum ratio of span length to slab depth (hsiab (= hp + hc),in Figure
VII.l b)) is within the limits of Table VII.l no deflection check is needed. The end span
should be considered as the general case for design. In this case it is assumed that
minimum anti-crack reinforcement exists at the supports. Experience shows that imposed
load deflections do not exceed span/350 when using the span to depth ratios shown in
Table VII.l. More refined deflection calculations will lead to greater span to depth ratios
than those given in Table VII.l.
Table VII.l Maximum span to depth ratios of composite slabs (L / hsiar))
Ref. 7 [5.3]
Vn.3
Maximum Span : Deph ratios
End span
Internal span
Single span
Normal weight concrete
35
38
32
Light weight concrete
30
33
27
Influence of decking on the design of composite beams
(1) Profiled steel decking performs a number of important roles, and influences the design
of the composite beam in a number of ways. It :
- may provide lateral restraint to the steel beams during constructions (see chapter
V.2.5.2),
- causes a possible reduction in the design resistance of the shear connectors (see
chapter V.2.7.3),
- acts as transverse reinforcement leading to a reduction in the amount of bar
reinforcement needed (see chapter V.2.7.5).
(2) The orientation of the sheeting is important. Decking ribs may be oriented in two ways
with respect to the composite beam :
- decking ribs transverse to the steel beam. The decking may be discontinuous (see
Figure VII.2 a)), or continuous (see Figure VII.2 b)) over the top flange of the
beam ,
- decking ribs parallel to the steel beam (see Figure VII.2 c) and d)).
The shear connectors may be welded through the decking, or placed in holes formed in
the troughs of the decking. In the latter case the shear connectors can also be welded to
the steel beam off-site. When the through welding procedure is used on site, studs may
not be welded through more than one sheet and overlapping of sheets is not permitted
(see chapter V.2.7.4).
230
b0>hp
-*
-**
m.>2d
Big
I
h c >50mmi
=h=
hp< 85 mmi
a) discontinuous decking
b) continuous decking
Decking ribs transverse to the beam
/^JLzpM
d)
c)
Decking ribs parallel to the beam

Figure VII.2 Orientation of profiled steel decking
Vn.3.1
Ribs transverse to the beam
Ref. 7 [5.3.1]
The concrete slab in the direction of the beam is not a homogeneous (solid) slab (see
Figure VII.2 a) and b)). This has important consequences for the design of the
composite beam, as only the depth of concrete over the ribs acts in compression (see
chapter V.2.5.1). Additionally, there is often a significant influence on the resistance of
the shear connectors due to the shape of the deck profile (see chapter V.2.7.3).
Vn.3.2
Ribs parallel to the beam
Ref. 7 [5.3.2]
In the construction phase, decking with this orientation is not considered effective in
resisting lateral torsional buckling of the steel beam (see Figure VII.2, c) and d)).
In this case, the complete cross-section of the slab may be used in calculating the
moment resistance of the beam (see chapter V.2.5.1). The orientation of the ribs also
implies that there will be little reduction in the studs due to the ribs in the concrete slab
(see chapter V.2.7.3).
231
Ref. 7 [5.5]
Vn.4
Minimum transverse reinforcement
(1) Transverse reinforcement must be provided in the slab to ensure that longitudinal
shearing failure or splitting does not occur before the failure of the composite beam
itself (see chapter V.2.7.5).
(2) The steel decking is not allowed to participate as transverse reinforcement unless there is
an effective means of transferring tension into the slab, such as by through-deck welding
of the shear connectors. Where the decking is continuous, the decking is effective in
transferring tension and can act as transverse reinforcement. This is not necessarily the
case if the ribs are parallel to the beam because of overlaps in the sheeting.
(3) Minimum amounts of transverse reinforcement are required. The reinforcement should
be distributed uniformly. The minimum amount is 0,002 times the concrete section
above the ribs.
232
CORDIS
The Community Research and Development Information Service
Your European R&D Information Source

CORDIS represents a central source of information crucial for any organisation - be it industry, small and
medium-sized enterprises, research organisations or universities - wishing to participate in the
exploitation of research results, participate in EU funded science and technology programmes and/or seek
partnerships.
CORDIS makes information available to the public through a collection of databases. The databases cover
research programmes and projects from their preparatory stages through to their execution and final
publication of results. A daily news service provides up-to-date information on EU research activities
including calls for proposals, events, publications and tenders as well as progress and results of research
and development programmes. A partner search facility allows users to register their own details on the
database as well as search for potential partners. Other databases cover Commission documents, contact
information and relevant publications as well as acronyms and abbreviations.
By becoming a user of CORDIS you have the possibility to:
Identify opportunities to manufacture and market new products
Identify partnerships for research and development
Identify major players in research projects
Review research completed and in progress in areas of your interest
The databases - nine in total - are accessible on-line free of charge. As a user-friendly aid for on-line
searching, Watch-CORDIS, a Windows-based interface, is available on request. The databases are also
available on a CD-ROM. The current databases are:
News (English, German and French version) - Results Partners - Projects - Programmes - Publications Acronyms - Comdocuments - Contacts
CORDIS on World Wide Web

The CORDIS service was extended in September 1994 to include the CORDIS World Wide Web (WWW)
server on Internet. This service provides information on CORDIS and the CORDIS databases, various
software products, which can be downloaded (including the above mentioned Watch-CORDIS) and the
possibility of downloading full text documents including the work programmes and information packages
for all the research programmes in the Fourth Framework and calls for proposals.
The CORDIS WWW service can be accessed on the Internet using browser software (e.g. Netscape) and
the address is: http://www.cordis.lu/
The CORDIS News database can be accessed through the WWW.
Contact details f or further Information

If you would like further information on the CORDIS services, publications and products, please contact
the CORDIS Help Desk :
CORDIS Customer Service
B.P 2373
L-1023 Luxembourg
Telephone:
Fax:
E-mail:
WWW:
+352-441012-2240
+352-441012-2248
helpdesk@cordis.lu
http://www.cordis.lu/
European Commission
EUR 18403 Properties and in-service performance
Simplified version of Eurocode 4 for usual buildings
J. B. Schleich, Ph. Chantrain
Luxembourg: Office for Official Publications of the European Communities
1998 232 pp. 21 29.7 cm
Technical steel research series
ISBN 92-828-4467-6
Price (excluding VAT) in Luxembourg: ECU 40
The aim of the following ECSC research is to elaborate a simple but complete document to
design commonly used buildings with composite steel-concrete sections. This document is
based completely on Eurocode 4 and each paragraph totally conforms to Eurocode 4. Only
the design formulas necessary to design braced buildings have been taken into account in
this document. The size of the buildings is limited to 20 storeys. Halls are not treated. The
designers and steel constructors will be able to calculate and erect a commonly used
composite steel-concrete building with this document. Therefore, the important load cases
from Eurocode 1 have also been included in this document.
The working group of this research project was composed of 15 European engineering
offices.
The link of the working group to the drafting panel of Eurocode 4 was guaranteed by
Professor Sedlacek of Aachen University.
The first part of the research consisted of two different examples of calculation carried out
by engineering offices:
check of an existing braced composite steel-concrete structure with Eurocodes 1 and 4;

and
design of a braced composite steel-concrete building with Eurocodes 1 and 4.
In the second part of this research, a practical handbook of Eurocode 4 has been written on
the basis of the design procedures and the needed formulas used in the examples of
calculation.
Venta Salg Verkauf Sales Vente Vendita Verkoop Venda Myynti Frsljning
BELGIQUE/BELGIE
NEDERLAND
CYPRUS
INDIA
Jean De Lannoy
Avenue du Rot 202/Konlngslaan 202
B-1190 Bnjxelles/Bnjssel
Tl. (32-2) 538 43 08
Fax (32-2) 538 08 41
E-mail: jean.de.lannoy @ nfoboard.be
URL http://www.jean-de-lannoy.be
SDU Servicecentrum Uitgevers

Christoffel Planrjjnstraat 2
Postbus 20014
2500 EA Den Haag
Tel. (31-70)378 98 80
Fax (31-70) 378 97 83
E-mall: sdu@sdu.nl
URL: http://www.sdu.nl
Cyprus Chamber of Commerce

and Industry
PO B ox 1455
CY-1509 Nicosia
Tel. (357-2) 66 95 00
Fax (357-2) 66 10 44
E-mail: nfo@ccci.org.cy
EB1C India
3rd Floor, Y. B. Chavan Centre
Gen. J. Bhosale Marg.
400 021 Mumbai
Tel. (91-22)282 60 64
Fax (91-22) 285 45 64
E-mail: ebic@giasbm01 .vsnl.net.in
URL: http://www.ebicindia.com
STERREICH
Eesti KaubandusTstuskoda (Estonian

Chamber of Commerce and industry)
Toom-Kooli 17
EE-0001 Tallinn
Tel. (372) 646 02 44
Fax (372) 646 02 45
E-mall: elnfo@koda.ee
URL: http://www.koda.ee
La librairie europenne/De Europese

Boekhandel
Rue de la Lol 244/Wetstraat 244
B-1040 Bruxelles/Brussel
Tl. (32-2) 295 26 39
Fax (32-2) 735 08 60
E-mall: mail@libeurop.be
URL: http://www.Ubeurop.be
Moniteur belga/B elglsch Staatsblad
Rue de Louvain 40-42/Leuvenseweg 40-42
B-1000 Bruxelles/Brussel
Tl. (32-2) 552 22 11
Fax (32-2) 511 01 84
DANMARK
J. H. Schultz Information A/S
Hersledvang 10-12
DK-2620 Albertslund
Tlf. (45) 43 63 23 00
Fax (45) 43 63 19 69
E-mall: schultz@schultz.dk
URL http://www.schultz.dk
DEUTSCHLAND
Bundesanzeiger Verlag GmbH
Vertriebsabteilung
Amsterdamer Strae 192
D-50735 Kln
Tel. (49-221)97 66 80
Fax (49-221) 97 66 82 78
E-Mail: vertrieb@bundesanzelger.de
URL: http://www.bundesanzeiger.de
/GREECE
G. C. Eleftheroudakls SA
International B ookstore
Panepistimiou 17
GR-10564 Athlna
Tel. (30-1) 331 41 80/1/2/3/4/5
Fax (30-1) 323 98 21
E-mall: elebooks@netor.gr
ESPANA
Boletn Oficial del Estado
Trafalgar. 27
E-28071 Madrid
Tel. (34)915 38 21 11 (Libros)/
913 84 17 15 (Suscripciones)
Fax (34) 915 38 21 21 Libros)/
913 84 17 14 (Suscripciones)
E-mail: clientes@com.boe.es
URL: http://www.boe.es
Mundi Prensa Libros, SA
Castell, 37
E-28001 Madrid
Tel. (34)914 36 37 00
Fax (34) 915 75 39 98
E-mail: libreria@mundiprensa.es
URL: http^/www.mundlprensa.com
FRANCE
Journal officiel
Service des publications des CE
26. rue Desaix
F-75727 Paris Cedex 15
Tl. (33) 140 58 77 31
Fax (33) 140 58 77 00
IRELAND
Government Supplies Agency
Publications Section
4-5 Harcourt Road
Dublin 2
Tel. (353-1)661 31 11
Fax (353-1) 475 27 60
ITALIA
Licosa SpA
Via Duca di Calabria, 1/1
Casella postale 552
1-50125 Firenze
Tel. (39-55) 64 54 15
Fax (39-55) 64 12 57
E-mail: licosa@ftbcc.it
URL: http://www.flbcc.it/licosa
LUXEMBOURG
Messageries du livre SARL
5, rue Raiffeisen
L-2411 Luxembourg
Tl. (352)40 10 20
Fax (352) 49 06 61
E-mail: mdl@pt.lu
URL: http://www.mdl.lu
Abonnements:
Messageries Paul Kraus
11, rue Christophe Plantin
L-2339 Luxembourg
Tl. (352) 49 98 88-8
Fax (352) 49 98 88-444
E-mall: mpk@pt.lu
URL: http://www.mpk.lu
EESTI
Manz'sche Verlags und
Universittsbuchhandlung GmbH
Kohlmarkt 16
A-1014Wlen
Tel. (43-1)53 16 11 00
Fax (43-1) 53 16 11 67
E-Mail: bestellenQmanz.co.at
URL: http://www.austria.EU.net:81/manz
PORTUGAL
Distribuidora de Livros Bertrand Ld.1
Grupo Bertrand, SA
Rua das Terras dos Vales, 4-A
Apartado 60037
P-2700 Amadora
Tel. (351-2)495 90 50
Fax (351-2) 496 02 55
Imprensa NacionalCasa da Moeda, EP
Rua Marqus S da Bandeira, 16-A
P-1050 Lisboa Codex
Tel. (351-1)353 03 99
Fax (351-1) 353 02 94
E-mail: del.incm@mall.telepac.pt
URL: http://www.incm.pt
SUOMl/FINLAND
ISRAEL
ROY International
PO Box 13056
61130 Tel Aviv
Tel. (972-3)546 14 23
Fax (972-3) 546 14 42
E-mail: royil@netvision.net.il
Sub-agent for the Palestinian Authority:
MAGYARORSZG
Euro Info Service
Europa Haz
Margitsziget
PO B ox 475
H-1396 Budapest 62
Tel. (36-1)350 80 25
Fax (36-1) 350 90 32
E-mail: eurolnfo@mail.matav.hu
URL: http://www.euroinfo.hu/index.htm
MALTA
Miller Distributors Ltd
Malta International Airport
PO Box 25
Luqa LQA 05
Tel. (356) 66 44 88
Fax (356) 67 67 99
E-mail: gwirth@usa.net
Index Information Services

PO Box 19502
Jerusalem
Tel. (972-2) 627 16 34
Fax (972-2) 627 12 19
JAPAN
PSI-Japan
Asahi Sanbancho Plaza #206
7-1 Sanbancho, Chiyoda-ku
Tokyo 102
Tel. (81-3)32 34 69 21
Fax (81-3) 32 34 69 15
E-mail: books@psi-japan.co.jp
URL: http://www.psi-japan.com
MALAYSIA
EBIC Malaysia
Level 7, Wisma Hong Leong
18 Jalan Perak
50450 Kuala Lumpur
Tel. (60-3) 262 62 98
Fax (60-3) 262 61 98
E-mail: ebic-kl@mol.net.my
Akateeminen Klrjakauppa/Akademlska
Bokhandeln
Keskuskatu 1/Centralgatan 1
PL/PB 128
FIN-00101 Helsinki/Helsingfors
P/tfn (358-9) 121 44 18
F7lax (358-9) 121 44 35
Shkposti: akatllaus stockmann.fi
URL: http://www.akateeminen.com
Ars Polona
Krakowskle Przedmiescie 7
Skr. pocztowa 1001
PL-00-950 Warszawa
Tel. (48-22)826 12 01
Fax (48-22) 826 62 40
E-mall: ars_pol@bevy.hsn.com.pl
SVERIGE
ROMANIA
BTJ AB
Traktorvgen 11
S-221 82 Lund
Tfn. (46-46) 18 00 00
Fax (46-46) 30 79 47
E-post: btjeu-pub@btj.se
URL: http://www.btj.se
Euromedia
Sir. G-ral Berthelot Nr 41
RO-70749 Bucuresti
Tel. (40-1)315 44 03
Fax (40-1) 315 44 03
UNITED KINGDOM
Centrum VTI SR
Nam. Slobody, 19
SK-81223 Bratislava
Tel. (421-7)531 83 64
Fax (421-7) 531 83 64
E-mail: europ@tbbl.sltk.stuba.sk
URL: http://www.sltk.stuba.sk
CCEC
60-letiya Oktyabrya Av. 9
117312 Moscow
Tel. (70-95) 135 52 27
Fax (70-95) 135 52 27
SLOVENIA
SOUTH AFRICA
Gospodarski Vestnik
Dunajska cesta 5
SLO-1000 Ljubljana
Tel. (386)611 33 03 54
Fax (386) 611 33 91 28
E-mall: repansekj@gyestnik.sl
URL: http://www.gvestnlk.si
Safto
Safto House
NO 5 Esterhyzen Streel
PO Box 782 706
2146 Sandton
Tel. (27-11)883 37 37
Fax (27-11)883 65 69
E-mail: emalstar@ide.co.za
URL: http:/www.saflo.co.za
The Stationery Office Ltd

International Sales Agency
51 Nine Elms Lane
London SW8 5DR
Tel. (44-171)873 90 90
Fax (44-171) 873 84 63
E-mail: ipaenqulries@theso.co.uk
URL: http://www.the-stationery-office.co.uk
ISLAND
Bokabud Larusar Blondel
Sklavrdustig, 2
IS-101 Reykjavik
Tel. (354)551 56 50
Fax(354)552 55 60
POLSKA
Swets Norge AS
stenjovelen 18
Boks 6512 Etlerstad
N-0606 Oslo
Tel. (47-22) 97 45 00
Fax (47-22) 97 45 45
SCHWEIZ/SUISSE/SVIZZERA
Euro Info Center Schweiz
c/o OSEC
Stampfenbachstrae 85
PF 492
CH-8035 Zrich
Tel. (41-1)365 53 15
Fax (41-1) 365 54 11
E-mail: eics@osec.ch
URL: http://www.osec.ch/eics
BALGARIJA
Europress Euromedia Ltd
59, blvd Vltosha
BG-1000 Sofia
Tel. (359-2) 980 37 66
Fax (359-2) 980 42 30
E-mail: Mllena@mbox.cit.bg
CESKA REPUB LIKA
USIS
NIS-prodejna
Havelkova 22
CZ-130 00Praha3
Tel. (420-2) 24 23 14 86
Fax (420-2) 24 23 11 14
E-mall: nkposp@dec.nis.cz
URL: http://www.nis.cz
EBIC Philippines
19th Floor, PS Bank Tower
Sen. Gil J. Puyat Ave. cor. Tindalo St.
Makati City
Metro Manilla
Tel. (63-2) 759 66 80
Fax (63-2) 759 66 90
E-mail: eccpcom@globe.com.ph
URL: http://www.eccp.com
SLOVAKIA
TURKIYE
NORGE
PHILIPPINES
Dnya Infotel AS
100, Yil Mahallessi 34440
TR-80050 B agcllar-lstanbul
Tel. (90-212)629 46 89
Fax (90-212) 629 46 27
AUSTRALIA
Hunter Publications
PO Box 404
3067 Abbotsford, Victoria
Tel. (61-3)94 17 53 61
Fax (61-3) 94 19 71 54
E-mail: jpdavies@ozemail.com.au
CANADA
Renouf Publishing Co. Ltd
5369 Chemin Canotek Road Unit 1
K U 9J3 Ottawa, Ontario
Tel. (1-613)745 26 65
Fax (1-613) 745 76 60
E-mail: order.dept@renoufbooks.com
URL: http://www.renoufbooks.com
EGYPT
The Middle East Observer
41 Sherif Street
Cairo
Tel. (20-2) 393 97 32
Fax (20-2) 393 97 32
HRVATSKA
Mediatrade Ltd
Pavia Hatza 1
HR-10000 Zagreb
Tel. (385-1)43 03 92
Fax (385-1) 43 03 92
RUSSIA
SOUTH KOREA
Information Centre for Europe (ICE)
204 Woo Sol Parktel
395-185 Seogyo Dong, Mapo Ku
121-210 Seoul
Tel. (82-2) 322 53 03
Fax (82-2) 322 53 14
E-mail: eurolnfo@shlnbiro.com
THAILAND
EBIC Thailand
29 Vanissa Building, 8th Floor
Soi Chidlom
Ploenchit
10330 Bangkok
Tel. (66-2) 655 06 27
Fax (66-2) 655 06 28
E-mail: ebicbkk@ksc15.th.com
URL: http^www.ebicbkk.org
UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
Bernan Associates
4611-F Assembly Drive
Lanham MD20706
Tel. (1-800) 274 44 47 (toll free telephone)
Fax (1-800) 865 34 50 toll Iree fax)
E-mail: query@beman.com
URL: http://www.beman.com
ANDERE LANDER/OTHER COUNTRIES/
AUTRES PAYS
Bitte wenden Sie sich an ein Bro Ihrer
Wahl / Please contact the sales office of
your choice / Veuillez vous adresser au
bureau de vente de votre choix
NOTICE TO THE READER

Information on European Commission publications in the areas of research and innovation can
be obtained from:
o
CORDIS, the Community R & D Information Service
For more information, contact:

CORDIS Customer Service, B P 2373, L-1023 Luxembourg
Tel. (352) 44 10 12-2240; fax (352) 44 10 12-2248; e-mail: helpdesk@cordis.lu
or visit the website at http://www.cordis.lu/
Euroabstracts
The European Commission's periodical on research publications, issued every two months.
For more information, contact:
RTD help desk, European Commission, DG XIII, L-2920 Luxembourg
Fax (352) 43 01-32084; e-mail: rtd-helpdesk@lux.dg13.cec.be
Price (excluding VAT) in Luxembourg: ECU 40

ISBN
*
EUR
op
12-fiEfl-44L,7-t,
OFFICE FOR OFFICIAL PUB LICATIONS

OF THE EUROPEAN COMMUNITIES
"
* *
L-2985 Luxembourg
9 789282"844670'>

Cgna18403ens 001 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Cgna18403ens 001 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

EUROPEAN

technical steel research

Properties and in-service performance

Properties and in-service performance

Simplified version of Eurocode 4

PRINTED ON WHITE CHLORINE-FREE PAPER

3. Part 1 : Worked examples

3.1 Exercise 1 : Verification of an existing braced composite steel-concrete structure

3.2 Exercise 2: Design of a new braced composite steel-concrete structure

4. Part 2 : Design handbook

"Design handbook according to Eurocode 4 for braced composite steel-concrete buildings".

Eurocode 1 : Basis of Design and Actions on Structures.

"Simplified version of Eurocode 4 for usual buildings", C.E.C. Agreement 7210-SA/516,

SIMPLIFIED VERSION OF EUROCODE 4

Varendonck Groep / Steeltrack

Schroeder & Associs

Ove Arup & Partners

Rambll, Hannemann & Hjlund

Part 1 : Worked examples

(engineering office nr. 3),

(Annex 2 of Ref. 3),

(engineering office nr. 5),

(Annex 3 of Ref. 3),

(engineering office nr. 11),

(Annex 4 of Ref. 3),

(engineering office nr. 12),

(Annex 5 of Ref. 3),

(engineering office nr. 18),

(Annex 6 of Ref. 3),

(engineering office nr. 19),

(Annex 7 of Ref. 3),

Exercise 1: Verification of an existing braced composite steel-concrete structure

The "Keywords" representing the different steps of a check procedure.

conceptional type of structure.

design and vrification.

The "Object" describing each step of the verification.

Exercise 2: Design of a new braced composite steel-concrete structure

Part 2 : Design handbook

In general, for the design of budings we need to :

l o c i c&xvxri o e i i m R I m n f t c p / i 8SS ;; S '

'~ -loads on floor and roofs

/ E G 1 :^d;ads; : ;Snow loads ; v p ? |

elastic or plastic model

- bending moment and shear

Resistance of members (stability)

Requirement & References

Exercise 1.Verification of an existing braced structure

7, optimisation of the weight

bending moment and shear

Resistance of members (stability)

Exercise 2.Design of a braced structure

Schroeder & Associs

Ove Arup & Partners

Exercise 3 : Type of building to be designed

Eurocode 4 Formulae References

1. Conceptional type of structure.

-> Chapter 4.9.4.2 => Chapter 5.2.5.2 of EC 3

-> Chapter EC1 Part 2.7: Wind loads.

3.2. Snow loads (s)

-> Chapter EC1 Part 2.5: Snow loads.

Eurocode 4 Formulae References

> beams, portal frames.structural frames